JP7331903B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether a game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game is executed that is advantageous to the player.

JP 2012-217766 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and When the identification information indicating the first determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is terminated. and a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the first game state, and the game state setting means sets the game state. an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions for the second game state to be executed; a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect for suggesting the period during which the second game state continues; suggesting effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the suggesting effect executed by the effect executing means, wherein the suggesting effect mode setting means selects one of the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means. a performance mode of the suggestive performance can be set based on the end condition that is likely to be satisfied; and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied, wherein the end condition setting means is, as the plurality of end conditions, a first end condition that is likely to be satisfied when the first determination is performed more often than the second determination, and the second determination is performed more often than the first determination and a second end condition that is likely to be satisfied when the game machine is set to the second game state in which at least the first end condition and the second end condition are set. The suggestive effect can be started in the effect mode corresponding to the second end condition without allowing the player to grasp the first end condition, and the second game state is set. During the period from the end of the privilege game until the first execution of the second determination, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the ease of establishment of the second termination condition in the second game state.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the determination means for executing a predetermined determination when the determination condition is satisfied, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the first When the identification information indicating the determination result is displayed, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished, a first and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second game state set by the game state setting means. end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions for the game state; suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect for suggesting a period during which the second game state continues; and the suggestive effect execution means. suggestive effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be performed, wherein the suggestive effect mode setting means selects one of the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means that is likely to be met. An effect mode of the suggestive effect can be set based on an end condition, and the determination means includes first determination means capable of executing a first determination when a first determination condition is satisfied as the determination condition; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied; As termination conditions, a first termination condition that is likely to be satisfied when the first determination is performed more often than the second determination, and a termination condition that is likely to be satisfied when the second determination is performed more often than the first determination and a second end condition can be set at least, and the gaming machine can set the first end condition when the second game state in which at least the first end condition and the second end condition are set is set. The suggestive effect can be started in the effect mode corresponding to the second end condition without allowing the player to grasp the condition, and the privilege game in which the second game state is set is completed. During the period from when the second determination is first performed, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the ease with which the second end condition is satisfied in the second game state.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an operation diagram of the operation unit as seen from the rear side; (a) is a schematic top view of the closed state of the operation unit, and (b) is a schematic top view of the open state of the operation unit. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of time saving state rush displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when winning a small hit A during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when winning a small hit B during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content of the situation display mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen emphasizing right-handed hits in the small hit A game screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) It is the figure which showed an example when a ball|ball wins after a) was displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen emphasizing right-handed hits in the small hit B game screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) shows ( It is the figure which showed an example when a ball|ball wins after a) was displayed. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a special symbol 2 random number table according to the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, (d) is a time saving in the first embodiment FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an assignment table; It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is a diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for time reduction in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an open scenario table in the first embodiment; FIG. 2A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM within the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a status display selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a final status display selection table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment; (a) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of the small winning game when winning a small winning A in the first embodiment. (a) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of the small winning game when winning a small winning B in the first embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the short-time update process for small hits performed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving number of times update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows a jackpot end time process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit relation update processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 7 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment It is a flow chart showing small hit start command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a small winning end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 10 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing instruction command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the time saving state rush displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a left-handed game is started during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of starting the right hitting game in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd design display device in a form. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode regarding the right-handed game in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the time saving game content in the time saving state in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the second embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the second embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a special symbol 1 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, (b) is the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, (d) is the second embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 2 table in a form. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving variation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the second embodiment, (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 small per type selection 2 table in the second embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small per type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device according to a second embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; It is a block diagram showing. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a hold display selection table set in a ROM within the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction frequency|count update process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows prefetching processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a game state setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment 10 is a flow chart showing a game content determination process performed. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing various counter update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, (b) is a third symbol display device in the third embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example which shows the frequency|count of time saving in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM within a main controller in a third embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a special symbol 1 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, (b) is the main control in the third embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision 3 table set to ROM of the apparatus. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of an open scenario 3 table set in a ROM within a main controller in the third embodiment; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device according to a third embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; It is a block diagram showing. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction remaining period discrimination|determination table set to ROM in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment; 13 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 3 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the third embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; 14 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction remaining period discrimination|determination process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing definite fluctuation determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the third symbol display device when the time saving A is set as the time saving state in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a fourth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus when the time saving B is set as a time saving state in . (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the number-of-time-savings correction|amendment production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the fourth embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment, (b) is the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern 4 table in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal variation pattern table in the fourth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table for time saving A in the fourth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the variation pattern table for time saving B in the fourth embodiment. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within a sound ramp control device according to a fourth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the sound ramp control device according to a fourth embodiment; It is a block diagram showing. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special figure 2 deviating stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving number of times correction processing for a display performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the first embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the time saving state displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the production|presentation modification of each embodiment. (a) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the time saving state displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the production|presentation modification of each embodiment. (b) is a diagram for explaining the flow of effects in a modification of effects. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. (a) is an enlarged front view of an upper part of the game board in the fifth embodiment. (a) is an enlarged front view showing that an electric accessory provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment is in an open state; (b) is an electric accessory provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an enlarged front view showing that the accessory is in a closed state; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device when a jackpot game is started in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a jackpot game in the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display device which can be displayed inside. It is the schematic diagram which showed the time saving game content in the time saving state in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern 5 table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a time-saving simultaneous variation pattern table in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in an audio ramp control device according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing signal input processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a timing chart schematically showing an opening pattern of an electric accessory according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is the transition diagram which showed the transition destination of the game state in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within a main controller in a sixth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 1 selection table set in the ROM in the main controller in the sixth embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the sixth embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 selection table set in the internal ROM. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending processing 6 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 81. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 to 7 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 8 is the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Details of the numerous ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

Specifically, a ball fired with a firing intensity of 90% to 100% always passes through the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and a ball fired with a firing intensity of 40% to 50% is always displayed variablely. A sphere configured to pass through the left region of the equipment unit 80 and fired at a firing intensity of 50% to 60% will mostly pass through the left region of the variable display unit 80, and a portion will be displayed in a variable display. It passes through the area to the right of the equipment unit 80 . Also, most of the spheres fired with a firing intensity of 70% to 90% pass through the right side area of the variable display unit 80, and some pass through the left side area of the variable display unit 80. It is

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. It is constructed by assembling a port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a prize winning opening is provided and a shot is played). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. . Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing by the lighting state, or display the stop symbol. is a pattern corresponding to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set as a game state after the jackpot game is over) or a pattern corresponding to a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal state is set as a game state after the jackpot game is over). The presence is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and error display are performed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpots determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the time saving state is given (15R time saving jackpot), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5 rounds and after the jackpot ends. There are prepared a 5R time-reduction jackpot (5R time-reduction with jackpot) to which a time-reduction state is given and a 5R normal jackpot (5R time-reduction-no jackpot) in which the round number of the jackpot game is 5R and no time-reduction state is given after the big win.

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a loss, the player is given less benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Privilege to let) A small hit is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not it is a small win) as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicate the big win when the result is a big win. A pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “15R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a short-time state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the “5R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds. It is a big hit that shifts to a time saving state. In addition, "5R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, as a jackpot game provided when a jackpot with a special pattern is won, the "15R time-saving jackpot" that can give the player the most prizes and the next most prizes can be given. ``5R time-saving jackpot'' and ``5R normal jackpot'' in which the least privilege is given to the player among the jackpot games, either jackpot game is provided. As a result, even if a big win is won in the lottery of the special symbols, the player can expect that the jackpot game with the largest number of benefits will be provided among the jackpot games with different benefits that can be given. can let

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of bonuses given to the player according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game ends. The size is defined, but without being limited to this, the size of the privilege given to the player may be defined using conditions other than the above, and different benefits are given without defining the size of the privilege. It is also possible to simply change the content of the jackpot game so that it is played.

In addition, the “time-saving state” is a game in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the big win, although the probability of the big win is the same as in the normal state. state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is a win. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in the case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, only a part of the setting contents described above may be used, or the contents described above may be used. Besides, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than that in the normal state.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the "time saving state", the number of fluctuations (total number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the first predetermined number of times (100 times) If (first end condition), or if the number of times a small hit is won in the lottery of special symbols reaches the second predetermined number of times (for example, once) (second end condition) When established, the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state. In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to make the player play while exciting how long the time saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue. can.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a plurality of small hit types (for example, small hit A to small hit C) are prepared as small hits that can be won in the special symbol lottery, and each small hit type is second. The number of times the termination condition is satisfied is set differently. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether or not the time-saving state will end based only on the number of small wins won during the time-saving state, so that the player is always given a sense of tension to reduce the time-saving state. You can play games.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (special discharge channel 650e2 which is the specific area (See FIG. 6). In addition, although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation (V winning expectation) that the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game is configured to differ according to the type of the small winning winning. Then, the number of times the second end condition set for each small hit type is satisfied (the number of small hits) is set so that the small hit type in which the small hit game with a high V winning expectation is executed is smaller. Configure.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to associate the V winning expectation level for winning two types of wins when a small win is won during a time-saving game with the anxiety that the time-saving state may end, The player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first predetermined number of times (100 times) as described above is set as the end condition (first end condition) with respect to the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). However, other end conditions may be set for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, for example, when the number of fluctuations of only the first special symbol reaches the third predetermined number (for example, 50 times) or , When the number of fluctuations of only the second special symbol reaches a fourth predetermined number (for example, 80 times), the conditions for ending the time saving state may be established. Also, only a part of the numerous termination conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, A third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are used as triggers. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying two patterns is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9), for example, left, middle and right three patterns. One symbol row is displayed (see FIG. 10). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37a and 37b is performed.

That is, the third pattern is variably displayed ( The third pattern is displayed as a special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbols.

That is, the determination is performed by the determination means (the lottery for the special symbol is executed) based on the establishment of the determination condition (the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640), and the predetermined After the identification information (third pattern) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until the dynamic display period elapses, in a display mode (combination of patterns) showing the discrimination result (lottery result of special symbols) of the discrimination means , the identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third design displayed on the third design display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. result only), or may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special symbol lottery result (for example, the type of jackpot won). In addition, when there are three types of lottery results (for example, big hit, small hit, and loss) as the lottery result of the special design, the lottery result of the special design is the above-mentioned three types of lottery as the display mode of the third design. It is also possible to use a display mode that indicates one of two specific types of results (for example, a big win or a small win).

Further, instead of the display device used in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. are alternately turned on for a predetermined period of time to perform dynamic display (variable display). In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "x" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the electric role object 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is It is configured to be in an activated state (protrude) for a predetermined period of time. Although the details will be described later, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbols is set to be shorter in the time-saving state than in the normal state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbols is performed in a short time during the time-saving state, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to activate the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, the time-saving state can be made into a state in which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when winning the second pattern (normal pattern) during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is higher than when winning the second pattern (normal pattern) during the normal state. The operation period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is configured to be longer. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state.

In addition, the configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above-described content. A configuration such as increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be used. In addition, when the time saving state is made to be a state where the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is irrespective of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are varied, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time point, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the win is displayed (the timing of the display of the second symbol) It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the winning game, that is, the timing of activating the electric accessory 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the win during the normal state, the corresponding electric accessory 640a during the normal state It can be operated in an actuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

The relationship between the game state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be specified other than the contents described above. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the game state at either timing of the start timing, an operation pattern advantageous to the player as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state operation pattern) may be set.

The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80 as shown in FIG. A portion (most) of the spheres flowing down the right side of the board can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is lost. If there is, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol for variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, although it does not have a function of suspending that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, it is suspended that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. If it has a function to hold, for example, it is held up to four times in total, and a place where the player can visually recognize the second symbol holding display means for showing the number of held balls (for example, the third symbol display device 81 part).

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, when it has a function to suspend the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. number of times (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 . When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A big winning lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the first ball entrance 64 moves down the left side of the variable display unit 80 in a game (so-called left-handed game) in which the ball flows down. A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the game more easily than in a game in which the ball flows down (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to allow the ball to enter the first ball inlet 64. be.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A big win lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, if the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of the first entrance The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball hole 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball hole 640 may be five.

In addition, in this embodiment, a switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a special pattern lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) is provided in the ball entrance. Although it is configured to acquire a special symbol lottery opportunity and win a prize ball, other configurations may be used. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a passing ball detects the passage of the ball, it may be constructed so as to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity. In this case, at least some of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbols can enter, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls will be paid out. It is good to provide an entrance. By configuring in this way, the number of acquisition times of the special symbol lottery opportunity and the number of winning ball acquisition times can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is attached with an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (allowed state) protruding from the game board 13 to the near side (the near side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) and a retracted state (restricted state) to the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a retracted state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, that is, the second symbol When winning the lottery with two symbols, the electric accessary 640a is in a protruding state (allowed state), and the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed area). It is divided into the right side (right hitting area), and by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51, the player can divide the destination of the shot ball into the right hitting area or the left hitting area. It consists of Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and the trigger of the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is arranged in the right hitting area, and when the time saving state is set as the game state, the right hitting game is performed.

A nail is planted under the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball fired by the left-handed game does not enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second ball is entered during the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the mouth 640. - 特許庁By configuring in this way, in the left-handed game, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in order to vary the first special symbol, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is varied. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game characteristics according to the game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the V winning device 650 whose upper surface slopes downward to the left (lower left when viewed from the front in FIG. 2) is provided in the right-handed area. Each mechanism is arranged so that the ball which is arranged and flows down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the projecting state, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (the lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 2). Then, the ball that reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state before reaching the right end of the electric accessory 640a, the electric It is constructed such that the ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing this cover member 655, the inside of the cover member 655 is made visible to the player by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, when a game is not being played (when the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the light incident on the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. In the case where the cover member 655 is used to vary the visibility of the interior in this manner, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means for emitting light for decoration as described above. , and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period including the period during which the electric accessory 640a is operated. For example, when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is operated (that is, controlling the light emitting means so that characters (e.g., "open") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates on the surface of the cover member 655 (when winning a prize by lottery of normal symbols) are displayed; The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.

Now, with reference to FIG. 3, the configuration of the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, among the balls shot in the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-like member on the top surface of which a ball can flow down, and is directed downward (lower right in the front view of FIG. 3). is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward . After passing through the through gate 67, the ball flows down to a region a (see FIG. 3) corresponding to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned at the projecting position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state with the ball reaching the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), it is provided below the electric accessory 640a. It is configured such that the ball flows down toward the general winning hole 63 that is opened. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, in this embodiment, the periods during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates are different in the game state, and the normal state is set as the game state. When the electric accessory 640a operates in the state where the electric accessory 640a is in the protruding state, the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state before the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a positioned in the projecting state reaches the area b (see FIG. 3). , and the time-saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the area c (see FIG. 3) is configured to be located in

Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is designed so that the flowing period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 3 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. (0.8 seconds in this embodiment). By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, winning the normal symbol, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in operation, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. can be prevented.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. , the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and at the timing when it reaches the area b The operation of the accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the electric accessory 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 3, such balls enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed game is played in the time saving state, different ball entrances (second ball entrance 640 Alternatively, by configuring it so that the ball can be guided to the general winning hole 63), the player can be made to continuously play the right-handed game during the time saving state.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn by the entrance of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger. However, since it does not have means for holding and storing the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (means for holding and storing the right to execute the special drawing 2 lottery), the special symbol variation is executed. Even if a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the game is being played, only the privilege of paying out prize balls (five pieces) corresponding to the entered ball is given to the player.

As described above, the configuration is such that the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning hole 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the second ball inlet 640 is 5. Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed, it is better for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than for the ball to enter the general winning opening 63. Advantageous benefits (i.e. special figure 2 lottery and 5 prize balls) can be given, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery cannot be executed (during special symbol fluctuation) If there is, it is configured so that the ball entering the general winning hole 63 rather than the second ball entering hole 640 can give the player a more advantageous privilege (that is, 10 prize balls).

As a result, depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in the special pattern), the ball entrance that the player wants to enter (the ball entrance where many benefits can be obtained) can be changed. The player can enjoy the right-handed game during the state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one motion of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the operation of the game.

In this embodiment, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. A long period of time (2 seconds) is set to ensure that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a operates. The operation period of the electric accessory 640a is a slightly longer period (for example, 0.9 seconds). By configuring in this way, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the act of stopping the ball from being launched and starting to launch the ball again after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated ( Since it is possible to suppress so-called stop hitting), it is possible to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the ball launched by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. The opening/closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state in which a ball can win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, even in some of the "jackpots" of special symbols (jackpots whose jackpot types are jackpots D), the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is operated as described above. It is constructed so as to operate in the same way as when winning a "small win". As a result, when the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big win" or "small win" is won.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 3, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state that closes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state is sphered. can flow down, and the ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down toward the lower left side (lower left side in front view of FIG. 3) above the open/close door 650f1. , to the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is open (that is, during the small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In this embodiment, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds×12 times (see FIG. 25). A ball flowing down on 650f1 wins to the V winning device 650. - 特許庁Balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 650 are arranged to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 6A) while flowing down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. there is With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly released. can flow down.

In this embodiment, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but during the opening period of the opening/closing door 650f1, Any other period may be set as long as the ball can enter the V winning device 650 during the period. Also, in the present embodiment, the number of times the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once in the small winning game and then opened next time (opening interval period). Five seconds are set after the first and tenth opening operations, and 0.5 seconds are set at other timings. This is to make it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the period when the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, during the interval period between opening after the fifth opening operation is completed In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display for emphasizing and prompting the player to play the game to the right.

Then, even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is set so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 is set longer than usual. Also, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball when the tenth opening operation during the small winning game is completed, the same control processing is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which the opening operation is executed a plurality of times, when it is determined that the interval period between opening is set longer than the other, and it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed By making it possible to display a game guide display for prompting proper game contents, a player who is playing a wrong game can be made to play the game without anxiety.

In this embodiment, a longer special opening interval period than others is set after the 5th and 10th opening operations during the small winning game. In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small winning game, it is possible to make the player more likely to play an appropriate game. In addition, in the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, at least the notification timing for the second shift should be set to a timing that the player who is playing the game normally cannot reach. That is, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, by performing a right-handed game continuously during a small winning game, at least one ball enters in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured to be able to hit the ball, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of winning prizes (10), which is a condition for ending the small winning game, will be reached during the tenth opening operation. It reaches and the small winning game is ended.

That is, the inter-opening interval period executed after the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guidance display using this timing, the interval period between special openings that is unnecessarily long for the player who is playing a normal game (continuously playing a right-handed game) It is no longer executed, and the small winning game can be smoothly executed.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, if the first special opening interval period is set to the timing reached even if a normal game (continued right-handed game) is performed (after the fifth opening operation is completed) , the timing at which the first inter-special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first inter-special opening interval period started (fifth opening operation It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 has detected the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entered inside to be discharged from the V winning device 650), and if the V switch 650e3 has detected the ball If it is determined, a notification effect is displayed to notify that during the first special opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball, the game guide is displayed as described above. Configure it to display. As a result, the interval period between special openings set during the small winning game can be effectively used according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without causing the predetermined number (10) of balls to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. The V winning device 650 is, as shown in FIG. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. The arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e sandwiching the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear surface cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, and its rear surface. A channel solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the channel solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 650j with screws. It consists of

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 5(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 5(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 5(b). A bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left is formed. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 5(a).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that game balls can be entered by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, thereby reducing the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can efficiently enter the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. can be made Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 650e to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the projection of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during a small winning game, so that a big winning game is set after the small winning game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path that cannot (difficultly) pass through the V switch 650e3. By turning on the flow path solenoid 650k, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. (see FIG. 6(b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to be OFF while the game is played normally, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. It consists of Then, when a small win is won, the passage solenoid 650k is turned on according to the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g described later with reference to FIG. The flow path 650e2 is configured to be able to flow down. In this way, when the channel solenoid 650k is set to be off, the state is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. The power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 6(a)).

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. consists of By configuring in this way, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow-down route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened in spite of not winning a small prize, the ball will surely flow. It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2.

In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge passage 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the output of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (condition for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number (10 pieces), or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established When all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing after the small winning ending period has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and it is sent to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. can be done. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, according to the small hit type (small hit A to small hit C) set when winning a small hit, the period and timing for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON are different. is configured to run. By constructing in this way, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game is made different depending on the content of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. be able to. Therefore, the player can not only win a small prize, but also play a game while expecting that a small prize game with a high V winning expectation will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of the spherical lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 7(a), the opening/closing door 650f1 of the present embodiment allows the ball reaching the upper surface of the V winning device 650 to move along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2). It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650 y 1 of the 650 to the left upper surface 650 y 2 through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650 f 1 and flow toward the variable winning device 65 .

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of the ball. is configured to be 0.6 seconds. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. configured to be long. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game.

When the small winning game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 7(a) and the opening/closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 7(b) is entered. FIG. 7(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 7(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retreat inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that winning is possible. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is equipped with a third mechanism for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. 1 regulating member 651 and 2nd regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 2). After being aligned in a line via the 2 regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulating member, the ball that has won with great force from the opening/closing door 650f1 is directly detected through the detection opening 650a1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width corresponding to one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are clogged in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination result of the determination means (the result of the lottery of the special symbols) is a predetermined determination result (small hit). The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval period (0.5 seconds) between opening of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1). Therefore, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (the timing when the open/close door 650f1 is closed) during the small winning game is surely won in the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. be able to.

In addition, only the balls flowing down on the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game so that a predetermined number (10) can be won during the small winning game. Since the number of times of opening operation in the winning game (12 times) is set more than the number of winning prizes (10 pieces) for the end condition of the small winning game, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short , a sufficient number of prizes can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 8, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 9). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the first frame button 22, the second frame button 23, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The audio lamp control device 113 also receives input from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are indicated, they are referred to as the frame button 22). is monitored, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display control device changes the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or changes the effect contents at the time of super reach. 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character object drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a character object for performance (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. can be configured to

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. It should be noted that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 49).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. FIG. FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the third design (special design 1 or special design 2) displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 is 10 imitating numbers from "0" to "9". Each is composed of a main pattern of the type. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in the first embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 10(b). As shown in FIG. 10(b), a small display area Dm2 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. In this small display area Dm2, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 11(a)). That is, in this embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as the guidance display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board 13 the ball should be shot toward, just by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10, when the guidance display mode displayed in the small display area Dm2 is variable, the voice guidance using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are used. It is configured such that the light emission guidance described above is executed. Here, as the voice guidance using the voice output device 226, a voice indicating the display content displayed in the small display area Dm2, such as a voice indicating "Right shot", is output.

In addition, as light emission guidance using the lamp display device 227, for example, when guiding "right-handed", a plurality of LEDs (not shown) used as light emitting means are sequentially lit from left to right. light emission control. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp which area of the game board 13 the ball should be shot by visually recognizing the lighting pattern of the light emitting means provided on the game board 13 . In addition, it is possible to inform the player that the direction in which the ball is shot (game direction) to the player has been switched, not only by the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 but also by voice guidance and light emission guidance. Therefore, the player can immediately notice that the game direction has been switched.

A small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is configured to allow the variable display of the third pattern to be displayed in a simple manner. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1, for example, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect to prompt the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display region Dm. is the case. During execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more comprehensible effect. Further, by simply displaying the variable display of the third pattern in the small display area Dm1 during execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third pattern is continuing. can be understood.

Although details will be described later, the small display area Dm1 includes a special figure 1 variation display area Dm1a in which a third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed, and a second special symbol variation display corresponding to the second special symbol. It is formed from a special figure 2 variation display area Dm1b in which 3 symbols are displayed (see FIG. 11(a)). As a result, even when the display performance is executed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily grasp which special symbol the third symbol corresponding to is changing. . In the pachinko machine 10, the special figure 1 variation display area Dm1a and the special figure 2 variation display area Dm1b are respectively formed. A display area may be provided to display only the special symbols that are displayed in a variable manner, out of the first special symbols and the second special symbols.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. Although details will be described later, this small display area Dm3 is a state (state ) This is an area where the display mode Dm3a (see FIG. 11(a)) is displayed. As a result, the player can play the game while predicting the timing at which the time saving state will end by the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3.

Furthermore, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this secondary display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 10(b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured. , a maximum of four reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbols is varied according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of held balls may be displayed numerically. In addition, it is also possible to visually inform the player of the number of held balls by changing the mode of the character according to the increase or decrease of the number of held balls.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, the game result suggesting mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and the winning related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss and there is a held ball, a lottery based on the held ball will be performed after the stop display for 1 second (after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed). A corresponding floating display is initiated. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time. In this way, after the lottery result corresponding to one special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stopped display state is continued for a predetermined period, and then the next special symbol variation is started. , it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that a new variation of special symbols has started. In addition, in this embodiment, the above-described design determination period is always provided after the lapse of the design fluctuation time, but a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that no ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game is not played at all by the pachinko machine 10 because the player quits the game. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters A variable display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display areas Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and the ball entered into the first ball opening 64 It is formed as a reserved display area for displaying reserved symbols, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which variation has not been executed. In this first display area Ds1, the first reserved symbol Dsb, the second A reserved design Dsc, a third reserved design Dsd, and a fourth reserved design Dse are displayed. Then, the suspended symbol corresponding to the currently executed variation is displayed at the center position of the sub-display area Ds as the active symbol Dsa.

The pending symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 is the pending symbol corresponding to the next variation (the front view of FIG. 10(b) The first reserved pattern (Dsb) displayed on the far right is erased, and the remaining reserved patterns (Dsc to Dse) are shifted to the right and displayed. Then, the erased first reserved pattern Dsb is displayed as the running pattern Dsa. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which reserved symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed to display the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol. To enable a player to easily know that variable display corresponding to reserved symbols whose display mode is changed by the look-ahead performance is executed when a performance (so-called look-ahead performance) for increasing expectations that a lottery is a big win is executed. can recognize.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, each reserved design (first reserved design Dsb to second reserved design Dse) displayed in the first display area Ds1 moves (shifts) direction when a new special design variation is started. (Right direction in FIG. 10(b) viewpoint), so that the reserved patterns (first reserved pattern Dsb to second reserved pattern Dse) and the currently executed pattern Dsa are displayed. Since the player can comprehend the series of arrangement, it is possible for the player to easily comprehend which reserved symbol the variable display in execution corresponds to.

In the present embodiment, only the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 can be held up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 640 may be configured to be able to be reserved up to a predetermined number, and the upper limit of the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second The upper limit of the number of held balls for entering the ball opening 640 may be different from the upper limit of the number of held balls for entering the first ball opening 64. It may be more than the upper limit of the number of retained balls for, or conversely it may be less. Also, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

A second display area Ds2 is formed on the right side of the sub display area Ds, and an explanation of the effect is displayed to supplement the content of the effect (display effect) executed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 11 ( b) see). In this way, a plurality of information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, that is, the variable display information of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the currently executed special symbol Display performance information for indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result corresponding to is a specific lottery result (jackpot winning), performance explanation information to supplement the content of the display performance information, reserved pattern information indicating the reserved memory number of special patterns By displaying the running pattern information indicating the running symbols in a predetermined section (region), the player can be notified of various information displayed at the same time in an easy-to-understand manner.

11 to 17, description will be given of the effects displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In addition, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in common with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol, is configured to be variably displayed with priority over the first special symbol. It is configured so that the two special symbols are not variably displayed at the same time.

However, in the present first embodiment, the second special symbol is set so as not to be able to secure the reserved balls, so in practice, the special symbols are arranged such that the reserved balls of the first special symbol are digested in order. Variation of the symbol is executed, for example, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both variable at the timing of starting the variation of the new special symbol, that is, the first When the timing of starting a new variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the special symbol and the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) match, the variation of the second special symbol is performed. It is configured to be executed with priority.

As a result, the player loses the opportunity to receive the lottery advantageous to the player (the opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol) due to the execution of the more disadvantageous lottery (lottery of the first special symbol). can be reliably prevented.

As the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, an effect suggesting whether or not various contents that can be established based on the special symbol lottery are established is executed. Specifically, it is a part of the jackpot winning suggestion performance that suggests whether or not you have won the jackpot by lottery of special symbols, and the case where you did not win the jackpot by lottery of special symbols (you won out). The game state is advantageous to the player due to the small win suggestion performance that suggests whether or not the player has won the small win, which gives the player a benefit that is less than the big win (for example, the payout of prize balls), and the lottery result of special symbols. When the game state transition suggestion effect to suggest moving to the time saving state or the time saving state is set as the game state, the time saving state ends according to the special symbol lottery result or the special symbol fluctuation display. A time-saving state ending suggestion effect or the like is executed for suggesting to do.

In addition, the performance suggesting the lottery result of the special symbols (such as a jackpot winning suggestion performance, a small win winning suggestion performance, etc.) is the third symbol that is stopped and displayed after the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An effect is executed using a period (dynamic display period) until the result of the lottery is notified by the combination. For example, a stop display indicating that the third symbol has won a jackpot during the dynamic display period. A reach display mode in which only some of the combinations of the mode (for example, the combination of "777") are stopped and displayed (for example, only two of the three third patterns are stopped and displayed at "77", display mode with the remaining third symbols varied), and then, in a state where the third symbol showing the ready-to-win display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm1, the story is displayed in the main display area Dm. The given performance is executed, and the performance of stopping and displaying the third pattern at '777' is executed when the story is correctly completed.

In the above-described example, the ready-to-win display mode is a state in which a part of the combination of the third symbols is stopped and displayed in a mode that matches the combination indicating that the lottery result is a win (jackpot). The display mode may be a ready-to-win display mode, for example, some of the third patterns may be displayed in a dedicated display mode for indicating the ready-to-win state, or a combination of some of the third patterns may be displayed in a dedicated display mode for indicating the ready-to-win state, instead of the combination indicating that the jackpot has been won. By structuring such that the player can grasp that the ready-to-win state is established by confirming the stop display mode of a part of the third symbols, the player wins a big win. It is possible to gradually increase the expectation for what has been done, and to enhance the performance effect.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a continuous performance executed across a plurality of special symbol variations as a performance suggesting the lottery result of the special symbols. This continuous effect is executed when a winning information command for indicating various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The lottery result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the command is displayed during the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the target special symbol variation is executed) is used to suggest to the player.

In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol by using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, a longer-term effect is provided to the player. can be provided and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, the result of the lottery of the special symbols (for example, loss) can be executed continuously without being highlighted every time, so that the player's desire to play can be prevented from occurring. can.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in addition to the effect for suggesting whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the game state is shifted according to the number of times of lottery of special symbols (number of fluctuations). It is configured to also execute a suggesting production (time saving state end suggesting production). This time-saving state end suggesting performance is a performance that is continuously executed when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time-saving state, and includes the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of times special symbol fluctuations are performed) and special symbols. It is an effect for suggesting the possibility that the time saving state will end according to the number of times that the lottery result of the lottery results in a specific lottery result (for example, a small winning).

Here, the production contents of the time saving state end suggestion production described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A state (first state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball opening 640 and a state (second state) in which it is easy for a ball to enter are configured to be set. Further, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, and when a small prize is won, a small prize game for opening the V winning device 650 is executed. be. The V winning device 650 has a special discharge channel 650e2 as a specific area through which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 can pass. When 650e3 detects, it is configured to set a jackpot (per two types). The time-saving state set as the game state is advantageous for the player, as the electric accessory 640a can easily operate (change) to the second state (the state where the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640). Since the game state is entered, a right-handed game is performed in which a ball is entered into the second ball inlet 640 during the time saving state.

As described above, the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is configured to end when the end condition (time-saving end condition) is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, when the special symbol variation based on the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the special symbol lottery The time saving state is terminated (the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state) when any condition is established when a small win is won for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times).

Thus, by enabling a plurality of time saving end conditions to be set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state advantageous to the player continues. On the other hand, the presence or absence of the time-saving end condition, and the time-saving information updated toward the establishment of the time-saving end condition (for example, information indicating the number of small wins won during the time-saving state) ), the time-saving state advantageous to the player ends abruptly, causing the player to feel dissatisfied.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in the time saving state, whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving information updated toward the establishment of the time saving end condition (for example, information indicating the number of small hits won during the time saving state ) to the player as a performance suggesting the end of the time saving state, so that the player can play the game while predicting the period in which the time saving state will continue to be set. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the sudden termination of the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving end conditions, advantageous time-saving end conditions for the player (time-saving end conditions established by winning the jackpot) and other unfavorable time-saving end conditions are set. In the time-saving state end suggestion effect that is executed during the time-saving state, simply whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and the time-saving information that is updated for the establishment of the time-saving end condition (for example, the number of small hits won during the time-saving state Instead of executing the production based on the information indicating), it is determined whether the time-saving end condition that is satisfied or the time-saving end condition that is easy to be satisfied is advantageous to the player, and the effect is also based on the determination result. configured to run.

By constructing in this way, the player is made to not only predict whether or not the timing of ending the time saving state is approaching, but also to predict whether or not the time saving end condition advantageous to the player is established. Therefore, it is possible to make the user interested in the effect to be executed (performance suggesting the end of the time saving state), and to enhance the effect of the effect.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute a plurality of types of small winning games when a small winning is won in a special symbol lottery, and depending on the small winning game to be executed ( Depending on the set small hit type), the degree of expectation that two types of hits are set during the small hit game is made different. Then, among the time-saving end conditions described above, as a time-saving end condition that is established based on the fact that a small hit is won a predetermined number of times in a special symbol lottery, each number of times (time-saving end condition It is configured to set the winning number of times that is established.

By configuring in this way, when the time-saving end condition is established by winning a special symbol, the time-saving end condition that is established this time is an advantageous time-saving end condition for the player (2 types of easy-to-win small win types are set. Whether it is a time-saving end condition established by being hit) or a time-saving end condition that is disadvantageous to the player (time-saving end condition established by setting a small hit type that is difficult to hit two types) is a presentation suggesting the end of the time-saving state. can be suggested (notified) to the player. Therefore, even when the time-saving end condition is established by winning a small prize, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance executed in the time-saving state end-suggesting performance.

In addition, the number of times set for each small hit type described above (the number of times the short-time end condition established for each small hit type) is set to a different number of times depending on the degree of expectation per two types of each small hit type. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the small winning type with high expectations per 2 types (eg, small winning A) is less than the small winning type with low expectations per 2 types (eg, small winning C). It is configured so that the conditions are met.

By configuring in this way, for example, immediately after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state ends based on the small winning of the special symbol in the time-saving state end suggestion production, or until just before the time-saving state ends. When a performance indicating that the time saving information is updated is executed, it is possible for the player to predict that the small prize won this time is a small prize with a high degree of expectation for winning two types. In other words, it is possible to make the player predict various game results based on the performance content of the time-reduction state end suggesting performance and the period during which the time-reduction state continues, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a time-saving end condition advantageous to the player, a time-saving end condition that is established when the jackpot is won as described above, and a small win type that is easy to hit two types out of the small winning games are set. Although there is a time-saving end condition that is satisfied in the case, it is not limited to this, and if one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the other time-saving end condition is satisfied. It is good if there is something that is advantageous to For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) and the time-saving end condition is met, a special state is set in which the special symbol lottery executed thereafter is advantageous to the player. In the gaming machine having the function, the time-saving end condition that is advantageous to the player may be the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

Specifically, for example, either a special symbol high probability state in which it is easy to win a special symbol jackpot or a special symbol low probability state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot is set, and a normal symbol win is won. By setting either a normal symbol high probability state that is easy to win, or a normal symbol low probability state that is more difficult to win than that, as a plurality of game states to be set, the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal Design low probability state), definite variable state (special design high probability state, normal design high probability state), time saving state (special design low probability state, normal design high probability state), latent state (special design high probability state) , normal symbol low probability state), and the like, and as the degree of advantage for the player in each game state, at least the latent definite state is more advantageous to the player than the definite variable state.

Then, in the state in which the probability variation state is set, the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), and only when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol high probability state to the normal symbol low probability state By shifting to , the latent state is configured to be set. By constructing in this way, the big win is won in the state where the variable probability state is set, rather than the game state other than the latent probability state is set after the big win is completed. To provide a game state advantageous to a player when a time-saving end condition is established by the fact that the number of times of variation of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) without winning a prize, and a latent certainty state is set. can be done.

In the above-described example, the conditions for setting the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player as the gaming state are established when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number while the probability variable state is set. Only when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times is set as the time-saving end condition that is advantageous to the player. In addition to the configuration of the example described above, a configuration may be added in which the probability state is set in a small portion (for example, 1%) when the special symbol jackpot is won in the state where the probability change state is set.

As a result, in the state where the variable probability state is set, the probability state that is advantageous to the player can be set even when the special symbol wins a jackpot or when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number. However, in this case, the time-saving end condition in which the latent state is likely to be set becomes the time-saving end condition that is more advantageous to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 11 to 15, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the time-saving state termination suggesting effect in this embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents in a case where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and a time saving state is set after the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 11( a ), when the time saving state is set, the characters “Pounding rush rush” indicating that the time saving state has been set are displayed in the main display area Dm. This "pounding rush" is an effect executed corresponding to the period in which the time saving state is set, and serves as a notification mode for indicating to the player that the current game state is the time saving state.

Then, in the small display area (guidance display area) Dm2, characters "Right-handed" are displayed to guide the game to be executed during the time-saving state, and it is notified that the right-handed game is performed during the time-saving state. . During the heart-pounding rush, a third pattern is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and a character 801 imitating a boy (see FIG. 12(a)) is displayed in a treasure chest 802 (see FIG. 12(a)) in the center of the main display area Dm. See) is executed. Returning to FIG. 11, the description is continued. In the small display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a situation (state) display mode Dm3a for suggesting whether or not the time saving state will end is displayed. This situation (state) display mode Dm3a is whether or not the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed has won a jackpot, and whether the time saving state is based on the special symbol variation currently being performed. Variable to various display modes (see FIG. 15) according to the determination result of whether or not to end or whether or not the information on the conditions for ending the time saving state based on the currently executed special symbol variation is updated. It is configured so that

In FIG. 11(a), a display mode "display mode 1" (see FIG. 15) indicating that the currently executed special symbol variation has not won the big win or the small win is displayed. In addition, the display screen shown in FIG. 11(a) is a case where the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, and the variation of the first special symbol, which has already been reserved and stored at the time of winning the jackpot, is being executed. Therefore, the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 variable display area Dm1a of the small display area Dm2, and the reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as the running symbol Dsa. The display mode "circle mark" is displayed.

Here, the display screen when there is a reserved design that wins the jackpot among the first special patterns (reserved patterns) already reserved and stored at the time of winning the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 11(b). . FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents when there is a reserved symbol that has won a jackpot when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot. In FIG. 11(b), the winning information corresponding to the first reserved symbol Dsb includes the winning information for winning the jackpot, and the small display area Dm3 shows the special symbol winning (symbol winning). Display Mode 3" (see FIG. 15) is displayed as the status display mode Dm3b.

Then, in the second display area Ds2, the characters "Look forward to it" indicating the content of the situation display mode Dm3b are displayed. Furthermore, the state shown in FIG. 11 (b) is to win the jackpot immediately after the time saving state is set (after the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed three times after the time saving state is set), so the time saving state described above It is set so that the big win is won while maintaining the display screen shown in FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the pounding rush from being executed for only a short period of time.

In this case, in the main display area Dm, a display screen (production start screen during the time saving state) of a mode different from the normal (see FIG. 11(a)) of "Pounding Rush?" is displayed. It should be noted that the display screen shown in FIG. 11(b) may be configured to be displayed even when, for example, the normal state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, when the display mode of "Pounding rush rush!!" shown in FIG. 11A is displayed after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to reliably inform the player that the time saving state has been set. , the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, when the display mode of "Pounding rush rush?" shown in FIG. 11B is displayed after the jackpot game is over, the normal state is set after the jackpot game is over, or the jackpot is won while the jackpot game is on hold. It is possible to notify the player of any of the above, and to make the player feel a sense of expectation.

In addition to the configuration described above, there is provided a determination means for determining whether or not there is prize winning information for winning a big win in the reserved symbols existing after the end of the big win game, and there is winning information for winning a big win by the determining means. When it is determined, the same display mode (for example, characters of "big chance") may be displayed regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game. . Furthermore, the jackpot information determined by the determination means described above is analyzed, the game state set after the jackpot game corresponding to the analyzed jackpot information (forecast jackpot information) is determined, and the jackpot is determined based on the determination result. It may be configured so as to set the display mode after the end of the game.

In this case, for example, if it is determined that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the look-ahead jackpot information, the display mode after the jackpot game ends "Pounding rush rush!" Characters (that is, the time saving state ) is displayed, and when it is determined that the normal state is set after the end of the big win game corresponding to the prefetched big win information, the display mode after the end of the big win game is "Pounding rush? " (that is, a display mode that does not notify that the time saving state has been entered) is preferably configured to be displayed.

By configuring in this way, when the winning prize information for winning the jackpot is included in the reserved symbols that exist after the end of the current big win game, the reserved symbols are not in the gaming state set after the end of the current big win game. It is possible to set the display mode to be displayed after the end of the current big win game based on the game state set after the end of the big win game corresponding to the big win (next big win) included in . Therefore, for example, a time saving state advantageous to the player is set after the end of this big win game, the jackpot included in the reserved pattern is won during the time saving state, and after the big win game is over, the player is more interested than the time saving state. When the disadvantageous normal state is set, a display mode is displayed that does not inform the player that the time saving state has been set, so the time saving state advantageous to the player ends in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.

Here, the display mode of the status display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining types of situation (state) display modes Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, it is configured so that nine types of status display modes can be displayed in the small display area Dm3. ), and the status display mode is set according to the contents (small hit number of times, number of special design fluctuations) that are updated by changing the special pattern to the time saving end condition that the time saving state ends by being established. It is displayed in the display area Dm3.

Thus, by grasping the situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3, the player can predict how the time saving state will progress due to the special symbol variation being executed, so that it is easy to understand. Games can be provided.

Specifically, the status display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 will be described. "Display mode 1 (first display mode)" is displayed as a "white circle" (see FIG. 11A). ) is a display mode. This "display mode 1" does not win the jackpot, and the conditions for ending the time saving state and the conditions for ending the time saving state (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations and the number of small winnings) are up to a predetermined stage. This is the display mode set when it is not updated. When this "display mode 1" is displayed, it can be confirmed that the time-saving game (time-saving state) will not end due to this special symbol variation, and the player can expect the next and subsequent special symbol variations with confidence. .

Next, "display mode 2 (second display mode)" is a display mode displayed with a "black circle". This "display mode 2" is a display mode which is set when the conditions for ending the time saving state and the conditions for ending the time saving state have not been updated up to a predetermined stage, indicating that a small prize has been won. . Here, as described above, the present embodiment is configured to set a jackpot (per two types) triggered by a small winning game, and the contents of the small winning game to be executed (the small winning of the winning small winning type), the degree of expectation (probability that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball during a small winning game) for setting two types of winnings is configured to be different.

This "display mode 2" informs the player that he or she has won a small win, but does not inform the type of the small win that has been won. The game is played while expecting that the small winning type is a small winning type (for example, a small winning A) that is easy to set two types of winnings. In addition, since the game is played while feeling the possibility that the end condition of the time saving state will be updated (updated within the range of the stage before reaching the predetermined stage) due to winning a small hit, give a sense of tension You can play games.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of small hit types are set, a small hit type (small hit A) that is easy to set for two types, and a small hit type that is less likely to be set for two types than the small hit A. Set as (small hit B, small win C), and as the end condition of the time-saving state that can be established based on the small win winning (time-saving end condition), the smaller the number of winnings, the smaller the number of times the small win type is set, which is easier to set for two types. It is configured so that In other words, for each of a plurality of small hit types, it is configured to set different time-saving end conditions according to the degree of advantage to the player, and the more advantageous the player's lottery result is, the more time-saving end conditions are set. It is designed to be easy to establish.

Therefore, for example, when "display mode 2" is displayed immediately after the time saving state is set, it is predicted that one of all the small hit types has been won, and a predetermined period has elapsed since the time saving state was set If "display mode 2" is displayed later (after winning multiple times in the time saving state), a small win with a large number of winnings set as a time saving end condition, that is, two types It can be predicted that a small win in which a small win type that is difficult to set is set is won. In this way, the lottery result of the current special symbol can be predicted in detail based on the type of display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the elapsed time period of the time-saving state. can be provided.

"Display mode 3 (third display mode)" is a display mode in which "the sun symbol using a white circle" is displayed (see FIG. 11(b)). This "display mode 3" is a display mode indicating that a special symbol jackpot (symbol win) has been won. As a result, when the big win (jackpot game) is set at a plurality of occasions as in the present embodiment, the player can be notified of the moment when the big win (jackpot game) is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

"Display mode 4 (fourth display mode)" is a display mode in which "characters of chance are displayed in white circles" (see FIG. 14A). This "display mode 4" is elected as a small per type B or a small per C (that is, a small per with a low expectation of 2 types), and the conditions for ending the time saving state, and the time saving state This display mode is set when the termination condition is updated up to a predetermined stage.

"Display mode 5 (fifth display mode)" is a display mode in which "characters of last chance are displayed in a white circle" (see FIG. 13(a)). This "display mode 5" is a display mode that is set when a small win is won and the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. By displaying this "display mode 5", the player is notified that the time saving condition has ended.

By constructing in this way, the fact that the time-saving state is terminated unless two types of wins are won in the small win game corresponding to the small win won this time is set before the execution of the small win game. Since it is possible to notify the player at (the stage before the special symbol indicating that the small winning is won is stopped and displayed), the player can make the small winning game more motivated than usual. can let

"Display mode 6 (sixth display mode)" is a display mode in which "characters in a large pinch in a white circle" are displayed (see FIG. 14(b)). This "display mode 6" is a display mode that is set when the conditions for winning the small win C with the lowest expectation for two types of small win types and ending the time saving state are satisfied. The “display mode 6” is for suggesting to the player that the time saving state will end by winning the small win (small win C). In this way, by suggesting to the player that this special symbol variation is the second time-saving variation during the time-saving state, the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, suddenly ends, and the player is killed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an embarrassing situation.

“Display mode 7 (seventh display mode)” is a display mode in which “characters of super hotness in a white circle” are displayed. This "display mode 7" is a display mode that is set when the conditions for winning the small win A with the highest expectation for two types of the small win types and ending the time saving state are satisfied.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as a time-saving end condition (end condition for the number of winnings) that can be established when winning a small win, “1 time” is set for the small win A, which has the highest expectation for two types. Therefore, as an explanation of “display mode 7”, it is explained that it is set when the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, but not limited to this, multiple small hit types Among them, it may be used as a display mode for showing only that the small win A, which has the highest expectation for winning two kinds of prizes, has been won.

"Display mode 8 (eighth display mode)" is a display mode in which "the end character is displayed in a white circle". This "display mode 8" is set when the time reduction end condition (change number end condition) that is established when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols reaches a predetermined number without winning a big win or a small win. It is a display mode. By displaying this "display mode 8", it is possible to reliably inform the player of the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the winning number of times end condition and the variation number of times end condition are satisfied with the same special symbol variation (lottery) as the condition for ending the time saving state, it is said that the variation number of times end condition is satisfied. configured to discriminate. That is, in the special symbol variation in which the condition for ending the number of variations is established, when the small win A is won, the "display mode 8" is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that he or she has won a small prize after making the player think that the time saving state has ended, so that the player can enjoy a game with unexpectedness. can provide.

"Display mode 9 (ninth display mode)" is a display mode in which "characters of question mark in a white circle" are displayed. This "display mode 9" is a display mode that is set regardless of the lottery result of the special symbols and the update information of the time saving state. This "display mode 9" is a display mode set by a predetermined lottery regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery or the progress of the time saving state. In this way, by making it possible to set a display mode in which the game state and the game situation cannot be notified to the player at all, every time a special symbol variation is executed, the player is informed about the current special symbol variation. There is no need to provide information (update information).

In addition, in the first embodiment, by displaying the "display mode 9", it is configured to make it difficult for the player to understand (difficult to grasp) the content of the game during the time saving state. Besides, it is also possible to provide determination means for determining whether or not display modes 1 to 9 are to be displayed in the small display area Dm3, and to determine the display content based on the determination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the contents of the heart-pounding rush executed by the third symbol display device during the time-saving state will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the production content of a heart-pounding rush executed during a period in which the time-saving state is set as the gaming state, and a small hit A is set as the small hit type. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the content of the production|presentation displayed while the 2nd special design which has won the small hit is fluctuating.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the small display area Dm1, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variation display area Dm1b, and the second special symbol ( A "triangle mark" indicating special figure 2) is displayed. This state is after all the first special symbols (special symbols 1) reserved and stored in the time-saving state shown in FIG. , It is a state showing the case where the variation of the second special symbol is started due to the fact that the ball fired by the right-handed game entered the second ball entrance 640 (trigger).

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the small win A is set once, the time saving end condition (winning number end condition) is established. , "display mode 5" is displayed as a situation (state) display mode Dm3a indicating that the small win is won and the time saving end condition is established, and that the small win is won in the second display area Ds2. The text "Treasure chest found" is displayed.

Then, when the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a small hit, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is shown in FIG. 12(b). The display contents shown in are displayed. FIG. 12(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents when the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner in FIG. 12(a) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 12(b), in the special figure 2 fluctuation display area Dm1b of the small display area Dm1, the combination "341" for indicating the lottery result (small hit) of the second special symbol is stopped and the third symbol is displayed. A treasure box 802 is displayed in an enlarged manner in the main display area Dm, and characters "(the contents of the treasure box) are..." are displayed in the second display area Ds2 to guide the development of future effects.

This treasure box 802 is used to indicate the game result of the small winning game to be executed immediately after, and the effect of opening the treasure box 802 succeeding or failing according to the result of the small winning game is executed. be. The contents of the effect executed according to the result of the small winning game will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b).

Here, with reference to FIG. 13(a), description will be given of the contents of the effect when winning two kinds of wins during the small win game in which the small win A is set. FIG. 13(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when two types of hits are won (V winning) in a small hit game in which a small hit A is set executed during the time saving state. . As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the V prize is won during the small winning game (when the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball), , the effect that the treasure box 802 has been successfully opened is executed, and a V display 803 is displayed to indicate that a jackpot game is set. Then, characters of "jackpot" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 to indicate that a jackpot (two types of wins) has been won.

On the other hand, when the second prize is not obtained during the small prize game in which the prize A is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. FIG. 13(b) schematically shows the display contents when two kinds of hits are not won (V prize is not won) in the small win game in which the small win A is set executed during the time saving state. It is a schematic diagram. As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state is established by winning once in the small hit set with the small hit A, in the small hit game of the small hit A When the V prize cannot be won, the time saving state is terminated and the normal state is set.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13(b), when V cannot be won in the small winning game of the small winning A, the failure display mode 803 in which the treasure box 802 explodes is displayed, and the time saving state is displayed in the second display area Ds2. The text "Sorry, rush is over" is displayed to indicate that the is ending. After this screen is displayed, the characters "left-handed" are displayed as game guidance corresponding to the normal state in the small display area Dm2, and a screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed.

Next, an effect in the case where a small win B is set during the time saving state is won will be described with reference to FIG. 14(a). FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when winning for the first time a small win in which a small win B is set in the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 (d), but in this embodiment, as one of the time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, "3 times winning for small win B is set" can be set It consists of Here, when the small win B is set in the time saving state is won for the first time, as shown in FIG. 14A, the display mode 4 is displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the main display area. A treasure chest 804 is displayed in Dm.

The display mode of this treasure box 804 is different from that of the treasure box 802 shown in FIG. 12(b), and it is constructed so as to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for winning two types of small wins won this time. Concretely, it is configured so that the treasure box (treasure box 802) with a gorgeous display mode is more likely to be displayed when winning a small win (small win A) with a high expectation of winning two types. As a result, the player can predict the degree of expectation for winning 2 types based on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure box displayed in the main display area Dm. can.

In the small winning game (small winning game corresponding to the small winning B) executed after the display screen of FIG. (The only difference is that the display mode of the treasure box to be opened is changed to treasure box 804.) On the other hand, if the V prize is not won, an effect display screen is displayed indicating that the contents of the opened treasure box 804 are empty. After that, the display screen shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the boy 801 searches for the treasure box again.

Next, an effect in the case of winning a small win C set during the time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the small win C is set is won five times during the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 (d), but in this embodiment, as one of the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, it is possible to set "5 wins for small wins with small win C set" It consists of Here, when the small win C set in the time saving state is won five times, the display mode 6 is displayed in the small display area Dm3 as shown in FIG. A treasure box 805 is displayed in the area Dm.

This treasure box 805 has a display mode different from that of the treasure boxes 802 and 804b described above, and is constructed so as to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for winning two kinds of small wins this time. Specifically, it is configured such that a poorly displayed treasure box (treasure box 805) is more likely to be displayed when winning a small win (small win C) with the lowest degree of expectation for winning two kinds of prizes. As a result, the player can predict the degree of expectation for winning 2 types based on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure box displayed in the main display area Dm. can.

That is, when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(b) is displayed, the probability that the time-saving end condition is met by winning the small hit (small hit C) with the lowest expectation per two types is increased. Therefore, the player plays the game while praying for the V prize in the small winning game to be executed after this.

As described above, this embodiment is configured to be able to set a plurality of time saving end conditions that can be established based on the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the time saving state, and the set multiple It is possible to execute an effect (display of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a) that allows the player to grasp the situation of the time saving state based on whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied and the update situation until the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the sudden end of the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during a small winning game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a display screen displayed when the right for two types is not acquired at the time when a predetermined period of time has passed since the small winning game in which the small winning A is set as the small winning type is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing an example, FIG. 16 (b) is a case where the right per two types is acquired after a predetermined period of time has passed since the small winning game in which the small winning A is set as the small winning type is executed. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on . In addition, FIG. 17(a) is displayed when the right for two types is not acquired at the time when a predetermined period has passed since the small winning game in which the small winning B or C is set as the small winning type is executed. FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen to be displayed, and FIG. 17B shows two types of hits after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after a small hit game in which a small hit B or C is set as a small hit type is executed. is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right of is acquired.

In the first embodiment, a small winning game is executed by opening the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small winning game, and at the fifth or tenth opening timing, It is configured to output an instruction command when the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays an emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) for emphasizing that the V winning device 650 will win the ball. Set the display instruction command for

When the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3 in the state in which the highlight guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. Set command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small winning game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is surely won by the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. In addition, the ball that wins the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. Despite this configuration, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the fifth opening timing of the open/close door 650f1, when the small winning game is started, the third symbol The player is playing a left-handed game without noticing the guidance display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10(b)) of the display device 81 for guiding the right-handed player. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the game has been stopped.

In such a case, it is possible to make the player more likely to play the right-handed game by changing the display that guides the right-handed hit displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Furthermore, as the timing of displaying the emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)), when the right-handed game is performed after the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the right-handed game The timing is such that the shot ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player who has executed a right-handed game according to the display of the emphasized guide display mode Dy1 cannot cause the ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 during the small winning game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, depending on the type of small win won, it is configured so that the degree of expectation for winning two types is different, and a small prize game (small prize A) with a high degree of expectation for two types is executed. The content of the effect display executed at the 5th or 10th opening timing in the case where the second type of small winning game (small winning B, C) with low expectation per type is executed. making it different.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. A first hit type counter C2 used for , a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and a small hit type counter C5 used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. , a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the first winning random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 51). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). , according to the timing of entering the first ball entrance 64, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, A special symbol variation is started based on various stored values. Note that this embodiment does not have a configuration for suspending and storing the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 and a configuration for suspending and storing that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, but these configurations are provided. Also, as a predetermined number (for example, four) of reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas), a special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area or a normal symbol reservation ball storage area may be provided.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take values between 0 and 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 51).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 and the special symbol reserved ball execution area. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

In addition, the first random number table 202a is provided with two types of a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of different random numbers is the same, the number of small win random numbers is set differently (see FIG. 20). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that become small wins, the degree of expectation for giving benefits (big wins or small wins) to players can be increased between the lottery for the first special symbols and the lottery for the second special symbols. can be different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202 a 1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202 a 2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a, and FIG. 20(b) shows the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. FIG. 20(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. In this first winning random number table 202a, a random number value (determination value) determined as a big win and a random value (determination value) determined as a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. is a table.

Specifically, when executing the lottery for the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values are other than jackpots (that is, outside) is defined as a judgment value. Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win.

When executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20(c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as big hit determination values, and "5 to 989" are small hit determination values. , and "990 to 999" is defined as a judgment value other than that (that is, out of range). Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win, and any of "5 to 989". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is displayed. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, in a state in which the lottery (fluctuation) of special symbols can be executed (that is, in a state other than during fluctuation of special symbols and during a big win game or a small win game), the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of hitting the ball.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is not a random number determined to be a special symbol jackpot or small hit, That is, if it is a random number that is determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. FIG. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that will be the big hits in the special symbols when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn. are stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first per random number table 202a. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of random numbers for a big hit is 5 among the total number of random numbers for 1000, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202b is referred to to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first win type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 21(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in this embodiment, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the acquired first per type counter C2 It has a selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2 used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). . As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different, or each of a plurality of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratio can be changed, the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2) provide different game characteristics to the player It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 used at the time of lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 21(b). FIG. 21(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random value is any of "0 to 9" is "jackpot A", and any of "10 to 49" The jackpot type is "jackpot B" when the number is 1, and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" when the number is one of "50 to 99".

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state (time-saving number of times is once). Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers select "jackpot A", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot A" is 10%.

"Jack B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state (time-saving once). Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers select "jackpot B", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot B" is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big win, the "jackpot C" is a big win type disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers are selected as "jackpot C", so the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot C" is 50%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is selected at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, and 90 A percentage of 5 rounds of jackpot games are selected. In addition, a jackpot is selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to the time-saving state at a rate of 50%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21(c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used at the time of the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG.21(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to special-figure 2 jackpot classification selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 21(c), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" when the random number is any one of "0 to 99". That is, when a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2), the most advantageous "big win D" for the player is always selected as the big win type.

Next, with reference to FIG.21(d), the time reduction provision content for every jackpot classification is demonstrated.

In this embodiment, there are four types of jackpots, but the number of types is not limited to four. One type or five or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the types of jackpot types selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. It may be configured so that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol is different from the symbol on which the ready-to-win is applied. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected, namely, "reach out" (for example, range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and "complete loss" (for example, range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment). It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into normal state and time saving state, and the range of random numbers set for each out-of-stop stop type is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state or whether it is a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

For example, in the time-saving state, there is a high probability table with a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. Since "completely out of reach" is more likely to be selected and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, "out of reach" is less likely to be selected. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. A low-probability table is selected, making it difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the "out of reach" stop type is widened to 80-99. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do.

In this embodiment, in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to the gaming state, a stop type selection table (not shown) is provided for a normal state and a time saving state, but other than that A dedicated table may be provided to correspond to the game state. In a gaming machine having a probability state, a variable probability state, a stop type selection table for the variable probability state may be provided.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol hits. 99), it is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed (that is, the state other than during the special symbol variation, the big winning game, and the small winning game). Alternatively, it is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 .

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) for determining the type of the small win to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is set.

Here, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 22, the small hit type selection table 202f is defined so that three types of small hit A to small hit C are selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5 as the small hit type of the second special symbol. ing. Specifically, the small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is "0" is "small hit A (V passage time jackpot A)", any of "1 to 10" The small hit type in the case of being is "small hit B (V passage time jackpot B)", and the small hit type in the case of "11 to 99" is "small hit C (V passage Time jackpot A)”.

Here, each small winning type (small winning A to small winning C) is executed after the small winning game ends when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the respective small winning game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of the small win A, the big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win A, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state to execute the big win, and then the time-saving state. , one time-saving game (100 variations of the special symbol or a period until the variation of the second special symbol is executed once and stopped and displayed) is set. In addition, in the case of the small win B, the big win B (5R short time with big win) 5R time short one time big win is set, and after the small win B is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state. After that, one time-saving game is set as a time-saving state (a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 100 times or the variation of the second special symbol is executed once and is stopped) is set. ing. In the case of the small win C, as in the case of the small win A, the big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win C, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state. is executed, but after the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set and the normal state is set.

Thus, depending on the selected small winning type, the content of the big winning game executed after the small winning game is completed and the game state set after the big winning game can be varied. Specifically, the small win A has a large number of rounds (15R) executed in the big win game, and since a time saving state that is advantageous to the player after the big win game is completed is set, it is the most advantageous for the player. It is set as a small win, and the small win B has a smaller number of rounds (5R) executed in the big win game, and is set more disadvantageously than the above-described small win A, but a time saving state is set after the big win game. be. The small win C is set as the most disadvantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is small (5R) and the time saving state is not set after the big win game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is 1 time (first termination condition), or the number of times of variation of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 1 or more, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, the first special pattern (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot is finished. ) is executed, the time saving state will not end. Also, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the second end condition described above is satisfied and the time saving state can be terminated, so any special symbol (second special pattern) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23(a)) storing a random number for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

Here, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used when the time saving state is set. A time saving variation pattern table 202d2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 provided in the variation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the normal variation pattern table 202d1, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "out", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is defined in the range of , and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "140 to 149", and fluctuations in the range of "150 to 179" Various types of normal reach with a time of 40 seconds are defined in correspondence, and super reach a with a variable time of 80 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the variation time is 40 seconds. A super reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined in the range of "30 to 189", and a special reach with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds is defined in the range of "190 to 198". It is

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time in the entire range 180 seconds long out is stipulated, and if the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range has a variation time of 180 seconds. Long out is defined.

In this way, according to the lottery result of the special symbol, one of the variation patterns with variation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set, and a command indicating this variation pattern is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. By doing so, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variable effect corresponding to the variable time.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is configured so as not to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game for entering a ball into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game for executing a lottery for the first special symbol is performed. The case where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state configured in this way is the case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the normal state A variation pattern having a long variation time is selected for the variation of the second special symbol in . As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the second special symbol lottery is illegally performed in a short period of time. In addition, when it is determined that the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed is used to illegally draw the second special symbol. It may be configured to notify the outside that (variation) has been executed. In addition, when the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed illegally, the result of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol that is illegally executed is forced to be the result of the lottery (variation). It may be configured to create and display.

As shown in FIG. 23(b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is 7 seconds (the selection ratio is 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate of about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). . Also, if the lottery result is a big hit, it is likely to be selected in the order of 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). stipulated in

In this way, there is a relationship between the special symbol lottery result and the selected variation pattern (variation time), and the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the special It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win when a specific variation time (variation pattern) is selected by the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the pattern is a loss. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player without being limited to this. Different variation pattern tables may be used for the case of the jackpot type and the case of the jackpot type indicating other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is shorter than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that the time variation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

Further, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d2 for time reduction provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 24, in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, the pattern type, the number of variations, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4 times, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, if the fluctuation time is defined as a short deviation of 2 seconds in the entire range, and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" A short hit with a variation time of 2 seconds is defined for the range, ie the entire range. If the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 times or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range If the deviation of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the above, and the lottery result is "big win", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the whole range of the fluctuation time is 20 seconds. is stipulated. Also, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, If the variation time is defined to be within 30 seconds for the entire range and the lottery result is "small win", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 160" and the variation time is 10 seconds. is defined, medium and small wins with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds are defined in the range of "161 to 198", and when the lottery result is a "big win", a medium and big win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, as the second random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal design is low (period in which the normal state of the design is normal), and when the probability of winning the normal design is high than that of the low probability (normal design) It is possible to provide two types, one for the time period in which the working hours are shortened. In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning can be changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state, and if the game state is the time saving state, the second pattern is displayed. In the device 83, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not the time-saving state, the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 30 seconds.

If the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is used as a stop symbol (second symbol). A symbol of "○" is illuminated. Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and When the second pattern variation start time is also in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to operate (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation control (short opening control) of the electric accessory 640a is performed so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of openings of the second entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (opening period of the second ball entrance 640, number of times of opening) are variable according to the set game state. When the game state at the time of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbols is the time saving state, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from ``30 seconds to 3 seconds'' compared to the case of the normal state, and further, If the lottery result of the second symbol that started to fluctuate during the period in which the time saving state is set is a hit and the time saving state is set at the time when the electric accessory 640a starts to operate, otherwise , the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. state. A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 .

In addition, in this embodiment, according to the game state at the start of the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the game state at the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, Although the variation time of the second symbol and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a are configured to be set differently, other configurations may be used, for example, variation of the normal symbol (second symbol). From the start timing to the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a, a determination means for determining that the time saving state is continuously set is provided, and the variation time of the second pattern is determined using the determination result of the determination means. And it may be configured to set the operation content of the electric accessory 640a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the operation of the electric accessory 640a, the normal symbol fluctuation start time and the operation start time of the electric accessory 640a It is necessary to set the time saving state at any timing. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern, which starts to change at the timing when the normal state is set, is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating the hit at the timing when the time saving state is set, or Based on the lottery of one second pattern, such as when the second pattern that starts to change at the timing when the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating the win at the timing when the time saving state is set. In the case where the variation of the second symbol and the action of the electric role product 640a executed by stepping across a plurality of game states, the operation control (long opening) of the electric role product 640a that is advantageous to the player is executed. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(a), the contents of the main controller 110ROM202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains, as part of the fixed value data, a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and At least a variation pattern table 202d, a time reduction grant table 202e, a small hit type selection table 202f, and an open scenario table 202g are stored.

Of the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first winning random number table 202, the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the small winning type selection table 202f Since the detailed content has already been explained, the explanation is omitted.

The time saving provision table 202e is a data table referred to when setting a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state differently for each jackpot type of the winning jackpot, and the jackpot game ends (jackpot game ending When the period ends) (S1612 of FIG. 52: Yes) is referred to, different times of time saving (time saving end conditions) are set according to the jackpot type.

Here, with reference to FIG.21(d), the content prescribed|regulated by the time reduction provision table 202e is demonstrated. FIG.21(d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated by the time reduction provision table 202e. In this embodiment, there are jackpot types (jackets A, B, D) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (normal state is set). As shown in FIG. 21(d), a plurality of time-saving end conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.

In this embodiment, the first time-saving end condition established according to the number of fluctuations of special symbols, the second time-saving end condition established according to the number of times a small hit A is won in the lottery of special symbols, and the lottery of special symbols It has a third time-saving end condition established according to the number of times a small win B is won, and a fourth time-saving end condition established according to the number of times a small win C is won in a lottery of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 21(d), the time saving provision table 202e defines values to be set in various counters corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving end conditions, and the value to be set as the first time saving end condition described above is It is set to the counter 203k during the time saving, the value set as the second time saving end condition is set to the small hit A counter 203m, the value set as the third time saving end condition is set to the small hit B counter 203n, and the fourth time saving end The value set as the condition is set in the small winning C counter 203p.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A and B, as the time saving end condition, the time saving medium counter 203k (first time saving end condition) "100", the small hit A counter 203m "1", the small hit It is specified to set the value of "3" to the B counter 203n and "5" to the small hit C counter 203p, and in the case of the big hit D, the time saving middle counter 203k (first time saving ending condition) , "2" to the small winning A counter 203m, "10" to the small winning B counter 203n, and "50" to the small winning C counter 203p.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the jackpot C of the time saving grant table 202e is set for the various counters described above. No value specified. In this way, by differentiating the termination conditions of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends for each jackpot type that has been won, even if it is notified in advance that the time saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, the specific Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the time saving, the game can be played until the end (until the time saving state ends) in a state of heightened play motivation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the time saving state ends even when a special symbol jackpot is won in addition to the time saving end state set using the time saving grant table 202e, but based on this jackpot winning. Since the time saving end condition that is established does not differ depending on the set jackpot type, it is omitted from the time saving grant table 202e, but the above time saving end condition (established based on the special figure jackpot winning You may comprise so that a value may be prescribed|regulated to the time saving provision table 202e also about time saving end conditions).

Further, in the present embodiment, as a plurality of time-saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-described first time-saving end condition to fourth time-saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as time-saving end conditions, For example, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (eg 50 times), the time saving end condition is established, and when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a prescribed number of times (eg 80 times). Time-saving end conditions, and the number of times the V winning device has been activated by winning a small hit (the number of times the sum of the values of the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p) is a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) may be set.

In addition, it is possible to set a time saving end condition that is established by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols or the lottery result. number of times of operation) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of balls entering a specific ball entrance (for example, the general winning opening 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) You may comprise so that the time saving end conditions etc. which are materialized in may be preset.

As described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, are set, and the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time saving state will continue, so that monotonous games can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the control is used to end the time saving state when any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, a plurality of time saving end conditions are a predetermined number You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized when (for example, two) materialize. In this case, the establishment number determination means for determining the number of time-saving end conditions that are satisfied, and the condition attainment determination means for determining whether the number of establishment determined by the establishment number determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), is provided, and the time saving state is terminated (normal state is set) when it is determined that the condition attainment determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means is provided for discriminating the content of the time-saving end condition that is established first, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating reference for the condition attainment discriminating means is varied based on the discriminating result of the content discriminating means. A discrimination reference number variable means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is established first, so that even after the time-saving state is set, the player is motivated. You can play games.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, a predetermined period of time after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches 10 times) is measured, and the measurement result of the predetermined period of time measurement means is measured. A result determination means for determining is provided, and when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, even if the above-mentioned time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated until the predetermined period elapses. A time-saving end delaying means for delaying may be provided, or an end condition invalidating means may be provided for invalidating the time-saving end condition established when the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period. In addition, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, it determines whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, and updates (subtracts) the values of various counters set according to each time saving end condition ) may not be executed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the end of the time saving state immediately after the time saving state is set, and to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, in the case of using the process of ending the time saving state based on the fact that a plurality of time saving end conditions are satisfied as described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions are prioritized time saving end conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is Time-saving end conditions that are established when reaching 100 times) and non-priority time-saving end conditions (for example, time-saving end conditions that are established when the number of small hits reaches 3 times) are set, and priority time-saving end It is preferable that the time saving state is terminated immediately when the conditions are satisfied, and the time saving state is terminated only when a plurality of non-prioritized time saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the preferential time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to suppress excessively providing the time-saving state to the player.

The opening scenario table 202g is an opening pattern ( A pattern for operating various solenoids provided in each winning device) is stored in a data table for storing an opening scenario, which is a jackpot type set for a winning jackpot or set for a winning small win. The contents of the open scenario are defined in correspondence with the small hit type.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g. In addition, in the open scenario table 202g schematically shown in FIG. 25, the periods in which the same scenario is set are collectively described. A measurement counter that measures is provided, and among the currently set open scenarios, it is configured so that the operation of the content specified in correspondence with the measurement value of the measurement counter is executed, but the detailed explanation is omitted.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g. This open scenario table 202g is a winning device (variable winning device 65) that allows balls to enter in a privilege game (big win game, small win game) that is executed when the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win or a small win. , V winning device 650) is defined as operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation according to the winning type (big winning type, small winning type).

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the contents of the opening operation (opening scenario ), it is possible to set the degree of advantage of the privilege game in multiple stages. can.

In the opening scenario table 202g, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big winning type, small winning type). , the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the inter-round interval period (between round games ) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period to allow the start of new special symbol fluctuations) )), and the ON/OFF switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2. there is

Specifically, corresponding to jackpot A, the winning type is "2 seconds" as the start interval period, "15 rounds" for the "variable winning device 65" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and 1 round. As a game, an opening operation mode in which the game is opened continuously for 29 seconds is stipulated with an inter-round interval period of '1 second' and an end interval period of '4 seconds'. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot A, a jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a jackpot game in which a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. . Furthermore, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the jackpot is a jackpot in which a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished, is set, so that the jackpot A is given a privilege that is most advantageous to the player. It is a big hit.

Next, corresponding to jackpot types B and C, the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the prize winning device is set to "5 rounds" for the "variable prize winning device 65", and one round game is set. The opening operation mode of "continuously 29 seconds" is defined with an inter-round interval period of "1 second" and an end interval period of "4 seconds". Therefore, when the jackpot types are jackpots B and C, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for five rounds, and a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is played for the player. It becomes a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of prize balls are paid out. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished, is set, and when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game is finished. Since it is configured, the jackpot B becomes a jackpot in which a privilege that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and more advantageous than the jackpot C is given.

Corresponding to the jackpot D as the winning type, "1 second" is set as the start interval period, "V winning device 650" is opened in the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and "variable winning device 65" is operated. is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, the first round opens "0.1 seconds open 12 times with an interval of 0.5 seconds open", 2- In the 15th round, the opening operation mode is "continuously open for 29 seconds", the inter-round interval period is "10 seconds" after the first round, otherwise "1 second", and the end interval period is "4 seconds". is stipulated.

In other words, although the details will be described later, the period from the start interval period of the jackpot D to the execution of the second round (round game content of the first round (opening and closing operation mode), and the interval between rounds after the end of the first round Period) is configured to be the same as the content stipulated in the small winning game described later. By configuring in this way, whether the winning game being executed this time is a big winning game or a small winning game is determined until the timing when the first round ends (if it is a small winning game, the small winning game ends It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand until the timing to do so). As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected winning game to a player who has won a small winning and recognized that a small winning game is being executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and most of the second special symbol lotteries are set to win the small win. (See FIG. 20(c)). Therefore, the time-saving state is set as the game state, and during the period in which the variation of the second special symbol is mainly performed, some winning game is started after the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the winning game is started from the same opening operation regardless of whether the player wins the big win or the small win, which win (big win or small win) is won by the player. can be difficult to grasp.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbols, the probability of winning the big win is set to be lower than that of winning the small win, and after the big win game corresponding to the big win D is finished. It is set to give a time saving state. Therefore, since a player who has won a big win is not provided with a privilege that is more disadvantageous than when he wins a small win, the player can play an unexpected game (a jackpot game corresponding to the big win D). Since the game can be played in an advantageous manner, the player can be more excited.

Incidentally, when the big win D is won and when various small wins are won, the same performance mode is executed as the variable display (variable performance) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b showing the lottery result of the special symbol, the stop display timing of the special symbol and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The stop display timing of the third symbol is made different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol are synchronized, but the third symbol is displayed at the stop display timing or the period before and after that. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify than during other periods, the display mode and display area are changed, and at the stop display timing of the special symbol, the effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 It is preferable to switch from the 3rd pattern to the normal pattern for production corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when a winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged separately, and the stop display timing of the special symbol (when any winning At the timing of informing the player of the winning, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display to draw the player's attention to the V winning device 650, or the first symbol display device 37a, It is preferable that the display area of 37b is made smaller than the display area of the third pattern display device 81 so that the first pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than the third pattern. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result of this special pattern is a big win or a small win by the stop display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the big win is continued even during the winning game. can be expected to be elected.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description continues. In addition to the small winning game (1 round game), the small winning game is performed by the V switch 650e3 detecting the ball during the small winning game. A release scenario of a jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) that is continuously executed after the end is also defined. As a result, it is possible to reliably associate the small winning game contents of the winning small winning type with the big winning game contents that can be executed after finishing the small winning game, so that a proper game can be provided.

Specifically, for a small win A, the start interval period is "1 second" as a small win game, and the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is "1 round". Round game "0.1 second open 12 times", interval period between open "0.5 seconds (interval between open 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th open, end of the 5th and 10th open 5 seconds (interval 2 between opening)” is defined later.

Then, as a jackpot game that can be executed after the end of the small win game, the "variable prize winning device 65" opens in "2nd to 15th rounds", and one round game "continuously open for 29 seconds" is the interval period between rounds. , "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds", and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are defined.

In addition, for small wins B and C, the start interval period is "1 second" as a small win game, and the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device is opened once for "1 round". Round game "0.1 second open 12 times", interval period between open "0.5 seconds (interval between open 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th open, after the end of the 5th and 10th open 5 seconds (opening interval 2)” is defined.

Then, as a jackpot game that can be executed after the end of the small win game, the "variable prize winning device 65" opens in the "2nd to 5th rounds", and one round game "continuously open for 29 seconds" is the interval period between rounds. , "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds", and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are defined.

That is, the big winning game that can be executed after finishing the small winning games corresponding to the small winnings B and C is set so that the number of round games is smaller than that of the big winning game corresponding to the small winning A described above. Further, when the small win type is a small win B, a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the corresponding big win game is finished, is set, and in the case of the small win C, after the corresponding big win game is finished. Since the time-saving state is not set, the small win B becomes a small win to which a privilege that is more disadvantageous than the small win A and more advantageous than the small win C is given.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 50) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a jackpot start flag 203c, a jackpot medium flag 203d, a small hit type storage area 203e, Small hit start flag 203f, small hit middle flag 203g, V passage big hit type storage area 203h, V flag 203i, V passage flag 203j, short time counter 203k, small hit A counter 203m, small hit B counter 203n, small hit C counter 203p, normal map short variation flag 203q, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained based on the hitting of the ball is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for the first special symbol is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the second special symbol, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in a state where a new special symbol variation can be executed (starting Winning), the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, C5 and CS1 are acquired at that timing, and the acquired data are stored as they are in the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have a function of holding the normal symbol (second symbol), when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 in a state where a new normal symbol variation can be executed. , At that timing, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is the first special symbol (first symbol) variable display (first It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the three-symbol display device 81 . The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S207 in FIG. 38).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command (S208 in FIG. 38, FIG. 43 S705). The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command sent from the main controller 110 changes the change reserved by the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls displayed. As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual number of holding balls of variable display that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The jackpot start flag 203c is a flag indicating that it is time to start a jackpot game. When the lottery result is determined to be a big win and the variation of the special symbol stops, the big win start flag 203c is set to ON (S216 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is ON and it is identified that it is time to start the jackpot, it is set to OFF (S1603 in FIG. 52). Note that the jackpot start flag 203c is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and held in the state immediately before the power interruption when the power is interrupted.

The jackpot middle flag 203d is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S216 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is set to OFF (S1620 in FIG. 52). This jackpot flag 203d is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. is configured as

The small hit type storage area 203e is a storage area for temporarily storing the small hit type set for the won small hit, and when it is determined that the small hit is won (S307 of FIG. 39: Yes ), the obtained small winning type is temporarily stored (S311 in FIG. 39). Then, when the number of openings of the V winning device 650 reaches a predetermined number during the small winning game (S1707 in FIG. 53: Yes) and it is determined that the V flag 203i is not set to ON (S1708 in FIG. 53; No ), the stored small hit type is referred to (S1709 in FIG. 53), and an instruction command corresponding to the referred small hit type is set. Although detailed description is omitted, the information stored in the small hit type storage area 203e (information for indicating the small hit type) is configured to be cleared at the end of the small hit game.

The small winning start flag 203f is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). It is determined that the small hit start flag 203f is ON, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to OFF (S1703 in FIG. 53). This small hit start flag 203f is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of power failure or the like. configured to be

The small hit medium flag 203g is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to OFF (S1720 in FIG. 53). This small hit medium flag 203g is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the power failure or the like occurs. configured to be

The V passing jackpot type storage area 203h stores data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a winning ball in the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when a small winning game is being executed. This is the storage area where the data is stored. The V passage big win type storage area 203h stores a data value corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the determined small win type when the fluctuation of the special symbol that results in a small win stops (FIG. 40). of S402). When the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, a V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h. 203i is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing big winning type storage area 203h is cleared. This V pass jackpot type storage area 203h is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. is configured to be held by

The V flag 203i corresponds to the type of the small winning game being executed when the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. A flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether this V flag 203i is on (S1715 in FIG. 53), and when it is determined that the V flag 203i is on (S1715 in FIG. 53: Yes), it is set to on The jackpot type to be executed is discriminated from the executed flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S1716 in FIG. 53). This V flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared. is configured as

The V passage flag 203j is a flag used for determining the state in which the V flag 203i is set to ON during the small winning game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203i is set to ON. be done. In this embodiment, most of the balls that have won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and correspond to the balls that have won the special discharge flow path 650e2 first. It is set to ON in the V passage processing (see FIG. 48) (S1207 in FIG. 48).

Then, in the V passage processing (see FIG. 48), it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203j is set to ON (S1201 in FIG. 48). ), the processing of S1202 to S1208 in the V passing processing (see FIG. 48) is skipped. As a result, even when the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small winning game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing executed during the small winning game, and the V passing command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, and the V passing management on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 is complicated. can be prevented from becoming

The time saving medium counter 203k is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is established. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the effect (the end timing of the jackpot) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value (100) defined in the time reduction grant table 202e is set (S1614 in FIG. 52). .

Then, the value of the counter is referenced (S601 in FIG. 42) in the time saving number update process (S219 in FIG. 42) executed in the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38), and if the value of the counter is greater than 0 If so (S601 in FIG. 42: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k after the subtraction is 0 (S604 in FIG. 42: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is satisfied (S605 in FIG. 42). In addition, this embodiment sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, the time saving end condition based on the number of winning small hits is established), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S505 in FIG. 41). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end condition (first time-saving end condition) referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203k are met, the time-saving end conditions of the time-saving counter 203k Since the value is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the counter 203k during time saving is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as above, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated.

The small hit A counter 203m is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small win set with the small win A as the small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending production (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value defined in the time reduction grant table 202e ( 1) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

And, the small hit of the small hit this time elected in the small hit time saving update process (S405 of FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 of FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 38) When it is determined that the type is small hit A (S502 in FIG. 41: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. If it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203m after the subtraction is 0 (S504 in FIG. 41: Yes), the time saving end condition is established, so the normal state is set as the game state (S507 in FIG. 41). . In addition, this embodiment sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end conditions based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is established), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end conditions (second time-saving end conditions) referring to the value of the small hit A counter 203m are met, the small hit A counter Since the value of 203m is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small hit A counter 203m is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated after the time saving state is terminated.

The small hit B counter 203n is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of a small win set with a small win B as a small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending production (jackpot end timing) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value defined in the time reduction grant table 202e ( 3) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

And, the small hit of the small hit this time elected in the small hit time saving update process (S405 of FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 of FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 38) When it is determined that the type is small winning B (S510 in FIG. 41: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n after the subtraction is 0 (S512 in FIG. 41: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is established (S507 in FIG. 41). . In addition, this embodiment sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end conditions based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is established), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end conditions (third time-saving end conditions) with reference to the value of the small winning B counter 203n are met, the small winning B counter Since the value of 203n is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small hit B counter 203n is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated after the time saving state is terminated.

The small hit C counter 203p is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small win set with the small win C as the small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending production (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value defined in the time reduction grant table 202e ( 5) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

And, the small hit of the small hit this time elected in the small hit time saving update process (S405 of FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 of FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 38) When it is determined that the type is small win C (S510 in FIG. 41: No), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203p after the subtraction is 0 (S514 in FIG. 41: Yes), the time saving end condition is established, so the normal state is set as the game state (S515 in FIG. 41). . In addition, this embodiment sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end conditions based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is established), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end conditions (fourth time-saving end conditions) referring to the value of the small hit C counter 203p are met, the small win C counter Since the value of 203p is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small hit C counter 203p is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as above, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated.

The general pattern short fluctuation flag 203q is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal pattern (second pattern) was a short fluctuation (fluctuation for 3 seconds). It indicates that a short variation of symbol) has been executed. This normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203q determines that the timing for setting the normal pattern fluctuation time in the normal pattern fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 45) is during the time saving state (during time saving) (S909 in FIG. 45: Yes ), it is set to ON when the variation time (short variation) of 3 seconds is set (S911 in FIG. 45), and it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has passed (S913 in FIG. 45) , When it is determined that the current normal symbol (second symbol) lottery result is a win (S915 in FIG. 45: Yes), it is referred to (S916 in FIG. 45).

Here, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON (S916 in FIG. 45: Yes), it is determined whether the current is in the time saving state (in time saving) (S918 in FIG. 45 ), when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (during time saving) (S918 in FIG. 45: Yes), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (Fig. 45 S919). In addition, the normal short pattern fluctuation flag 203q is set to OFF after it is determined that it is set to ON in the normal pattern fluctuation process (S106 in FIG. 45) (S917 in FIG. 45).

In this way, the game state at the start of variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when setting the variation time) and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a after the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has passed Since it is configured to set the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a only when both the game state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of game states (normal state and time saving state), it is possible to reliably prevent the electric role 640a from being released for a long time by the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol executed across the time reduction state). It is possible to suppress excessively providing the player with the release).

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. , the large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side, the V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and the switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. A solenoid 209 consisting of a flow path solenoid 650k for driving an electric accessory (other solenoid 209z) for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. do.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors inputs from the frame button 22 and the frame button 23, and when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the content of the performance during super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a state display selection table 222b, a final state display selection table 222c, and other various data necessary for game control. Programs and the like are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). Note that the counter for selecting the variation pattern is updated each time (every time various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) are executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113). This counter consists of a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299). In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

Note that the counter value for selecting the variation pattern may be configured to be updated by processing other than the various counter updating processing (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 described above. For example, in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, the period during which the repeated processing is executed when 1 millisecond has not elapsed since the previous processing was executed (for example, the processing of S2114 in FIG. 55 is executed) A process of updating the value of the counter may be added during the period between the execution of the process of S2115). By configuring in this way, in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the audio lamp control device 113, the period spent for executing part of the processing (the processing of S2102 to S2112 in FIG. The number of times the processing for updating the value of the counter for selecting the variation pattern is executed can be made indefinite (random). Therefore, based on the content of the display effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected using the variation pattern selection 222a) set by the audio lamp control device 113 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the voice It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the law of the control of the lamp control device 113 .

The state display selection table 222b is a display mode of the state display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state is set as the gaming state (see situation (state) display mode Dm3a in FIG. 11). It is a data table used when selecting . This state display selection table 222b is used when selecting a state display mode corresponding to a change display other than the change at which the time saving state ends (final change of the time saving state) from among the states in which the time saving state is set. .

This state display selection table 222b shows the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variation (the degree of expectation of winning a special symbol jackpot lottery, and the degree of expectation of winning a special symbol lottery, and winning a small hit in a special symbol lottery, and 2 during the small winning (during a small winning game). The degree of expectation that the seed per is set) and the update condition of the time saving state (whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, or various elements set as the time saving end condition (number of fluctuations of special symbols, number of winning small hits, etc. ) is updated), and a different state display mode is selected. Therefore, by grasping the content of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the player is made to grasp the situation of the time saving state currently set. be able to.

Here, the contents defined in the status display selection table 222b will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the status display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27(a), the state display selection table 222b is the lottery result of the special symbol (result of determination) and the setting status of the time saving lower limit flag 223k (determination result of whether or not it is set to ON). , various state display modes are defined in correspondence with the setting state of the semi-end condition flag 223m (determined result of whether or not it is set to ON) and the value of the state effect counter 223o.

Here, the various flags and counters referred to in the state display selection table 222b will be briefly described. and is set to ON when the time saving state has passed for a predetermined period. The state display mode can be changed according to the setting state of each flag, that is, according to the progress state of the time saving state.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol among the end conditions for ending the time saving state. That is, when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the end condition that can be satisfied is approaching by executing the variation of the special symbol, and it is possible to make the player play the game in the time saving state with a sense of tension. can. In addition, since various effects can be executed in the time-saving state that is continuously set, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of special symbol variations executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON, and the state (situation) display mode Dm3a However, in order to display various display modes to the player as the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a, for example, the number of special symbol variations executed during the time saving state may display a different state (situation) display mode Dm3a for odd-numbered times and even-numbered times, or a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, the period until the special symbol changes 10 times) Only for this period, a state (situation) display mode Dm3a different from that for other periods may be set.

The quasi-end condition flag 223m is turned on based on the number of times the small win is won (the number of times the small win is won and the operation control is executed for the V winning device 650) among the end conditions for ending the time saving state. is set to That is, when the small win is won a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the end condition that can be satisfied by winning a small prize is approaching, and to make the player play the game in the time-saving state with a sense of urgency. In addition, since various effects can be executed in the time-saving state that is continuously set, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The state effect counter 223o is a loop counter whose value "0 to 99" is periodically updated. The value is updated by 1 each time the counter update process (S2111 in FIG. 55) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(a), the contents defined in the status display selection table 222b will be specifically described. FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the status display selection table 222b. State display selection table 222b, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the result of determination, time reduction lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, and the value of the state effect counter 223o effect to be executed state display mode (see FIG. 15 for details of the specific display mode).

Specifically, the success or failure determination result is a jackpot, and when the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". A display mode of "3" is defined, a state display mode of "1" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and a state display mode of "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". In addition, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined as "3" in the range of "0 to 49". State display mode "1" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Defined.

Furthermore, if the success/failure determination result is a jackpot, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". The display mode "1" is defined, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and When the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "3" is specified in the range of "0 to 69" for the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o, and the state display in the range of "70 to 79". Mode "1" is defined, and status display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

In other words, when the success or failure determination result of the special symbol is a big hit, according to the progress of the time saving state that is set (time saving lower limit flag 223k, state display selected according to the setting situation of semi-end condition flag 223m) Aspects can vary. Therefore, various state display modes can be displayed during the time-saving state, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, a period in which both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-finishing condition flag 223m are set to OFF (the first half period of the time saving state), and either the time saving lower limit flag 223k or the semi-finishing condition flag 223m is set to ON. Since the display mode that is likely to be selected as the state display mode can be changed between the period (mid-stage period of the time saving state), the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the third display region Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 can be made to predict the progress of a time-saving state by making a player grasp|ascertain.

Furthermore, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to OFF, and the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79", the state display It is configured so that mode "4" is set. As described above with reference to FIG. 15, this state display mode "4" is a state display mode for suggesting to the player that a small win has been won. In some cases, that is, when the win/loss determination is not a small win (when the win/loss determination result is more advantageous to the player than winning a small win), it is configured to be selected. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player, and to quickly provide a performance that does not get bored.

Next, the success or failure determination result is a small hit A (a small hit in which a small hit game that is most likely to hit two types of a plurality of small hit types is executed), and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m When the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is on, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "0 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". be done. In addition, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined as "7" in the range of "0 to 49". State display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", state display mode "7" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Defined.

Next, when the success/failure determination result is a small hit A, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". , state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". When both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined as the state display mode "7" in the range of "0 to 79", and "80 to 99 ” defines the state display mode “9”.

Then, the success or failure determination result is a small hit B or C (a small hit in which two types of small hit games that are difficult to hit among a plurality of small hit types are executed), and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are set. When the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is on, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", and the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 79". , and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". In addition, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined as "4" in the range of "0 to 69". The state display mode "2" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Furthermore, if the success/failure determination result is a small hit B or C, and the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49". State display mode "6" is defined in the range, state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and "80 The state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "99". In addition, when both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined as the state display mode "2" in the range of "0 to 49", and "50 to State display mode "4" is defined in the range of "69", state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". be.

As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the small winning type set to the winning small winning (according to the degree of expectation per 2 types during the small winning game to be executed) so that different state display modes are displayed , so that the player can grasp the state display mode displayed during the time saving state, in addition to predicting the timing when the time saving state ends, the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed (dynamic Display) results (lottery results of special symbols) can also be predicted. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the state display mode displayed during the time-saving state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, when the small hit A is won, the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is turned off, and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is turned on, the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79". , the contents of the state display selection table 222b are defined so that the state display mode "6" is selected. This state display mode "6" is, as shown in FIG. 15, a state display mode in which characters of "big pinch" are displayed for suggesting that the time saving state ends based on the winning of the small prize. By displaying this state display mode "6" even when the small win A is exceptionally won, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, and the state display mode "6" is displayed. Since the possibility of winning two types of winning can be increased in the small winning game executed after the winning, the state display mode is based on winning the small winning B or the small winning C with a low possibility of winning two types. Even when "6" is displayed, the player can continue to have expectations for a double win until the small win game ends.

If the result of the judgment is out, and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are on, the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49" and the state display mode "1". is defined, the state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99" ” is defined. In addition, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined as "1" in the range of "0 to 69". The state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Furthermore, if the result of the judgment is out, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". "6" is defined, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". In addition, when both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are off, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined as "1" in the range of "0 to 79", and "80 The state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "99".

In this way, if the success/failure determination result is out, that is, if the special symbol variation that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition based on the small winning or the big winning is executed, the semi-end condition flag 223m is turned on. , the state display mode is selected so that the player thinks that the player has won a small prize and the time-saving end condition has been established. As a result, in the state where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, that is, in the state where the small winning game is executed a predetermined number of times after the time saving state is set, the game is played while giving the player a sense of danger. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, the state display mode ( The state display modes "2, 4 to 7") are configured to be easily selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of an effect that falsely suggests that a small win has been unnecessarily won when the result of the win/loss determination is a failure. Specifically, in the state in which the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, it is easy to select an effect mode (state display mode) that makes it appear that the time-saving end condition is established when a small win is won, In the state where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to OFF, it is configured to make it difficult to select a performance mode (state display mode) that makes it appear that a time-saving end condition is satisfied when winning a small prize. there is

Since it is configured in this way, it is possible to set the display mode of the state display mode for a plurality of special symbol variations executed during the period in which the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON in a series of flows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity with respect to the game executed during the time-saving state and lowering the performance effect.

In addition, the state display mode "9" is selected according to the value of the state effect counter 223o without being based on the result of the success/failure determination or the setting status of various flags. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the progress of the current time saving state. Furthermore, in a part of the case where the result of the judgment is "no", the state display mode "3" is selected. As a result, when the display mode of the state display mode "3" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol during the dynamic display is either a big win or a loss. A production suggesting that is executed.

Here, in this embodiment, the probability that the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost (other than the big hit and the small hit) is 1/100 (see FIG. 20(c)), and the value of the state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79", that is, in the range of 1/10 of the counter value updated in the range of "0 to 99", the state display mode "3" is displayed ( When the second special symbol is selected by lottery, the state display mode "3" is selected with a probability of 1/1000 as the result of the lottery "missing").

Therefore, the status display mode "3" is displayed when most of the jackpots are won. It is possible to play a game with an exciting feeling (until stop display). In addition, in this embodiment, the progress of the current time saving state (remaining number until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of special symbols, so that the player can predict multiple state display modes It is configured to be selected, but the state display mode that can reliably notify the progress of the current time saving state (remaining number until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of special symbols is selected. It may be configured so that

In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the progress of the time saving state (the setting state of the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m) and the value of the state effect counter 223o, the state display mode is displayed for each success/failure determination result. Although it is configured to be selected differently, it may be configured to select the state display mode using other conditions. ), an operation determining means for determining whether or not the player has executed a predetermined operation is provided, and the state display modes are varied and selected based on the determination result of the operation determining means. can be Furthermore, in this case, when it is determined that a predetermined operation is performed by the operation determination means, the progress of the current time saving state (remaining number until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of special symbols It is preferable to configure so that a clearly indicated state display mode can be easily selected. As a result, the player will actively operate the operating means, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, each time the effect setting process is executed (every time the variable display of the third symbol is set), the state display using the state display selection table 222b Although it is configured to select a mode, for example, a storage means for storing the state display mode set while the time saving state is continuously set is provided, and the contents stored in the storage means The configuration may be such that a state display mode to be newly set (selected) is determined based on the above. By configuring in this way, the state display mode is displayed evenly during the time saving state, or the randomly set state display mode (selected based on the value of the state effect counter 223o) is biased to one side. In a case WHEREIN: The state display mode set during the remaining time saving states can be intentionally biased to one side.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving state is set repeatedly (the number of times the time-saving state is set again after winning the jackpot (two types are set) during the time-saving state) and the prize balls won during that period It may be configured such that the state display modes selected according to the number are different.

Next, the contents of the final state display selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final state display selection table 222c. This final state display selection table 222c is a data table referred to in order to select the state display mode displayed on 3rd display area Ds3 during a time saving state like state display selection table 222b mentioned above. Unlike the above-described state display selection table 222b, the final state display selection table 222c differs from the above-described state display selection table 222b in that the special symbol fluctuations that cause the time saving state to end (when the number of special symbol fluctuations becomes the number of fluctuations that satisfies the time saving end condition). Variation of special symbols in , or variation of special symbols when the number of winning times of special symbols is the number of winning times that satisfies the time-saving end condition). It is a thing.

This final state display selection table 222c is referred to when it is determined that the time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is ON (S2905 of FIG. 63: Yes) in the later-described effect setting process (see FIG. 63) (FIG. 63 of S2907). The details defined in the final state display selection table 222c will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 27(b). State display mode "7" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", and state display mode "8" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". Defined. In the case where the success/failure determination result is a small hit A, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is specified in the range of "0 to 69" in the state display mode "7", and in the range of "70 to 89". "5" is defined, and the state display mode "8" is defined in the range of "90-99".

In addition, in the case where the success/failure determination result is a small hit B or C, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined in the range of "0 to 69", the state display mode "6" is defined, and the range of "70 to 89" is defined. The state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and the state display mode "8" is defined in the range of "90-99". In the case where the result of the right/wrong determination is "out", the state display mode "8" is defined within the range of "0 to 99" for the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o.

As described above, in this embodiment, the state display mode displayed during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set, and when the time saving state ends (the final fluctuation display of the special symbol that the time saving state ends is performed) and the state display mode displayed in the case) are configured to be selected by referring to different data tables, so when the time saving state ends, it suggests that the time saving state will continue It is possible to reliably prevent the state display mode from being displayed.

In addition, as described above, the state display mode "8" is displayed in some cases when a jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of winning the jackpot by the stop display of the third pattern after making the player think that the time-saving state has ended, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected presentation. .

In addition, as described above, it is configured so that the status display mode "8" is always displayed when the winning lottery is not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations and feeling dissatisfied with the subsequent game results.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). As shown in FIG. 26(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an effect counter 223e, Game state storage area 223f, time saving information update area 223g, temporary hit determination flag 223h, temporary time saving information update area 223i, temporary time saving end flag 223j, time saving lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n, state At least an effect counter 223o and a memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. Winning information based on the winning information command transmitted from main controller 110 is stored in this winning information storage area 223a when the winning information related processing of sound lamp control device 113 (see S2301 in FIG. 57) is executed. The winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110, which is stored in order from the first area, is set when the pre-reading process of the main controller 110 (S707 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the main controller It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1501 in FIG. 51) executed in the main process of 110 (see FIG. 51).

Each winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is displayed one by one each time the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. It is shifted (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) (see S2806 in FIG. 62). As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed, the sound lamp controller 113 side can surely grasp.

In addition, since it is possible to shift the winning information (special symbol prefetch information) transmitted by the winning information command to the execution area (area corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed), for example, winning Based on the reception of the information command, the effect using the period from the start timing of the special symbol variation to be executed next to the timing until the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command ends (so-called look-ahead continuous effect), the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the above-described look-ahead continuous effect ends.

In the present embodiment, up to four pieces of winning information (information that can be obtained when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64) can be retained and stored. In addition, it is configured to have the first area to the fourth area, but for example, winning information (winning information related to the second special symbol) that can be acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 ) can also hold and store up to four, the winning information storage area 223a includes, in addition to the execution area, four areas for the first special symbol (holding information area) and four areas for the second special symbol. It may be configured to provide two areas (reservation information areas).

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b counts the reserved ball of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or in main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2208 in FIG. 56). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is updated. Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203b.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The information contained in the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller may be the actual number of reserved balls, that is, the information indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a, or the special symbol reserved ball number counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been incremented or decremented by one may be used. When transmitting information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1 as the reserved ball number command, It suffices to provide a calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls based on the information received.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 56), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S2802 in FIG. 62). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main processing (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 Inside, it is sent to the display controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 56), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S2808 in FIG. 62). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, a stop type for display is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (S2810 in FIG. 62).

The effect counter 223e is a counter used for lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 is updated each time the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect counter 223e has a plurality of loop counters (for example, a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99), and the values of each counter are configured to be updated without synchronization. there is

Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters with different values updated each time the main process (see FIG. 56) is executed are provided so that the updated values of the counters are not synchronized. Furthermore, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value used in lottery when determining the content of various effects.

The game state storage area 223f is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when a state command regarding the game state is received from the main controller 110. FIG. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223f, the current game state can be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In this embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current gaming state is also erased. However, in this embodiment, the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) of the main control device 110 executed after the power is turned on (S1412 in FIG. 50). 223f stores the information indicating the game state set before the power is turned off. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the game state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main controller 110, a state command indicating the game state after variably set is set (S509 in FIG. 41, S607 in FIG. 42, S1616 in FIG. 52, etc.). .

The time saving information update area 223g is the end condition of the time saving state, and the progress status for each end condition (the number of times that the event targeted by the end condition (for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol, the small hit, and the winning of the jackpot) was executed) and is a data area for storing A state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information (end condition and progress of the time saving state) stored in the time saving information update area 223a. This time saving information update area 223g is determined as the end timing of the ending effect in the time saving related command including the time saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, the main control device 110 jackpot control processing (S1504 in FIG. 52) (Fig. S1612 of 52), when the end condition of the time saving state is set (S1613 of FIG. 52) when the time saving setting information command set is received, the end condition for ending this time saving state is set.

Then, in the time saving update process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2216 in FIG. 60), update information for updating the time saving information (variation information for indicating that the special symbol variation has been executed, and winning a small hit (S2604 in FIG. 60: Yes, S2615 in FIG. 60: Yes), the current time saving situation is updated in correspondence with the received update information .

To specifically explain the data area in the time saving information update area 223g, in the time saving information update area 223g, each item that can be the ending condition of the time saving state (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the second special The number of fluctuations in the design, the total number of fluctuations obtained by adding the number of fluctuations in the first special design and the number of fluctuations in the second special design, the number of winnings for each small hit type (small hits A to C) (the operation of the V winning device 600 It is formed so that information can be temporarily stored corresponding to the number of times it started), the number of winnings of the small win (total number of winnings by summing the number of winnings of each type of small win), etc.), and for each item, Stores time-saving setting information (the number of times the conditions for ending the time-saving state are satisfied) and update information for each item during the period when the time-saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times it was actually executed). configured to be

In this embodiment, using the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, it is possible to determine which end condition is more likely to be satisfied than other end conditions from among a plurality of end conditions, or to determine whether each end condition is satisfied. It is configured to determine the number of remaining executions up to. Furthermore, using the time saving setting information and update information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time saving setting information is calculated, It may be configured to display the progress degree of time saving by a numerical value (for example, percentage).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times already executed (number of fluctuations, number of winnings)). You may comprise so that the remaining number of times until the end conditions of a time saving state may be satisfied may be calculated, and the information which shows the calculated remaining number of times may be stored in the time saving information update area 223g, without restricting to .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time saving setting information and the update information are configured to be stored (stored) separately, but not limited to this, for example, information stored as time saving setting information may be configured to update directly. By comprising in this way, the capacity|capacitance of 223 g of time saving information update areas can be reduced.

The provisional winning determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the winning information (the stored winning information) before the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol is executed includes the winning information for winning the jackpot. When it is set to ON, it indicates that the stored winning information includes the winning information for winning a jackpot. The tentative hit determination flag 223h is set to the winning information related process ( 57), if it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information command received from the main controller 110 (S2305 in FIG. 57: Yes), it is set to ON (S2306 in FIG. 57). .

Then, it is referred to in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 57) (S2303 in FIG. 57), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S2303 in FIG. 57: Yes), various It is configured to skip the discrimination process. Also, it is referred to in the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) (S2903 in FIG. 63). (S2903 in FIG. 63: Yes), the configuration is such that the processing for setting the display state display command indicating the state display mode is skipped.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even when it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information command received from the main controller 110 in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 59) (S2504 in FIG. 59: Yes), The tentative hit determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506 in FIG. 59).

As explained above, if the winning information included in the received winning information command or the winning information retained and stored at the end of the jackpot includes the winning information for winning the jackpot, After that, it is determined whether the winning information contained in the newly received winning information command includes winning information for winning a jackpot, and whether or not the condition for ending the currently set game state is satisfied. It is configured not to perform discrimination. In other words, if it is determined that the time saving state ends due to winning the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time saving state ends based on the prize information acquired after that. , configured to skip its unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is configured to execute processing for determining the content of the winning information when a new winning information command is received and when the jackpot game ends. For example, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 50), each winning information stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a Set a winning prize information command at the time of returning to indicate the above winning prize information command, and transmit all to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the above winning prize information command at the time of returning is received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, the above winning prize information command is set. It may be configured to execute a process of determining the content of information.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a new prize information command is received or when a jackpot game ends, the processing for determining the contents of the prize information is always executed, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured so that the contents of the winning information are not discriminated when a predetermined prohibition condition is satisfied. In this case, as the predetermined prohibition conditions, for example, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of performance modes, the performance mode prohibition condition that is established when one of the performance modes is set, or the special symbol Plural special pattern variations based on the big hit lottery result (win/fail judgment result) included in the winning information and the condition for prohibition of being stuck when the lottery result is a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) in succession other than the big win (loss) A condition for prohibiting continuous performance that is established while the continuous performance is being executed, and a predetermined period after the continuous performance is completed (for example, the variation of the special symbol is executed twice) It is recommended to set a condition for prohibiting multiple occurrences, etc., which is satisfied during the period until

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a period in which an effect (so-called prefetch effect) corresponding to the content determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and a period in which it cannot be executed. Even if the look-ahead performance is not executed for the player, the expectation for the big win can be maintained. It should be noted that the frequency of determining the content of the winning information may be reduced when the above-mentioned prohibition condition is satisfied, or the content of the winning information is always determined when the prohibition condition is not satisfied. Instead of determining, the frequency of determining the contents of the winning information may be increased. Further, it is preferable that the player does not know whether or not the prohibition condition described above is satisfied.

The provisional working hours information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing working hours information (temporary working hours information) updated in advance according to the winning information included in the winning information command. In this embodiment, with reference to the provisional working hours information stored in this provisional working hours information update area 223i, the timing at which the working hours saving state ends is determined in advance.

This provisional time saving information update area 223i is similar to the time saving information update area 223g described above, the time saving related command including the time saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, the main control device 110 jackpot control processing (S1504 in FIG. 52) (S1612 in FIG. 52), and when the end condition of the time saving state is set (S1613 in FIG. 52) When the time saving setting information command set is received (S2602 in FIG. 60: Yes), an end condition (time saving information) for ending this time saving state is set (S2603 in FIG. 60). Then, in the prize winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) of the sound lamp control device 113, update information corresponding to the received prize winning information is stored (S2307 in FIG. 57). Temporary time saving end flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the temporary working time saving information stored in the temporary working time saving information update area 223i, and when it is set to ON, the temporary working time saving information Based on this, it indicates that the time saving end condition has been established. This provisional time saving end flag 223j is, in the winning information related processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2210 in FIG. 57), the updated information of the provisional time saving information update area 223i (temporary working time saving information) satisfies the time saving end conditions. If it is determined that there is, it is set to ON (S2309 in FIG. 57).

Then, it is referred to in the winning information related process (S2210 in FIG. 57) (S2304 in FIG. 57), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S2304 in FIG. 57: Yes), the winning information command received thereafter It is configured to skip various determination processes for.

As described above, if the winning information included in the winning information command received satisfies the time-saving end condition, the winning information included in the winning information command newly received after that will be a big hit. It is configured so as not to determine whether winning prize information is included or whether or not the condition for ending the currently set game state is satisfied. In other words, if it is determined that the time saving state ends due to winning the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time saving state ends based on the winning information acquired after that. , configured to skip its unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations in the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to the end condition established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and is set to ON. , It is for showing that the number of times of variation of the special symbols in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times. This time saving lower limit flag 223k is, in the time saving update process (S2216 in FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, among the end conditions (time saving end conditions) for ending the time saving state, the number of times of special symbol fluctuation (first special symbol The special symbol executed during the time saving state for the end condition (the number of variations of the special symbol is 100 times) set corresponding to the total variation number of times of variation and the number of variations of the second special symbol) (S2608 in FIG. 60: Yes), it is set to ON be. Then, it is referred to when selecting the state display mode using the state display selection table 222b in the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2906 in FIG. 63). Then, when it is determined that the number of remaining short working hours is 0 times (S2612 of FIG. 60: Yes), or in the small hitting related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the short working time update process (see FIG. 60), If it is determined that the termination condition is met (S2706: Yes in FIG. 61), the setting is turned off (S2613 in FIG. 60, S2708 in FIG. 61).

In this way, by providing a flag that is set to ON according to the progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied, and by configuring so as to vary the performance mode according to the setting state of the flag, Therefore, it is possible to predict the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the presentation suggesting the end timing of the time saving state.

In addition, in the 1st Embodiment of this invention, although it comprises so that the progress condition until the completion|finish condition of time saving is satisfied may be discriminate|determined in two steps, you may provide more steps. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) that can identify the state is provided every time the variation of the special symbol is executed 10 times in the state where the time saving state is set, and the production mode is changed according to the flag (counter). It should be configured so as to be variable.

The quasi-end condition flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations of special symbols has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to the end conditions established based on the winning of a small prize by lottery of special symbols, and is turned on. is set to indicate that the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number. The quasi-end condition flag 223m is referred to in the small hit related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) (S2703 in FIG. 61), and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off ( S2703 of FIG. 61: No), if it is determined that the semi-end condition is satisfied (S2704 of FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to ON (S2705 of FIG. 61). Then, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2707 in FIG. 61).

The time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is a flag for indicating that the change before the time saving state ends (the time saving end condition is satisfied) is executed, and when it is set to ON, the time saving state ends This indicates that the previous variation to be executed is executed. Specifically, among the end conditions of the time saving state that are set multiple times, when the period until the time saving end condition set based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied (number of fluctuations) is 1 time remaining set to on. By executing the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) in a state where the time saving before end variation flag 223n is set to ON, it is possible to determine that the variation is the final variation of the time saving state, and the time saving state A production corresponding to the final variation can be executed.

This time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is set to ON (S2611 in FIG. 60) when it is determined that the number of remaining time saving times is 1 in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) ). Then, when it is determined that the number of remaining short working hours is 0 times (S2612 of FIG. 60: Yes), or in the small hitting related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the short working time update process (see FIG. 60), If it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes in FIG. 61), the setting is turned off (S2614 in FIG. 60, S2709 in FIG. 61). Also, it is referenced in the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) (S2905 in FIG. 63), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S2905 in FIG. 63 : Yes), the processing using the final state display selection table 222c to set the state display command for display indicating the state display mode (processing for the final change of the time saving state) is executed, and it is not set to ON (OFF If it is determined (S2905 in FIG. 63: No), the process using the state display selection table 222b (process for changes other than the final change in the time saving state) is configured to be executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to determine that the variation before the time saving ends is completed (executed), the time saving before end change flag 223n is set, but in addition to that, for example , Provide a configuration that can hold and store the winning prize information of the second special symbol, configure to execute prefetch processing (see FIG. 44) also for the held and stored winning prize information, and show the result of the prefetch processing It is constructed so as to receive a winning command, and based on the received winning command, it is configured to discriminate in advance the winning information of the second special symbol for winning a small hit. Then, based on the result of the preliminary determination, when the variation before the special symbol variation in which the small hit winning that the end condition of the time saving state is established is performed is performed, the time saving before end variation flag 223n is turned on. configuration can be added. Thus, in a gaming machine having a plurality of time saving end conditions, it is possible to reliably determine the special symbol variation immediately before the time saving end condition is established.

The state effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lotteries used when setting the effect mode of various effects executed by the sound lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 It is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. The state effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. A detailed configuration is omitted because it is the same as the effect counter 223e described above. The value of the state effect counter 223o is referred to when selecting the state display mode using the state display selection table 222b and final state display selection table 222c (see FIG. 63).

In this way, in the case of selecting a specific display mode according to specific regularity (results of determination of suitability, setting status of various flags), selection is made based on a randomly updated value (value of the state effect counter 223o). By configuring so as to further classify the display mode to be displayed in detail, along with diversification of the display mode, the current game state by the selected display mode (the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81) It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping (the update status of the time saving state).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 56) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (during the normal state), the left-handed game is performed and the special 1 game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 is executed. be done. Here, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of the jackpot won.

Specifically, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. It is configured to later shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and if a big win is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the big win is completed. It consists of This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not enter a ball into the second ball entrance 640 even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state (during a normal game). (difficult to do), the act of executing the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state is regarded as cheating, and the player who committed the cheating is not allowed to play an advantageous game. This is a measure for As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery (game) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol can be performed in the time saving state. Therefore, there is a risk that the second special symbol lottery may be conducted by cheating. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to suppress the lottery for the second special symbol from being performed due to fraud.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since it does not have a configuration to hold and store the winning information of the second special symbol (winning information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640), for example, time saving During the state (during the state where the electric accessory 640a is likely to be moved to the projecting position), the winning information of the second special symbol is retained and stored, and based on the retained and stored winning information, the second special symbol is drawn during the normal state. (variation) is never executed. As a result, when a normal game is played, it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the opening operation (projection operation) of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the second ball entrance 640. Since it becomes possible to make it possible, a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 is performed.

Here, if a small win is won by the second special symbol lottery, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small winning game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (the ball passes through a specific area), a jackpot game is started. In this embodiment, when a big winning game is set (executed) via a small winning game, after the big winning game ends, a time saving state is set as the gaming state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the big win via the small winning game from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this embodiment, by the lottery of the second special symbol, depending on the small hit type (small hit A to C) set when winning the small hit, the ball can pass through the specific area during the small hit game. It is configured to execute small winning games with different characteristics (possibility of V switch 650e3 detecting a ball).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol (first special symbol or second 2 special design) The number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) reaches the specified number of fluctuations (100 times) The end condition of the number of fluctuations (1st time reduction end condition) and the lottery of special symbols (2nd special design) As a result, the operation count end condition (second time reduction end condition) that is established when the number of times of winning a small win (the number of times of operation of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small win) reaches the specified number of operations , is set.

In addition, although details will be described later, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small winning type (small winning game to be executed) set when winning a small winning. there is

Then, in the state (situation) where the time saving state is set, before the first time saving end condition or the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the special symbol jackpot lottery is elected (per type Winning), or win a small win in a lottery of special patterns, and pass the ball through a specific area during a small winning game according to the winning small win (small winning game according to the small winning type) to win a big win. When acquired (acquired per 2 types), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of special symbol fluctuations) or the second before acquiring one type or two types When any of the time-saving end conditions (end condition corresponding to small winning (operation of V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the game state is shifted (set) from the time-saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way has the possibility of terminating the time saving state ( It is possible to provide the player with both the possibility that the second time-saving end condition is satisfied) and the possibility of obtaining two types of wins. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game (lottery for the second special symbol) to be executed during the time saving state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the time saving state is set and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state, that is, the state in which the left-handed game is performed, the number of reserved balls (number of reserved memories) of the first special symbol is the upper limit. A jackpot is won when the number is four (4), and a jackpot is won in ``first special symbol variation (lottery) during the time saving state'' that can be executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Even so, it is possible to suppress providing the player with a result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30, the flow during the small winning game of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 29(a) to (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small winning game. As shown in FIGS. 29(a) to (f), when the small winning game is executed by the control processing of the main control device 110, the small winning game effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. is executed. Then, when t1 (1 second) elapses after the start of the small winning game, the V winning opening solenoid is driven according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 27). In addition, the channel solenoid 650k is always set to OFF, and the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down to the special discharge channel 650e2. The ball flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3, and the V switch 650e3 is activated for 17 seconds (V effective period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small winning game. By detecting the ball, a big win game is executed after the end of the small win game, and when an opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the start of the big win game, the first round round game is started and the specific winning opening 65 is opened. be released.

Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to cause the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the small winning game only by executing the right-handed game normally, and to cause the V switch 650e3 to detect the ball. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is configured to end when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed once, the game can be played without any inconvenience. can be done. In addition, since it is configured so that the time saving state ends when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed once, for example, the type of small hit won in the lottery of the second special symbol is identified, and the player When winning a small win (for example, a small win whose kind of small win is C), the game aiming at the drawing of the next second special symbol is prevented without winning the ball to the V winning device 650.例文帳に追加can do.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 36. FIG. FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the command pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 64).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . FIG. 32 shows a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 ("o" and "x" are displayed on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 32(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is determined, and if it is a "big hit with special symbols", the image shown in FIG. 32(b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "no special symbols", FIG. 32(c) is displayed. is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. 32(b) and 32(c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 33, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 33A and 33B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 33(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 33, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "Beach Stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(b), for the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, an image between position a and position b is resident. It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 33(a) to 33(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 31). As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b′ and b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third symbol display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is jackpots A to D. In either case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the short period of time of the normal design by informing the short period of time of the normal design in the ending performance. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, so the chances of the lottery of the normal pattern are increased, and the normal pattern wins. more opportunities. As a result, there are more chances for the electric accessory to be released as a jackpot of normal symbols, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the special symbols can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a jackpot of the normal symbol, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back surface is to display either back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface different from back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 35). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 35).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 (see S4005 in FIG. 64). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4305 in FIG. 66(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 66(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66B) and the simple display setting process (see S4308 in FIG. 66(b) S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6301 in FIG. 79A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 79(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 36) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of image is completed (FIG. 66(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S6005 in FIG. 78) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 36), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6007 in FIG. 76). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6513 in FIG. 80). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S6514 in FIG. 80). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 66B) is executed (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 37 to 53. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the update of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 is executed (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum When the values (999, 99, 99, 239 and 99 respectively in this embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is accompanied by the passage of the ball. Through gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the V entrance passing process accompanying the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process accompanying the winning to the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S109). Details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S110), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b to display the special symbol (first symbol) and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot includes a period during which the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). A period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), a period during the jackpot game (round game period), and a round game period are completed, and then a lottery (fluctuation) of new special symbols is started. and a grace period (ending period).

Here, in order to determine whether or not the current jackpot is in progress, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203d is set to ON. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (the flag 203d of the middle of the jackpot is set to ON) (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If it is not during the special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203d is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S201: No), the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are displayed. It is determined whether or not the display mode is fluctuating (S202). It is determined whether or not the ball has entered (S203).

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203: Yes), that is, when neither the special symbol jackpot nor the special symbol fluctuation is occurring, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. When is entered, that is, when the second special symbol variation (lottery) start condition is satisfied, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5 are stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (S204).

Next, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S210), and this process is terminated. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S203, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (S205). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (S206). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S206: No), the reserved ball of the first special symbol to start the variation (lottery) at the present time is secured. Since there is no state, this process for executing the special symbol variation is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not 0 (S206: Yes), that is, even if the reserved ball of the first special symbol to start the variation (lottery) is secured. For example, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted (S207), and the reserved ball number command (special figure 1 Hold ball number command) is set (S208). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S202: Yes), has the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b passed? It is determined whether or not (S211). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the variation time has not elapsed (S211: No), that is, if the current time is during the variation period of the special symbol, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S211, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S211: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set. (S212). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S210), which will be described later with reference to FIG. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the stop display set in the process of S212 is configured to be displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). In this way, by continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stop pattern for a predetermined period, unlike the case where the changing pattern is displayed momentarily, the first display is surely stop-displayed to the player. The contents of the design can be recognized.

In the present embodiment, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (determined period) for displaying the stop mode of the first symbol described above, but other configurations may be used. In the case of blinking display that repeats the lighting state and the erased state to indicate that it is changing, it is longer than one lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) when performing the blinking display. The period may be set as the fixed period described above. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first symbol is fluctuating or stopped (determined).

After the process of S212 is completed, when the special symbol variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the special symbol variation start process (see S210 in FIG. 39) is executed. It is determined whether or not the symbol lottery result (this determination result) is a special symbol jackpot (S213). When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S213: Yes), based on the jackpot type (jackpot type set when the jackpot is won), a specific prize opening (variable prize winning device) 65 is set (S214), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S215). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot middle flag 203d are set to ON (S216), the time saving counter 203k is set to 0 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and the process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, as described in the process of S217, when the special symbol jackpot is won, after the special symbol variation ends (the first symbol is confirmed and displayed), the jackpot It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing until the game is started. In addition, the timing of ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the above-described embodiment, the special symbol (first symbol) In addition to the confirmation display, for example, the time saving state may be ended at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special pattern that was won in the jackpot, or at the timing when the special pattern is stopped and displayed (the timing when the confirmation display starts). You may exit the state. In addition, the time saving state may be ended at the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or after a predetermined period of time after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the round game start timing at which the variable winning device 65 is opened). Then, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, the end timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (timing to satisfy the time saving end condition that is established when the special symbol jackpot is won) is selected from the above-mentioned multiple timings. Only one may be set in advance, or the time saving state may be terminated at different timings according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the time saving state is ended at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving state ends for the player (for example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is the specified number of times ( It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the normal state is set after reaching 100 times or the time saving state is ended by winning a jackpot during the time saving state. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the content of the performance display (variation display) of the third pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state ends, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied for each of the multiple jackpot types (the timing at which the time-saving state ends when the jackpot is won), a special pattern based on the end timing of the time-saving state It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result (determination result). In addition, if the player identifies the timing when the time saving state ends in part of the timing when the time saving end condition set for each of the multiple jackpot types is satisfied, the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special symbol will be A timing for notifying a player of a big win, that is, a time-saving end timing dedicated to a big win at which a time-saving state ends only when a time-saving end condition established by winning a big win is established may be provided.

By configuring in this way, by grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends, it is possible to quickly know that the jackpot has been won, and the period of being immersed in a sense of superiority can be lengthened. In addition, in order to achieve such an effect more, the time saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot is set in the first half period of the variation period from the execution of the special symbol variation to the end of the special symbol variation. Good to configure.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S213: No), the time saving number update process for updating the number of time saving times is executed (S219), and then the lottery result of this time is a small win (S220). In addition, the detailed description of the time saving number update process (S219) described above will be described later with reference to FIG. A process of updating information on the condition for ending the number of times of variation that can be satisfied based on the number of lotteries) is executed.

In the process of S220, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S220: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S221), the process of S218 described above is executed, and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S220, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S220: No), skip the small hit start setting processing (S221), execute the processing of S218, and execute this processing. finish.

As described above, in the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38) of the present embodiment, the second It is configured to determine whether or not a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) condition is established (processing of S203 in FIG. 38). This is because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol that is advantageous to the player, does not have a holding storage means for holding and storing the winning information, and is variable when the time-saving state is set as the game state (variation easy), and when the normal state is set, the second special symbol that is unvariable (difficult to vary) is configured to be a special symbol that is more difficult to execute the variation (lottery) than the first special symbol. This is because

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, should the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol be set at the same time (timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. 37) (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of reference)), the variation of the first special symbol is started in preference to the second special symbol, which is difficult to perform variation (lottery) As a result, the player feels uncomfortable. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol. ), the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol are simultaneous (timer interrupt processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 37) Including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period), if the variation (lottery) is difficult to execute, the first special symbol will be prioritized over the second special symbol. There was a problem that it gave an unpleasant feeling.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when executing the process of starting the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value added to the player is high (the winning probability of the small hit is the first special symbol Since it is configured to preferentially (first) the lottery (variation) condition of the special symbol (second special symbol in this embodiment), which is higher than the actual lottery (variation) is difficult to execute) , the occurrence of the above-described problems can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a process for updating the number of times of time saving, after executing a process (time saving number update process (S219)) related to the end condition of the number of fluctuations that is established according to the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol, a small hit is won It is configured to execute a process (small hit start setting process (S221)) related to the end condition for the number of times of winning that is established according to. By configuring in this way, when a lottery result is obtained in which the condition for ending the number of fluctuations and the condition for ending the winning number of times are established in one fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbols, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations comes first. , and the time saving state ends based on the fact that the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied.

In this way, by configuring to determine whether or not each time saving end condition is satisfied in a predetermined order for the time saving end conditions that are set multiple times, a plurality of time saving end conditions have the same special pattern variation ( The time saving state can be ended regularly even if it can be reached in the lottery).

In addition, for example, if the above-described configuration is satisfied, the time saving state is ended after the special symbol (first symbol) is confirmed and displayed, and if the winning number end condition is satisfied, the small By using the pachinko machine 10 configured to end the time saving state after the end of a winning game, the end timing of the time saving state can be varied according to the established time saving end condition.

Specifically, for example, when a small win B is won and the condition for ending the number of wins is satisfied alone, the time saving state ends after the small win game corresponding to the small win B ends. On the other hand, if a small winning B is won in a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) in which the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation number ending condition is preferentially established, and the small winning game corresponding to the small winning B starts. The time saving state is ended before the special symbol lottery result (small hit B) is determined and displayed.

In the above-described example, in the state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state, even if the time saving state ends based on the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol won in the small hit B, the time saving end established Depending on the conditions, the timing of ending the time saving state (whether or not there is time saving during the small winning game) can be variably set, so the length of the period advantageous to the player is established. can be different. Thereby, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is advantageous to the player and a time-saving end condition that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new game property in which the player expects the establishment of the time-saving condition, which is as advantageous as possible, in addition to the game in which the time-saving end condition is not established.

In addition, for a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, for example, even during a small winning game, when the electric accessory 640a performs an opening operation (long opening), a ball can be entered (easy). A second ball entrance 640 is provided above a specific winning opening (V winning device 650) opened in a small winning game so that a ball can enter the ball entrance 640). It is preferable that a game in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 is performed.

Furthermore, the period of the small winning game (the period during which the V winning device 650 is open (1.8S) and the period during which it is closed) is long (for example, 60 seconds). The number of prize balls (for example, 5) provided to the player when winning the V prize device 650 is greater than the number of prize balls (for example, 5) provided to the player when the ball enters the second ball entrance. By configuring so that the number of prize balls (for example, 3) is smaller, the game result (the number of balls acquired by the game) can be greatly changed depending on the presence or absence of the time saving state during the small winning game. . In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, by providing the technique of varying the time-saving end timing as described above, it is possible to provide the player with more interesting games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special symbol variation start process (S210) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S210). This special symbol variation start process (S210) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol big win", "special symbol small win" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37a. , 37b and the third pattern display device 81 to determine the effect pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable effect.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small per type are stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each value of the counter C5 is acquired (S301). Next, based on the first random number table 202a (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (first special symbol or second special symbol), the lottery result (S302). Specifically, in the case of lottery for the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 22(b)) The random numbers stored in are compared to determine whether or not it is a big hit, and if the lottery for the second special symbol is based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the value of the first winning random number counter C1. And the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 22(c)) is compared to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S303). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S303: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first win type selection table 202b corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S304). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 and the random value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 are compared. , 4 types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to D), the type of jackpot is determined (see FIG. 23(b) or (c)).

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same discrimination value for judging a big hit, but not limited to this, different random numbers may be used. By configuring in this way, since the random number determined to be lost in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, fraudulent games aiming at the same random number are performed. Even if this is the case, it is possible to suppress the execution of a biased jackpot.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers determined to be a big hit is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited to this, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random numbers determined to be a jackpot may be set differently. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of the big win corresponding to the special symbol type (special symbol type) and the big win type is set (S305). In the processing of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A to D). Also, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types, the jackpot types (jackpots A to D) are set as the stop types.

Thereafter, a big hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S306), and the process proceeds to S314. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. Specifically, the obtained special symbol type, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2. to determine the variation time of the pattern variation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24).

In the processing of S314, a variation pattern command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S306 (S314). Next, a stop type command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S305 (S315). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) described later, the sound lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S315 ends, this processing ends and returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, in the process of S303, if the lottery result is not a big win (S303: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small win (S307). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S307: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table 202f (S308). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the small hit type selection table 202f, and three types of special symbols (small hit A to C), it determines what the small hit type is (see FIG. 22).

Next, a display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S309). Thereafter, a small winning variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at a small winning symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result and the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24).

Next, the small hit type acquired in the process of S308 is stored in the small hit type storage area 203e (S311), and then the processes of S314 and S315 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). . In addition, in the present embodiment, only the second special symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit, so there is no need to refer to the special symbol type in S308 and S309. However, for example, if it is configured to win a small hit even in the first special symbol lottery, in the processing of S308 and S309, the special symbol type is also referred to acquire the small winning type, and the small winning type is obtained at the time of the small winning. It may be configured so as to set the display mode.

In addition, in the processing of S314 and S315 in this case, the command corresponding to the variation pattern (see S310) and the stop type (see S309) set when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is set.

When it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), the display mode at the time of loss corresponding to the type of special symbol is set (S312). After that, based on the number of held balls, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S313). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result and the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24). Next, the processing of S314 and S315 described above is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38).

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the small winning start setting process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S221). This small hit start setting process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), small hit type (small hit A to C) Based on, the start of the small winning game is set, and processing for updating the time saving information according to the winning small winning (update processing for the winning number end condition) is executed.

Here, when a small winning game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 moves to a specific area (V By passing the winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big winning game is executed (set) after the small winning game is completed.

That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, different small winning games are configured to be executed corresponding to the small winning types (small winning A to C) set when winning the small winning. , Possibility of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning game is different according to each small winning type.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the possibility (expectation) of executing (setting) the big winning game (per two types) by the small winning game to be executed, so that the small winning game for the player Since it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the player wins the prize, but also in the type of the small prize won, the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the small winning start setting process (S221) is executed, first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small winning type is set (S401). After that, a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passage big hit type storage area 203h (S402). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202f, the V passing big hit type (jackpot game set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game) is determined. do. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit A (15 rounds with a short time), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit B (5 rounds with a short time). If it is determined and the small hit type is C, it is determined that it is a big hit A (5 rounds with short time) (see FIG. 22). That is, in the present embodiment, the content of the jackpot game (per two types) that is set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small win game, and the jackpot (per type) by lottery of special symbols ), so that the same jackpot game as the jackpot game that is executed when winning is won, when winning two types (when the ball passes through a specific area), it is set for one type. It is configured to be set according to the type of the executed small hit type (jackpot A or B).

In this way, when two types of winning are obtained, a jackpot type is set, and a process of starting a jackpot game based on the set jackpot type is executed, thereby winning one type and two types. The processing related to the jackpot game can be shared between the case of winning and the processing, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, it may be possible to set a jackpot game that can be executed only when one type is won or only when two types are won, or one type. It may be configured to execute different jackpot game processing for winning and two types of winning.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description is continued. When the processing of S402 is finished, the start of the small hit is then set based on the small hit type (S403), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit medium flag 203g are set to ON (S404). After that, a small winning time saving update process is executed (S405), and the process ends. This small winning time saving update process (S405) is a process for updating the time saving information corresponding to the winning number end condition which is the ending condition of the time saving state that can be established when winning a small win, and updating the time saving information. When the condition for ending the number of wins is satisfied by doing so, the processing for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the small winning time saving update process (S405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning time saving update process (S405). This small hit time saving update process (S405) is a process executed in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). It is a process for updating the time saving information based on the winning small hit, and updating the game state from the time saving state to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the small winning time saving update process (S405), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is greater than 0 (S501). That is, it is determined whether the current state is the time saving state. In the process of S501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S501: No), since it is a state in which a small hit is won in a game state other than the time saving state, All this processing is skipped in order to update time saving information, and this processing is ended. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so as not to win a small hit (so that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is not executed) except in the state where the time saving state is set, S501 When it is determined that the time saving state is not set in the process of , an error command for executing error notification (abnormality notification) may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when the value of the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the time saving state is set (S501: Yes), the small hit that was elected this time It is determined whether the small hit type is "small hit A" (S502). Here, in the process of S502, in the process of S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203e is read out and the determination is performed.

In the processing of S502, if it is determined that the current small hit type is "small hit A" (S502: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit A counter 203m (S503), and the small hit A after subtraction It is determined whether the value of the counter 203m is 0 (S504), and if it is determined to be 0 (S504: Yes), the time-saving end condition (the winning number of times end condition corresponding to the small win A ) is established, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k, which measures the period until the condition for ending the number of times of variation is established, is set to 0 (S505), and the value for ending conditions for ending the number of winnings is set to 0. Each value of the winning A counter 203m, the small winning B counter 203n, and the small winning C counter 203p is set to 0 (S506), and the normal state is set as the game state (S507).

By executing the processing of S505 to S507 described above, when one time saving end condition is satisfied among the time saving end conditions that are set in plural, for measuring the period until the other time saving end condition is satisfied Since the value of the counter can be set to a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied, after the time saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the game state), the time saving information is updated. Processing (processing for updating the values of the small winning A counter 203m, the small winning B counter 203n, the small winning C counter 203p, and the time saving medium counter 203k) can be reliably prevented from being executed. Therefore, execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed, and the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is met, the values of various counters for updating the time saving information corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving end conditions are set to 0 ( value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied), after the time saving state ends, it is possible to determine which time saving end condition was satisfied and the previous time saving state ended. However, for example, a storage means capable of storing the satisfied time saving end conditions may be provided so that the types of the time saving end conditions met in the past and the number of times the conditions have been met can be determined.

By configuring in this way, for example, the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established is determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of establishments, and the player is established based on the determined content. It can be configured to suggest (notify) an easy time-saving end condition. Furthermore, when the time saving end condition of 1 is satisfied, the update status of time saving information corresponding to other time saving end conditions (for example, when the value of the time saving medium counter 203k becomes 0, the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B Each value of the counter 203n and the small winning C counter 203p) can be stored, and the time-saving end condition that is the most difficult to be satisfied, that is, when one time-saving end condition is satisfied among a plurality of time-saving end conditions, it is the largest. You may comprise so that the time saving end conditions which have the time saving information of a value may be discriminate|determined.

When the processing of S507 is completed, next, a remaining time reduction command corresponding to the value of each small hit counter that has been subtracted is set (S508), a state command indicating the current game state is set (S509), and this processing is performed. exit. Here, the commands set in S508 and S509 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) described later, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . The voice lamp control device 113 manages the time saving information based on the received remaining time saving command, and sets the state display mode for suggesting (notifying) the time saving situation (period until the time saving state ends). Also, the current game state is grasped based on the received state command.

On the other hand, in the process of S504, if it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203m is not 0 (S504: No), since the time saving state does not end due to the small hit winning this time, S505 for ending the time saving state ∼ Skip the processing of S507 and proceed to the processing of S508.

Returning to the processing of S502 described above, the description continues. In the process of S502, when it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit A" ("small hit B" or "small hit C") (S502: No), the following Then, it is determined whether the small hit type of the small hit won this time is "small hit B" (S510), and if it is determined to be "small hit B" (S510: Yes), the small hit B counter 203n is subtracted by 1 (S511), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the small hit B counter 203n is 0 (S512).

In the process of S512, if it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n is 0 (S512: Yes), the time-saving end condition (winning times end condition corresponding to the small win B) is established in this small win election. Since it is the case where it did, it transfers to the process of S505 mentioned above, and performs the process for ending a time saving state.

On the other hand, in the process of S512, if it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n is not 0 (1 or more) (S512: No), the time saving state does not end by this small hit winning, so the time saving state The process of S505 to S507 for ending is skipped and the process proceeds to S508.

In the process of S510, when the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit B", that is, when it is determined that it is "small hit C" (S510: No), the value of the small hit C counter 223p is subtracted by 1 (S513), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit C counter 223p after the subtraction is 0 (S514).

In the process of S514, if it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 223p is 0 (S514: Yes), the time-saving end condition (winning number of times end condition corresponding to the small win C) is established in this small win election. Therefore, S515 to S517 are executed to execute the same processing as S505 to S507 described above, and the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, in the process of S514, if it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203p is not 0 (1 or more) (S514: No), the time saving state does not end due to this small hit winning, so time saving The process of S515 to S517 for ending the state is skipped and the process proceeds to S508.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol won in the small hit has passed, the value of the counter corresponding to the small win is subtracted, and the time saving end established based on the small win It is configured to determine whether or not a condition (condition for ending the number of wins) is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to terminate the time saving state according to the winning times termination condition before the small winning game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a large difference in the timing of ending the time saving state even when any of the time saving end conditions of the fluctuation frequency end condition and the winning number end condition are established.

Specifically, in the first embodiment, when the fluctuation number end condition, that is, the time reduction end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied, the final display of the special symbol (first symbol) The time-saving state is terminated at the timing of termination, and when the winning times end condition, ie, the time-saving end condition established based on the number of winning times of winning a small prize in the lottery of special symbols, is established, the special symbols. After the confirmation display of (first symbol), the time saving state is ended at the start setting timing of the small winning game.

In other words, even if any of the time saving termination conditions are established, the time saving state is terminated immediately after the fluctuation of the corresponding special symbol is stopped. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time saving end condition has been established and the time saving state set this time has ended. In addition, in order for the player to determine whether or not the time saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. , For example, by setting to end the time saving state at the time of small hit start setting (just before the small hitting game is started) as in the present embodiment, the time saving state immediately after the small hitting game is started It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the process has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if any of the end conditions of the variable number of times end condition and the winning number of times end condition is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, substantially the same timing (a degree that the player can hardly distinguish) Concept including time difference) is configured to terminate the time saving state, but other configurations may be used. The time saving state may be ended immediately after the display, and when the conditions for ending the number of times of winning are established, the time saving state may be ended after the small winning game executed after the special pattern (first pattern) is confirmed and displayed. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the time-saving state during the period in which the small winning game is being executed.

Therefore, during the small winning game, the player cannot determine whether the time saving state has ended due to the winning of this small winning game, and until the small winning game ends (whether or not the two types of winning Until the game result is notified), it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the time saving state has ended. Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property in which two types of wins can be obtained during the small winning game, the player is notified whether or not the time saving state has ended after the small winning game ends. Is it based on the small winning that this small winning game ends the time saving state? Since the game is played while predicting that, it is possible to always aim for two kinds of wins willingly in the small win game executed during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the time reduction frequency update process (S219) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the time saving frequency update process (S219). This time saving number update process (S219) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), updates the time saving number, and changes the game state to the normal state. This is a process for setting to

In the time saving frequency update process (S219), first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203k during time saving is greater than 0, that is, whether the present time is during time saving (S601). In the process of S601, when the value of the counter 203k during time saving is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not during time saving (S601: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the time saving is in progress (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the process proceeds to S603. do.

In the process of S603, the number command of remaining time reduction which shows the value of the counter 203k in time reduction changed by calculation (1 subtraction was carried out) is set (S603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing described later (see FIG. 113.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S605), and the small winning A counter 203m, the small winning B counter 203n and the small winning C counter 203p is set to 0 (S606). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S607), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the time saving end condition (change number end condition) established based on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is satisfied is determined by the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42), Whether or not the time-saving end condition (winning times end condition) established based on the number of winning times of special symbol winning is configured to be determined by the time-saving update process for small wins (see FIG. 41). . Then, in any process, if one of the multiple set time-saving end conditions is met, the values of various counters for indicating the update status of time-saving information corresponding to the other time-saving end conditions It is configured to be set to a value (0) for indicating a state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when any time saving end condition is satisfied, it is possible to unify the processing contents for ending the time saving state.

In this embodiment, in order to indicate the update status of the time saving information corresponding to each time saving end condition, set a value indicating each time saving end condition to various counters at the timing when the time saving state is set, and each time saving end When the time saving information corresponding to the condition is determined, the value of various counters is subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied. In addition, when the time saving state is set, the value of various counters is set to 0, and when the corresponding time saving information is determined, the value of the counter is added by 1, and the value of the counter after addition is the time saving end condition You may comprise so that a time saving state may be complete|finished, when it discriminate|determines that it is a value which shows. In other words, means for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established, and in the state where the time-saving state is set, time-saving information corresponding to various time-saving end conditions (the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of small winnings, etc.) is updated. It is sufficient if the configuration is provided with updating means.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, among the time-saving end conditions, as the end condition of the number of winnings, the end condition that is established when the number of times of each small hit type reaches a predetermined number is used, but in addition to this, for example , The total number of times each small hit type is set, that is, the winning number end condition may be set corresponding to the total number of small hits won during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set. A winning number end condition may be set which is established when the number of times the winning B is set and the number of times the small winning C is set reaches a predetermined number of times.

In this case, the winning number of times that the winning number of times end condition corresponding to only the small win B is satisfied (the number of times of winning B ending (for example, 3 times)) and the winning number of times that the winning number of times ending condition corresponding to only the small win C is satisfied ( For the small hit C end count (for example, 5 times)), the above-mentioned total number of times should be less than the sum of the small hit B end count and the small hit C end count. It is preferable to set the number of hits C to be less than a large value (5 times in the case of this example). As a result, it is not possible to predict the end timing of the time-saving state unless the time-saving situation is comprehended for the small hit type that is set when a small hit is won during the time-saving state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of .

Next, the starting winning process (S105) will be described. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether or not there is a win (start winning, ball winning) to the first winning hole (first ball hole) 64. If it is determined that a prize has been won, that is, if a ball is detected by a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), various random number counters are activated. , and execute the pending process for that value.

When the start winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first winning hole (first ball entry hole) 64 (start winning, ball entering) (S701). . Here, a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 determines whether or not the state in which the ball has been detected continues over three timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed. is determined to determine whether the ball has entered the first winning hole (first ball-entering hole) 64 (entering the ball). In this way, it is determined that the ball has won a prize only when it is determined that the ball has been continuously detected for a predetermined period of time (a period during which the timer interrupt processing is executed three times (4 milliseconds)). For example, even if the small amount of electricity generated by the flow of the ball becomes noise and the sensor (entering ball detection switch) momentarily turns on (detects the passage of the ball), that An event caused by noise (instantaneous turn-on) and an event caused by the passage of the ball (turned on for a predetermined period of time) can be distinguished and processed.

When the ball is detected continuously for a predetermined period of time and the control is used to determine that the ball has entered the ball, as described above, if the period during which it is determined that the ball has been detected is less than the predetermined period ( In addition to instantaneous detection due to noise), it is preferable to determine that an abnormality has occurred even when an upper limit period longer than a predetermined period is exceeded, and not to determine that the ball has won a prize (winning a ball). As a result, even if noise is generated for a long period of time due to an unauthorized operation, it is possible to prevent the winning of a ball (ball winning) from being erroneously activated.

Then, when it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

In the process of S703, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (3 or less) (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 is added to the value (N1) of the 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (S704), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b changed by the calculation is set (S705).

The reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 51) described later. In the external output process (S1501), it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball count command by the process of S705, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the Each value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Then, in the processing of S707, prefetch processing is executed (S707). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning (entering a ball) into the first winning hole (entering ball) 64 (S701: No), or winning (entering a ball) into the first winning hole (entering ball) 64 Even if it is determined that there is (S701: Yes), if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not less than 4 (is 4) (S703: No), S707 Go to pre-reading processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the winning information of the first special symbol (the right to execute the lottery) is configured so that it can be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number (4), and the winning information of the second special symbol is stored. Although it is structured so that it cannot be stored in a reserved manner, it is also possible to use a structure in which both the winning information of the first special symbol and the winning information of the second special symbol can be retained and stored up to a predetermined number as the upper limit. In this case, the process described above with reference to FIG. 43 may be configured to be executed also for the winning information of the second special symbol (second winning opening (ball opening) 640).

Also, when using a configuration in which the winning information can be retained and stored for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the upper limit number of the winning information for each special symbol that can be retained and stored is unified (for example, 4). Alternatively, a different value may be set as the upper limit number (eg, 4 for the first special symbol and 2 for the second special symbol). Further, it is configured to set an upper limit number that can be reserved and stored with respect to the sum of the number of reserved balls (number of reserved memories) of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls (number of reserved memories) of the second special symbols. can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the look-ahead process (S707), which is one process in the starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S707).

In this look-ahead processing (S707 in FIG. 44), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (ball winning) in the first winning hole (ball winning hole) 64 (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that there is no new winning at the first ball entrance 64 (S801: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that a new prize has been won in the first winning hole (entering ball hole) 64 (S801: Yes), a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, a special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and a variation pattern table 202d Based on (normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 or time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2), the lottery result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern are acquired in advance (S802).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern obtained in the process of S802 is set (S803), and the process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it executes the winning information related processing (see FIG. 57) described later, sets the display mode of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81, Perform processing to update the progress of the time saving state in advance (temporarily). Then, the winning information included in the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal design variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), the variation display and variation time of the second design performed in the second design display device 83, the second entrance 640 This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the accompanying electric accessory 640a.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S901). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the normal design (second design) is hit (S901: Yes), it is in a state where it is not possible to start (execute) a new normal design variation (lottery). End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S901: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (normal symbol fluctuating). When it is determined (S902) that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not fluctuating (normal symbol fluctuating) (S902: No), that is, even if the current normal symbol is hit, the normal symbol fluctuates. Among them, if it is determined that there is no state, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery), the second per random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area. (S903).

In the processing of S903, if it is determined that the second winning random number counter is not stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area, that is, if it is determined that there is no normal symbol winning information to be newly executed. (S903: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area (S903: Yes), the stored value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained (S904). .

Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S904 and the normal symbol (second) winning random number table 202c, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S905). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S905 is a hit of the normal symbol (S906), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol (S906: Yes), at the time of hit is set (S907), and the process proceeds to S909. In the process of S907, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S906, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S906: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S908), and the process proceeds to S909. In the process of S908, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the setting is made so that the "x" symbol is illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S909.

When the processing of S907 or S908 ends, in the processing of S909, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S909). S909: Yes), set the fluctuation time of the normal pattern in the second pattern display device 83 to 3 seconds (S910), then set the normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203q to ON (S911), and finish this process. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (it is in the normal state) (S909: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S912), this process is terminated.

It should be noted that the normal pattern short variation flag 202q set to ON in the process of S911 is a configuration for temporarily storing whether or not the game state at the timing when the normal pattern lottery is executed is a time saving state. Then, the variation of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and is referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Thereby, it is possible to vary the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state of the start timing of the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols and the timing of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

In this embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of normal pattern variation (lottery) is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is winning, the game state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is stored in the game condition storage means capable of always storing the currently set game condition. A storage area may be provided for temporary storage. Further, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) and the timing at which the lottery of the normal symbols is performed are stored. By comparing, it may be configured such that the game state at the timing when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed can be determined. In other words, it is only necessary to provide a storage means capable of storing the currently set game state and a storage means capable of storing at least the game state set at a predetermined timing in the past.

On the other hand, in the processing of S902, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S902: Yes), the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S913). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S910 or the process of S911 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S913, if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S913: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S913, if it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S913: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S914). In the process of S914, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S907, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S908, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to The period during which the second symbol is statically displayed is longer than the period during which one portion of the blinking display (alternating display of "○" and "X") indicating that the second symbol is being changed is illuminated. It is configured to be (determined display). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the second symbol has been stop-displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S914, when the second symbol display update process (S1508 in FIG. 51) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed next, the change in the second symbol display device 83 After the display is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S907 or S908.

When the processing of S914 is finished, next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (this time The lottery result of (S915) determines whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol. When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S915: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a winning pattern (S915: Yes), it is then determined whether the normal pattern short variation flag 203q is set to ON (S916).

In the process of S916, if it is determined that the normal short pattern fluctuation flag 203q is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the game state at the timing when the normal pattern lottery (variation) of this time is started If it is determined that the state is normal (S916: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S921), and the process proceeds to S920. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S916, if it is determined that the normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON, that is, the game state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal pattern is started is determined to be a time saving state. If so (S916: Yes), the normal figure short variation flag 203q is set to OFF (S917), and then it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state (in time saving) (S918).

In the processing of S918, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S918: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal symbol is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1. times (S921), and the process proceeds to S920.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state (S918: Yes), the timing of starting the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal symbol, and the current game state (opening operation of the electric accessory 640a ) are both in a time-saving state, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times (electric accessory 640a is set) (S919), and the process proceeds to S920.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, are set are different. Only when both are in the time-saving state, it is configured to set the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player. Variation) is executed and winning is won, and even if the time saving state is set until the variation time (30 seconds) of the normal symbol ends, long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 640a. there is nothing In addition, similarly, in the variation (lottery) of the normal pattern executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the winning is won, and the normal state is set as the game state until the variation of the normal pattern stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 640a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous benefit (long release of the electric accessory 640a).

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the long opening of the electric accessory 640a when the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery for the special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is likely to be executed. The duration can be limited during the time saving state. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (fluctuation) of the normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set are determined, and the game state set at each timing is determined. Although the configuration described above is used as the configuration for setting the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a based on the above, other configurations may be used.

For example, only when the timing at which the lottery (fluctuation) of normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening action of the electric accessory 640a is set are in the normal state, the opening action is disadvantageous to the player (S921 in FIG. 45). 45) is set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S919 of FIG. 45) is set in other states. By configuring in this way, a privilege (long open) advantageous to the player is provided even for the normal symbol fluctuation executed in the period before and after the time saving state which is the game state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the time-saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

Thus, while the time-saving state is set as the game state, compared with the case where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes very short as "30 seconds→3 seconds", and furthermore, , the release period of the second prize winning port 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is terminated, so that the normal state is set during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small winning game is executed, it is configured so that the time saving state is set continuously unless the time saving end condition is satisfied. During the winning game, the V winning device 650 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time, and the ball is sent to a plurality of winning openings (V winning opening 650a, second ball opening 640). It becomes a specific period when it is easy to enter the ball.

Using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. It is preferable to configure the ball to enter two winning holes (V winning device 650a, second ball entering hole 640), thereby increasing the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small winning game. , it becomes possible to provide a privilege more advantageous to the player.

Returning to FIG. 45, the description continues. In the process of S920, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (S920), and the process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S920, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1506) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S921 or the processing of S919 are completed.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the execution area.

In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 46, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1001). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (S101). The content of this detection is the same as the process of S701 of the above-described starting winning process (see FIG. 43), so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1001: Yes), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is normally fluctuating (S1002), When it is determined that the display mode of the 2-symbol display device 83 is in the process of normal symbol fluctuation (S1002: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, if it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not in normal symbol fluctuation (S1002: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is currently hitting ( S1003). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the process of winning (S1003: Yes), this processing is finished as it is. When it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the process of winning (S1003: No), since it is the timing at which a new normal symbol variation (execution) can be drawn, the above timer interrupt process (S101) is updated in S103. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area (S1004). After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V entrance passage process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1101). In the process of S1101, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is not turned on (S1101: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1101, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is ON (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is open (S1102).

In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is open (S1102: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S1103), and this process ends. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the passage of the V entrance. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is not open (S1102: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is issued. Set (S1104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is turned on (S1105), and the process ends.

Next, the V passing process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the V passage processing (S109). This V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203j is ON (S1201). In the processing of S1201, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203j is ON (S1201: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the V passage flag 203j is not ON (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S1202). That is, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 or not. In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the vehicle does not pass through the V (S1202: No), the process ends.

In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that V passage is present (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is during the V passage valid period (S1203). If it is determined that it is during the V-passing valid period (S1203: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h is acquired (S1204), and the acquired V-passing jackpot type is obtained. is set to ON (S1205). Then, a V passing command is set (S1206).

Next, the V passage flag 203j is set to ON (S1207). After that, the time saving counter 203k is set to 0 (S1208), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1203, if it is determined that the V passage valid period is not in effect (S1203: No), an error command is set (S1209), and this processing ends. If the game ball passes through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 when it is not during the V passing valid period, it is considered that the ball has entered the V winning switch 650e3 illegally. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1209, an error is output and fraud can be discovered.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1301), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial settings are executed upon power-on (S1401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1403).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1404), and if it is turned on (S1404: Yes), the process proceeds to S1415. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405), and if not stored (S1405: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S1415.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1406). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1515 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1415, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1415). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1416, S1417).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1416, S1417) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1417). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1410.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1405: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1407: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1408). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1409), and shifts to the processing of S1410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S1410, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the value of the counter 203k during time saving is read (S1411), and the state command based on the read value is set (S1412). Then, the channel solenoid 209a is turned off (S1413). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1414), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1501 to S1508 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1511 and S1512 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 51), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub side during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1501). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the special figure 1 reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 39) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43). Further, by this external output processing (S1501), the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Also, the opening command (S1602), round number command (S1607), and ending command set in the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1611). In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1502). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 (S1502) is finished, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1503), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the jackpot performance is executed. Or, a jackpot control process for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S1504). . In the jackpot control process (S1504), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the corresponding winning opening ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65 It is determined whether or not a prescribed number of balls have entered the V winning port 650 a of the winning device 650 . Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, in the case of a small winning state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the small winning, corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening of V winning device 650 650a) is executed (S1505). In the small winning control process (S1505), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65 It is determined whether or not a prescribed number of balls have entered the V winning port 650 a of the winning device 650 . Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the small winning control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1506). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S920 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S919 or S921 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is executed (S1507). In the first symbol display update process (S1507), when the variation pattern is set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed in the first. It starts with the one-symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process (S1507), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) has ended, the first End the variation display being executed in the symbol display device 37a, 37b (see FIG. 2), in the display mode set by the processing of S305, S309 or S311 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 39), stop symbol (First pattern) is stopped (lighted up) on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1508). In the second symbol display update process (S1508), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S910 or the process of S911 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the second symbol display device 83 varies. Start display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S1508), when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S914 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the second symbol display device 83 The variation display being executed is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S907 or S908 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). Stop display (lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1509). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1510). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1501, and the above-described processes after S1501 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1510: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1511, S1512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1511). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and each counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1502 (S1512).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1501 to S1508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by using the remaining time to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (S1511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1509, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1509: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 49 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1513 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1513), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) and transmit (S1514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1515), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1516), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1509 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1501 to S1508, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1511 and S1512 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1501. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1501, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1501. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1504). This jackpot control processing (S1504) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 51). This is a process for opening or closing (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504), first, it is determined whether it is the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S1601). Specifically, it is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203c. This jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S216) when the jackpot start is set by the processing of S215 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38). In the process of S1601, if it is determined that it is time to start the big win (if it is determined that the big win start flag 203c is ON) (S1601: Yes), the opening command is set (S1602), then the big win start flag 203c is set to OFF (S1603), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203c is set to off) (S1601: No), next, the current jackpot is in progress. (S1604). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included, and corresponds to the period during which the above-mentioned jackpot flag 203d is set to ON. In the process of S1604, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203d is off) (S1604: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203d is set to ON) (S1604: Yes), various processes executed at a plurality of timings during the jackpot Determination processing (S1605 to S1612) is performed to determine whether it is time to execute

In the processing of S1604, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether the current timing is the start of a new round (S1605). In the process of S1605, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. In the process of S1605, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1605: Yes), based on the open scenario table 202g, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V The V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650 is opened (S1606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1607). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of lotteries) during the execution of a plurality of jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during the jackpot game) When it is executed during the period in which the time saving state is repeatedly set, the number of rounds of the jackpot game continuously executed on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 is cumulatively displayed. . That is, the sound lamp control device 113 is a period setting means for setting a period (continuous chance period) during which it is determined that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 And, when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the number of round games (number of rounds) in the previously executed jackpot game is added to the number of round games (round number), and a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated round number accumulated by the round number accumulating means are transmitted to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. and a round cumulative number display control means for displaying on. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the big win has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), then the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of variable winning device 65 or V of V winning device 650) It is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the prize winning opening 650a are satisfied (S1608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) win the winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the processing of S1608, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is established (S1608: Yes), the corresponding winning opening The opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not established (S1608: No), then It is determined whether the present is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610). The start timing of the ending production is the waiting time (in this embodiment, the opening and closing door 650f1 is closed after 15 rounds (the final round game preset in the jackpot game this time) is completed, and the ball is swept. 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. It should be noted that the start timing of this ending effect and the end timing, which will be described later, are also determined based on the release scenario (see S214 in FIG. 38) that is set when a big win is won.

In the process of S1610, if it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1610: Yes), the ending command is set (S1611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1610, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1610: No), in the process of S1612, it is determined whether it is the end time of the ending effect (S1612). In the processing of S1612, if it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect is not reached (S1612: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S1612, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), then it is determined which of the jackpots A to D is the jackpot type being executed (S1613). In the processing of this S1613, the jackpot type stored in a storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the set jackpot type is read.

Next, based on the read jackpot type, the corresponding time-saving end conditions are set using the time-saving grant table 202e (S1614). Specifically, if the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R with short time) or jackpot B (5R with short time), set 100 to short time counter 203k, 1 to small hit A counter 203m, and small hit B counter 3 is set to 203n, and 5 is set to the small hit C counter p. Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time-saving with jackpot), 100 for short-time counter 203k, 2 for small-hit A counter 203m, 10 for small-hit B counter 203n, 50 for small-hit C counter p , respectively.

In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot), it is a jackpot type in which the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that a value (time saving end condition) is not set for each of the C counters p. When the processing of S1614 described above is finished, next, a time saving setting information command for indicating information corresponding to the values of various counters indicating the time saving end conditions set in the processing of S1614 is set (S1615).

The time saving setting information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the main processing executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 51) External output processing (S1501) It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time saving setting information command, the time saving information indicating the time saving end condition of the current time saving state is set in the time saving information update area 223g and the temporary working time saving information update area 223i (see S2603 in FIG. 60). . Based on the time saving information set here and the update information of the time saving state updated based on the variation of the special pattern (lottery), the remaining number of time saving state (remaining condition) is determined, and based on the remaining number Various effects modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

When the processing of S1615 is completed, next, a state command corresponding to the game state set after the big win is set (S1616), the end of the big win is set (S1617), and the flag 203d during the big win is set to OFF (S1618). ), the process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that the condition for ending the time saving state can be set differently according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, compared to the case of winning the jackpot by lottery of the first special symbol, the end condition of the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) is established when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured to set a time-saving end condition that is difficult to do.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an added value when winning one type instead of two types during the right-handed game while the time saving state is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) set when the jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbols, the same time-saving end condition is set. , For example, it may be configured to set a time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established when the jackpot type is jackpot A, without being limited to that. Also, some of the plurality of time-saving end conditions may be set so that the big win A is more likely to be established, and the other conditions are more likely to be established for the big win B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 21(d), in the present embodiment, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the change number end condition regarding the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol (end based on the value of the time saving medium counter 203k condition), and a lottery result of a special symbol, and a winning number end condition (end condition based on the value of each small win counter) relating to the number of times a small win is won.

In addition, it is configured to set end conditions corresponding to a plurality of small hit types set at the time of winning a small win as the end conditions for the number of times of winning. By configuring in this way, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times) for the player, which small winning game corresponding to which small winning type is executed, and how much longer It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state ends with.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to set only the number of fluctuations "100 times" of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the condition for ending the number of variations, but it differs depending on the type of jackpot. A change count end condition may be set. In addition, as the fluctuation number end condition, a first special symbol variation measuring means for measuring only the number of variations of the first special symbol is provided, and when the measurement result of the first special symbol variation measuring means becomes a predetermined result, it is established. A first special symbol variation end condition and a second special symbol variation measuring means for measuring only the number of variations of the second special symbol are provided, and established when the measurement result of the second special symbol variation measuring means becomes a predetermined result. A second special symbol variation end condition may be provided.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the end conditions based on the measurement results of the counters (small hit A counter 203m, small hit B counter 203n, small hit C counter 203p) corresponding to each small hit type as winning times end conditions are set. However, without being limited to this, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on the value obtained by simply summing the number of times that a small win is won, or a plurality of (3 or more) small win types Among them, a means for totaling and measuring the number of times that a predetermined number (two) of the small winning games in which the small winning types are set is provided, and a termination condition is set based on the measurement result of the means. You can

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to set the time saving end condition for all the types of small hits that can be set at the time of winning the small hit, but not limited to this, how many times set at the time of winning the small win Even if it is done, the small winning type Z may be set as a small winning type for which the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied. As a result, even if the player grasps that the small win has been won during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state is coming to an end due to the small win this time.

In addition, when the above-described small winning type Z is provided, it is preferable to perform a small winning game having the same contents as the small winning game in which the winning number end condition is set. By configuring in this way, even if the game contents of the small winning game executed during the time saving state are identified, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state is nearing the end due to the small winning game this time. .

In this way, by determining whether a small win has been won or by determining the game content of the small win game executed based on the winning of a small win, that is, the game of the pachinko machine 10 By discerning the content, it is difficult to grasp the progress of the time saving state (whether it is approaching the end), so that the progress of the time saving state (whether it is approaching the end) Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly interested. It should be noted that the contents of control of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained in detail in the explanation of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 which will be described later.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 53, small hit control processing (S1505) performed by MPU201 in main control unit 110 is explained. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process (S1505). This small winning control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small winning state, execution of various effects according to the small winning, correspondence This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process (FIG. 53, S1505), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1701). Specifically, if the small winning start flag 203f is set to ON by the processing of S404 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 40), it is determined that the small winning of the special symbol is started. In the processing of S1701, when the special symbol small winning is started (S1701: Yes), an opening command is set (S1702). Then, the small hit start flag 203f is set to OFF (S1703), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when the small winning of special symbols is not started (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning of special symbols is in progress (S1704). During the special symbol small winning, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small winning (including during the special symbol small winning game). During the predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol is included. The determination of S1704 is determined by analyzing whether the flag 303g is set to ON during the small hit. In the processing of S1704, if it is determined that the special symbols are not in the middle of a small hit (S1704: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1704, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the midst of a small hit (S1704: Yes), the processing of S1705 is executed. In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening (S1705). In the process of S1705, if it is determined that it is time to open the V winning opening (S1705: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202g ( S1706), and it is determined whether this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707).

In the processing of S1707, if it is determined that this time is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1707 that this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: Yes), then in the process of S1708, it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON. (S1708), when it is determined that it is not on (is off) (S1708: No), the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203e is read (S1709), then the read small hit An instruction command corresponding to the type is set (S1710).

As the instruction command set in the process of S1710, for example, a small hit (for example, a small hit A) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area during the small hit game as a small hit type, and a ball specified during the small hit game An instruction command is set for differentiating the display mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 depending on small wins (for example, small wins B and C) that are difficult to pass through the area.

Specifically, when the small hit A, which is likely to hit two types during the small hit game, is set as the small hit type, the display mode (Fig. 16 (a)) is set, and after that, when the ball passes through the specific area, a display mode (see FIG. 16 (b)) indicating that the two types of wins have been successfully won is displayed. ing. In this way, by varying the content of the instruction command set according to the degree of expectation for the ball to pass through the specific area in the small winning game to be executed, the player is provided with an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. can do.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description is continued. In the process of S1711, if it is determined that the current time is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a (S1711: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1713). In the processing of S1713, if it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1713: Yes), the ending command is set (S1714), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1713, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1713: No), in the processing of S1715, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending effect (S1715). In the processing of S1715, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S1715, if it is determined that it is time to end the ending effect (S1715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON (S1716), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1716: Yes), sets an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203i (S1717), sets the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot middle flag 203d to ON (S1718), and sets the V flag 203i It is set to OFF (S1719), the V passage flag 203j is set to OFF (S1720), the small hitting medium flag 203g is set to OFF (S171721), and this processing is terminated.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 63. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 54, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-off processing (S2118 in FIG. 55) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 55, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (S2115 in FIG. 55: Yes), it executes power-off processing in S2118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2062 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2062: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2118. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2066. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2063: Yes), it will transfer to S2064 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2063: No), the process proceeds to S2068.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2064. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2063: No), and the process proceeds to S2068.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2062: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S2118, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S2064 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2064, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2064). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2066). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2065: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2067), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormalities in the RAM 223 are notified by the lamp display device 227 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S2068, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2068). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2118 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 55). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2118 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2068: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2069), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2070), an interrupt Permission is set (S2071), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2068 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2068: No), S2069, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2070, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2070), interrupt permission is set. Then (S2071), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S2069 is skipped is that when the process of S2068 is reached from S2064 via the process of S2068, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2064, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S2113 and the variable display setting process of S2114 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the lamp display device 227 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing, whether or not the frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter referred to as frame buttons 22) operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect have been pressed is monitored, and the frame buttons are pressed. 22 is confirmed, the corresponding effect is set. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Various counter update processes (S2111) are executed after the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). This various counter update processing is processing for updating the values of a plurality of counters of the effect counter 223 e provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 . That is, in this embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every 1 millisecond in the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 . Here, a method for updating a plurality of counters held in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described.

In this embodiment, when setting the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the values of a plurality of counters are referred to. In such a configuration, for example, if the values of all counters are updated by 1 each time various counter updating processes (S2111) are executed, that is, if the updating method of each counter is unified, each counter cannot be updated. In order to avoid the problem that the conditions are synchronized and randomness cannot be imparted to the set performance mode, the updated values of the respective counters are configured not to be synchronized.

When various counter update processes (S2111) are finished, effect update process (S2112) is next executed. This effect update processing (S2112) is for performing processing for varying the content of the effect currently being executed (already set variable display) during execution of the effect.

After effect update processing (S2112), command determination processing for performing processing according to the command received from main controller 110 is performed (S2113). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, a variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process (S2114) is completed, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off processing is executed (S2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2203), Other processing corresponding to the command is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S2204). When the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S2207). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the value included in the received pending ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 (special The holding frequency N1 of the variable display in the symbol is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2208). In addition, in the processing of S2208, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S2208 ends, the process of S2217 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, each time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol of the main controller 110 by the processing of S2208. It is possible to match the value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected or during the special symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. Incidentally, when the process of S2208 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S2207, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2207: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2209). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), a winning information related process is executed (S2210). Next, the process of S2117 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the winning information related process (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information related process (S2210). This winning information related process (S2210) determines whether or not to execute a temporary winning effect based on the winning information (variation type) included in the winning information command received this time and the current gaming situation. process is executed.

When the winning information related process (S2210) is executed, first, information stored in the game state storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 is read out (S2301). Then, it is determined whether the game state read in the process of S2301 is in time saving (S2302), and if it is determined that it is in time saving (S2302: Yes), then the temporary hit determination flag 223h is turned on. It is determined whether there is any (S2303). In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the temporary hit determination flag 223h is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2303: No), the process proceeds to S2304, and the temporary time saving end flag 223j is ON is determined (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the provisional time saving end flag 223j is not on (is off) (S2304: No), the process proceeds to S2305, and this time, the winning information received from the main controller 110 It is determined whether there is information (S2305).

On the other hand, in the process of S2303 described above, if it is determined that the provisional hit determination flag 223h is ON (S2303: Yes), or if it is determined that the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is ON in the process of S2304 (S2304: Yes) skips the process of determining whether or not to execute the temporary winning effect, and proceeds to the process of S2311, which will be described later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the winning information related process (S2211), the provisional winning effect can be executed only when the read gaming state is the time saving mode. Therefore, since the provisional win effect can be executed only when the time is reduced, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the tentative hit determination flag 223h is ON, that is, when the tentative hit effect is already being executed, a new tentative win effect is not set. It can be provided to the player until the end.

Next, the processing (S2305 to S2311) for setting the temporary winning effect will be described. In the process of S2305, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information received from the main controller 110 this time (S2305). When it is determined that the received prize information is a win (S2305: Yes), the temporary winning determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2306), and the information in the temporary short working hours information update area 223i is updated (S2307). On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information is not winning information (S2305: No), the process of S2306 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2307.

Next, it is determined whether or not the information updated in the process of S2307 is the time saving end condition (S2308). When it is determined that the time saving end condition is met (S2308: Yes), the provisional time saving end flag 223j is set to ON (S2309). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the end condition of time saving (S2308: No), the process of S2309 is skipped and the process of S2310 described later is performed. Next, set the winning information command for display corresponding to the information in the provisional time saving information update area 223i (S2311), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S2311), this process exit. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the read gaming state is not in the time saving mode (S2302: No), the winning information command for display corresponding to the winning information received this time is set (S2312), and the above-described S2311 , and terminate this process.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description continues. In the processing of S2209, if the winning information command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a win-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2211). When a hit-related command is received (S22111: Yes), the hit-related process (S2212) is executed, the process of S2217 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the win-related processing (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S2212). Win-related processing (S2212) is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a big win game or a small win game that is executed when a big win or a small win is won as a result of a special symbol lottery. Processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed when a big win or a small win is won.

In the winning related process (S2212 in FIG. 58), first, it is determined whether or not the command related to winning received by the command determination process (S2113) has received a command to start a big win (S2401). When the jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S2402), the tentative hit determination flag 223h is set to OFF (S2403), and the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 56). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2404). If the round number command has been received (S2404: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S2405), and this process ends. In this embodiment, since information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command, the number-of-rounds command for display is set based on the received number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data to be transmitted from the control device 110, when the information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, the sound lamp control device The RAM 223 of 113 is provided with a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2404: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S2406). When a jackpot end command is received (S2406: Yes), a display jackpot end command is set (S2407), and a jackpot end process (S2408) is executed. Details of the jackpot end processing (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2406, when it is determined that the big hit end command is not received (S2406: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command is received (S2409). When the small hit start command is received (S2409: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S2410), and this process is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S2409: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command is received (S2411). When the small hit end command is received (S2411: Yes), the small hit end command for display is set (S2412), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2411, when it is determined that the small winning end command is not received (S2411: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passing command is received (S2413). If the V entrance passage command has been received (S2413: Yes), the V entrance passage command for display is set (S2414), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2413 that the V entrance pass command has not been received (S2413: No), it is determined whether the V pass command has been received (S2415). When the V pass command is received (S2415: Yes), the V effect command for display is set for showing the effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V prize winning device 650 (S2416), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2415 that the V passage command has not been received (S2415: No), it is determined whether or not the instruction command has been received (S2417). If the instruction command has been received (S2417: Yes), the display instruction command is set (S2418), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2417 that the instruction command has not been received (S2417: No), this processing ends.

In this embodiment, a small winning game is executed by opening the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small winning game. is configured to output an instruction command when the ball is not detected (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays an emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) for emphasizing that the V winning device 650 will win the ball. Set the display instruction command for

When the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3 in the state in which the highlight guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. Set command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small winning game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is surely won by the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. In addition, the ball that wins the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. Despite this configuration, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the fifth opening timing of the open/close door 650f1, when the small winning game is started, the third symbol The player is playing a left-handed game without noticing the guidance display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10(a)) of the display device 81 for guiding the right-handed player. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the game has been stopped.

In such a case, it is possible to make the player more likely to play the right-handed game by changing the display that guides the right-handed hit displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Furthermore, as the timing of displaying the emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)), when the right-handed game is performed after the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the right-handed game The timing is such that the shot ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player who has executed a right-handed game according to the display of the emphasized guidance display mode cannot cause the ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 during the small winning game.

Here, the jackpot ending process (S2408), which is one of the processes in the winning related process (S2212), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S2408).

In the jackpot end processing (S2408 in FIG. 59), first, information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read out (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the information read in the process of S2501 is the time saving state (S2502). When it is determined that the read information is the time saving state (S2502: Yes), all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S2503). On the other hand, in the processing of S2502, when it is determined that the read information is not in the time saving state (S2502: No), this processing ends.

After executing the process of S2503, next, in the process of S2503, it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the read information (S2504). If it is determined that there is hit information (S2504: Yes), a consecutive chan command for display is set (S2505). Next, the tentative hit determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506), the state display command for display is set (S2507), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2504, if it is determined that there is no win information in the read state (S2504: No), the winning information command for display corresponding to the read state is set (S2508), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description continues. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S2211: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2213). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S2214), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether a time-saving related command has been received (S2215). When it is determined that a time saving related command has been received (S2215: Yes), a time saving update process (S2216) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the time saving update process (S2216) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S2215, when it is determined that the time-saving-related command has not been received (S2215: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S2217), and this process ends.

Next, the content of the time saving update process (S2216), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process (S2216).

In the time saving update process (S2216), first, the time saving related information received this time is analyzed (S2601). Next, in the processing of S2601, it is determined whether or not the analyzed working hours related information is working hours setting information (S2602). When it is determined that the time saving related information is the time saving setting information (S2602: Yes), the time saving information is set in the time saving information update area 223g and the provisional working time information update area 223i (S2603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2602, when it is determined that the time reduction related information is not the time reduction setting information (S2602: No), it is determined whether the time reduction related information is variation information (S2604). When it is determined that the time saving related information is variation information (S2604: Yes), the information in the time saving information update area 223g is updated (S2605). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2606), and it is determined whether or not the time saving lower limit flag 223k provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2607). When it is determined that the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off (S2607: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining time saving times is less than 30 times (S2608). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is less than 30 times (S2608: Yes), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to ON (S2609). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2608 that the number of remaining time reductions is greater than 30 (S2608: No), this process ends. In the processing of S2607, if it is determined that the time saving lower limit flag 223k is ON (S2607: Yes), the processing of S2608 to S2609 is skipped and the processing of S2610 described later is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction count is one (S2610). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 1 (S2610: Yes), the change flag 223n before end of time reduction is set to ON (S2611), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2610, when it is determined that the number of times of remaining time reduction is not 1 (S2610: No), it is determined whether the number of times of remaining time reduction is 0 (S2612). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612: Yes), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to OFF (S2613), and the time reduction before end fluctuation flag 223n is set to OFF (S2614). Next, the provisional time saving end flag 223j is set to OFF (S2615), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2612, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 0 (S2612: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2604, when it is determined that the time saving related information is not the fluctuation information (S2604: No), it is determined whether the time saving related information is small winning information (S2616). When it is determined that the time saving related information is the small winning information (S2616: Yes), the small winning related update process (S2617) is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, when it discriminate|determines that time saving relevant information is not small hit information (S2616:No), this process is complete|finished as it is.

Here, with reference to Drawing 61, small hit relation update processing (S2617) is explained. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit related update process (S2617).

In the small hitting related update process (S2617 in FIG. 61), first, the information in the time saving information update area 223g is updated (S2701). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2702), and it is determined whether the semi-end condition flag 223m is on (S2703). If it is determined that the semi-end condition flag 223m is off (S2703: No), it is determined whether the semi-end condition is satisfied (S2704). If it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2704: Yes), the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON (S2705), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the semi-end condition flag 223m is ON (S2703: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S2704 that the semi-end condition is not satisfied (S2704: No), it is determined whether the termination condition is met (S2706). When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes), the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to OFF (S2707), and then the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to OFF (S2708). Next, the fluctuation flag 223n before the time saving end is set to OFF (S2709), the provisional time saving end flag 223j is set to OFF (S2710), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2706, if it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied (S2706: No), this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2114). This variable display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62), first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2801: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2807. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is ON (S2801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to OFF (S2802). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2803).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, the effect setting process for setting the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2804), and then the display variation for notifying the display control device 114 The pattern command is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type and the state display mode set in the effect setting process, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2805). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started. When the processing of S2805 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2806), and the processing proceeds to S2807.

Here, the contents of the effect setting process (S2804) executed in the process of S2804 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the content of the effect setting process (S2804). This effect setting process (S2804) is the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57), and when the tentative win effect is set, the variation pattern set in the current variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62) It is a process for setting the temporary winning effect.

When the effect setting process (S2804) is executed, first, information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read out (S2901). Next, in the processing of S2901, it is determined whether or not the read information is the time saving state (S2902). When it is determined that the read information is not in the time saving state (S2902: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read information is the time saving state (S2902: Yes), it is determined whether the tentative hit determination flag 223h is ON (S2903). If it is determined that the tentative hit determination flag 223h is ON (S2903: Yes), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2903, if it is determined that the temporary hit determination flag 223h is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2903: No), the information of the time saving information update area 223g is read (S2904) . Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation flag 223n before the end of time saving is on (S2905). When it is determined that the fluctuation flag 223n before the time saving end is off (S2905: No), the setting of the time saving lower limit flag 223k, the semi-end condition flag 223m, the result of the judgment, and the value of the state effect counter 223o, the ROM 222 A state display mode is selected using the state display selection table 222b provided in (S2906). Next, a display command indicating the selected state display mode is set (S2908), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the fluctuation flag 223n before the time saving end is on (S2905: Yes), based on the result of the determination, the value of the state effect counter 223o, the last provided in the ROM222 A state display mode is selected using the state display selection table (S2907). Next, the process of S2908 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description continues. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is off (S2801: No), or after executing the above-described process of S2806, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807). . When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is ON (S2807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to OFF (S2808), and the extracted stop type command is acquired (S2809). Next, based on the extracted stop type, a stop type command for display is set (S2810), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2807, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is OFF (S2807: No), this process ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 81. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is operated so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S4001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM and in the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64). By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S4001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 65, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a at step S4101. and the processing of S4102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S4103 to S4105 without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4003, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S4004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 79A), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S6302 in FIG. 79A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66(b)) during that time, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (not shown), which are the images when the power is turned on, are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 66B) and simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 66B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When received via the device 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance is performed. be able to. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure recovery. Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S4005, interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 66(a). FIG. 66(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 66(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 66(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301). If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S4302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. FIG.

In the display setting process (S4303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S4304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S4303) or the simple display setting processing (S4309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , various A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4305), , generates the drawing list shown in FIG. 38, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to D, front and back reach, reach other than front and back, complete loss, chance eye ) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 32) on the third pattern display device 81, a simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S4309) is executed, and S4304 is executed. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75, the details of the command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 67, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S4402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S4403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S4405), and returns to the processing of S4401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S4405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). FIG. 68(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4504, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S4503 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S4406), If there is a display variation type command (S4406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4407), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the stop type command process (S4407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). FIG. 68(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S4601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S4603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S4602. In the above-described task processing (S4304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S4602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S4603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed. Image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236 . Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S4601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S4602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4408). If there is an image change command (S4408: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S4409), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the back image change command process (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. 69(a). FIG. 69(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6303) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4701). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S4702), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4701 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4702. . Then, when the specified back image type is back B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A and B is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S4702 is used to determine the The type of the background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4410). Otherwise (S4410: Yes), the error command process is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the error command processing (S4411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 69(b). FIG. 69(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4802). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4802, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4802, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a win-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and if there is a win-related command If (S4412: Yes), hit-related command processing is executed (S4413), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the win-related command process (S4413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing win-related command processing. The hit-related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command, display round number command, and display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the hit related command process (FIG. 70, S4413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S4901). When it is determined that there is a hit start command for display in the process of S4901 (S4901: Yes), the big hit start command process is executed (S4902), and the process proceeds to S4903.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71(a), details of the jackpot start command process (S4902) will be described. FIG. 71(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot start command process (S4902). This jackpot start command process (S4902) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is a jackpot start command for display in the hit-related command process (FIG. 70). This is processing for displaying on the pattern display device 81 .

In the jackpot start command process (S4902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). After that, based on the jackpot start display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5004), the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5005), End this process.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4901, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4903. After completing the processing of S4901 or S4902, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S4903). If it is determined in the process of S4903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905.

Details of the round number command processing (S4904) will now be described with reference to FIG. 71(b). FIG. 71(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S4904). This round number command process (S4904) is a process executed when it is determined that a display round number command has been received in the winning related command process (FIG. 70), and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect when the third symbol display device 81 is pressed.

In the round number command processing (S4904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5104), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5105), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S4903: No), the process proceeds to S4905. After completing the processing of S4903 or S4904, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S4905). In the process of S4905, when it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command (S4905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907.

Details of the jackpot end command process (S4906) will now be described with reference to FIG. 72(a). FIG. 72(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot end command process (S4906). This jackpot end command process (S4906) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 70). This is processing for displaying on the pattern display device 81 .

In the jackpot end command process (S4906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5202), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5204), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5205), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4905, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4907. After completing the processing of S4905 or S4906, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S4907). In the process of S4907, when it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display (S4907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

Here, with reference to FIG. 72(b), the details of the small winning start command process (S4908) will be described. This small hit start command process (S4908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command is received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 70), suggesting the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying an effect on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the small hit start command process (S4908), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). Thereafter, time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small winning start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5305). , the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4907, when it is determined that there is no small winning start command for display (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. After completing the processing of S4907 or S4908, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S4909). In the process of S4909, when it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S4909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S4910), and the process proceeds to S4911.

Here, with reference to FIG. 73(a), details of the small winning end command process (S4910) will be described. This small hit end command process (S4910) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit end command is received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 70), suggesting the end of the small hit game This is a process for displaying an effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the small hit end command process (S4910), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4909, when it is determined that there is no small winning end command for display (S4909: No), the process proceeds to S4911. After completing the processing of S4909 or S4910, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S4911). In the process of S4911, if it is determined that there is a V entrance pass command (S4911: Yes), the V entrance pass command process is executed (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

Details of the V entrance passage command processing (S4912) will now be described with reference to FIG. 73(b). This V entrance pass command process (S4912) is a process executed when it is determined that a V entrance pass command has been received in the win-related command determination process (see FIG. 70). This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the switch (V switch) 650e3.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S4912), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passing command (S4911: No), the process proceeds to S4913. After completing the processing of S4911 or S4912, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S4913). In the process of S4913, when it is determined that there is a V effect command (S4913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S4914), and the process proceeds to S4915.

Details of the V effect command process (S4914) will now be described with reference to FIG. 74(a). This V effect command process (S4914) is a process executed when it is determined that the V effect command is received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and the probability that a jackpot game is awarded is high. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that.

In the V effect command processing (S4914), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5602), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S5603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5605), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4913, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S4913: No), the process proceeds to S4915. After completing the process of S4913 or S4914, it is determined whether or not there is a display instruction command (S4915). In the process of S4915, if it is determined that there is an instruction command (S4915: Yes), the instruction command process is executed (S4916), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4915, if it is determined that there is no display instruction command (S4915: No), this processing ends.

Details of the instruction command process (S4916) will now be described with reference to FIG. 74(b). This instruction command process (S4916) is a process executed when it is determined that an instruction command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and indicates that there is a high probability that a jackpot game will be awarded. This is a process for displaying a suggested effect on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the instruction command process (S4916), first, an instruction effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5651). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5652), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the instruction effect display data table (S5653). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5654), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5655), and this process is terminated.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there are various effect-related commands corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 among the unprocessed commands. Then (S4414), if there are various production-related commands (S4414: Yes), production-related command processing is executed (S4415), and the process returns to S4401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 75, details of the effect-related command processing (S4415) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing effect-related command processing. This production-related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to various production-related commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the effect-related command process (S4415), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the effect display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description is continued. In the process of S4414, if it is determined that there are no various effect-related commands (S4414: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4416), and the process returns to S4401.

In the process of S4401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes ), and the processing of S4402 to S4416 is executed again. Then, the processing of S4401 to S4416 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (see FIG. 32), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only stop type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 68(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68A) executed in this case, in the processing of S4501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S4303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S6002 to S6004 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S6002), S6003-S6004 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S6003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6004).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S6101).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6004), or if it is determined in the process of S6003 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S6003: No), then the process proceeds to S6005.

In S6005, pointer update processing is executed (S6005). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6201, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6203). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S6205), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S6206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S6202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6006 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S6009).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S6009: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S6010), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6011). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON in the ON state (S6014), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S4304), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the last stop design determination flag set by S6015, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the fixed display flag is ON (S6009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S6017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6018). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), the process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set the drawing contents.

In the process of S6016, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image by the power-on fluctuation image is over, for a predetermined time, the power-on fluctuation image (Fig. not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, details of the transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 79(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S6302), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S6301, that is, if it is turned off (S6301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 79(b). FIG. 79B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S6401). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6402). In the process of S6402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not ended (S6402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to S6403. Also, as a result of the process of S6401, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

In the process of S6403, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6403). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the processing of S6403, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) (see S6301: No in FIG. 79A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S6303), which is a part of the transfer setting processing (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the previously executed display setting process (S4303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6502). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6503), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

Also, in the processing of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S6502: No), the processing of S6503 and S6504 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6506).

In the process of S6506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not ended (S6506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to S6507. Also, as a result of the process of S6505, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6505: No), the process proceeds to S6507.

In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507). is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S6511, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The determination in the process of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6513 (S6513: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S6513 (S6513: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S6515), and this normal image transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, if the background image is changed based on the reception of the background image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the background image is changed. Of the image data used in , image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, details of the drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 36 is generated (S6601). That is, in the process of S6601, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task process (S4304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination top address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S6602, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S6603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 66(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the first embodiment, as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, when a jackpot is won (symbol winning or two types of winning If you do), the time-saving end condition (special prize end condition) set when the special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (the end condition of the number of fluctuations), and the lottery of special symbols. Since it is configured to be able to set the time-saving end condition (winning number end condition) that is set when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number, the period in which the time-saving state is continuously set (time-saving It is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily predict the timing at which the state ends.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the above-described winning number end condition is established when a small hit is won multiple times, every time a small hit is won during the time saving state, the player Will the short-time state end? I can make you think. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a plurality of small hit types when winning a small hit, and as a plurality of small hit types, a small hit type that sets the winning number end condition and the winning number end condition A small hit type that does not set is provided. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the time saving state ends based on the small winning game executed during the time saving state.

In addition, as described above, when setting the small winning type that sets the winning number end condition and the small winning type that does not set the winning number ending condition, the small winning game to be executed (open operation of V winning device 650) For the same content (the same concept that includes an error that the player cannot identify), set a small winning type that sets the winning number end condition and a small winning type that does not set the winning number ending condition. should be configured to As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the first embodiment, it is possible to set a plurality of small winning types for setting the winning number end condition, and the number of times set as the winning number ending condition is configured to be different for each small winning type. are doing. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be predicted by determining the content of the small winning game executed during the time saving state.

In the above-described first embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that is likely to be executed when the time saving state is set, and corresponds to the won small win. When the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (when the V switch 650e3 detects that the ball has flowed down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 opened by the small winning game) , a big win (2 kinds of wins) is set after the small win game is finished.

It should be noted that, in the above-described first embodiment, the setting of the above-mentioned two types means that the jackpot game based on the jackpot type (jackpot game content) set when the jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols is set to the jackpot game. Although it is configured to be executed on the condition that the ball has passed through the specific area during the game, it is not limited to this. It may be configured to read out (lottery) the jackpot type corresponding to the type of the small win game (lottery type), and execute the jackpot game corresponding to the read (selected as a result of the lottery) jackpot type. A big win may be set on the condition that a ball passes through a specific area during a small win game, and a big win game corresponding to the big win type selected based on the result of a predetermined lottery may be executed. .

In the first embodiment configured to be able to set two types of hits in this way, two types of hits are set according to the winning small hit type, and a small hit game with a different degree of expectation is set, and for each small hit type It is configured so that a time-saving end condition (winning number end condition) is set in . Furthermore, it is configured so that the number of times (the number of times of winning) that the winning number of times end condition is satisfied is smaller for the smaller winning game (smaller winning type) in which two types of winnings are more likely to be set.

By configuring in this way, when a small prize is won in the time saving state, the small prize game is performed while assuming both the possibility of winning two kinds of prizes and the possibility of ending the time saving state. Since it will be executed, it is possible to enhance the playability in the time saving state. Furthermore, since the time-saving state is more likely to be ended as the winning of the small winning game in which the two types of winning is more likely to be won, the game during the small winning game can be motivated.

In addition, in the first embodiment, among the small winning types, if the right-handed game is continuously played, the winning number end condition is 1 for the small winning A that can acquire 2 types. (with some exceptions). By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a large penalty only to a player who has not continuously played a right-handed game (a player who has not played an appropriate game), and to shorten the time for the player. A right-handed game can be continuously performed during the game.

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, it is configured to vary the timing at which the time saving state ends according to the type of the time saving end condition that has been established, and the time saving state during the period in which the small winning game is executed It is configured to be able to set the case of continuation and the case of termination of the time saving state. As a result, the game result can be changed depending on which time-saving end condition is satisfied, so that the player is made to pay attention to the type of the time-saving end condition that is satisfied in addition to whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied. be able to.

Specifically, when a small hit is won in a special symbol variation in which the condition for ending the number of variations is established, the timing at which the variation in the special symbol stops (timing at which the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed). , the time saving state ends, and during the small winning game that is executed after that, it becomes a normal state, whereas when the winning number of times end condition is satisfied, the time saving state at the timing when the small winning game is executed is terminated.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game is placed upstream of the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a (it is fired by the right-handed game). It is disposed on the upstream side of the flow path where the ball flows down), and is configured so that the ball is difficult to flow down to the side of the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a during the small winning game. As a result, even if the timing at which the time saving state ends differs according to the established time saving end condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice it, so that it is possible to suppress the player's sense of incompatibility.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, if the normal symbol is won and the time saving state is set at the time when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set, the time saving state is set during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. is completed, the opening operation during the time saving state is continuously executed. Therefore, even if the timing at which the time saving state ends differs depending on the satisfied time saving end condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice it, so that it is possible to suppress the discomfort given to the player.

It should be noted that, as in the first embodiment described above, instead of making it difficult to understand that the timing at which the time saving state ends varies depending on the time saving end condition that has been established, the time saving state is changed according to the time saving end condition that has been established. In the case of making the end timing largely different to have a unique game property, for example, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is established, the time saving state is ended at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, and winning is achieved. When the condition for ending the number of times is satisfied, it is preferable to end the time saving state at the timing when the small winning game ends. By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to vary greatly the period when a time saving state is set by the classification of the time saving end conditions satisfied.

In this case, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged upstream of the V winning device 650, and when the time saving state is set during the small winning game is configured so that many balls are guided by the electric accessory 640a and enter the ball entrance (for example, the general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640), and further, the opening operation is performed by the small winning game. It is preferable to configure the ball entrance into which the ball is guided by the operation of the electric accessory 640a to pay out more balls than winning the V winning device 650.

In addition, as the time-saving end condition, the fluctuation number end condition is set twice, and the winning number end condition is set once, and only when a small hit is won in the first special symbol variation after the time-saving state is set, It is preferable to configure so that many balls can be entered into the ball entrance guided by the electric accessory 640a during the small winning game. By constructing in this way, when the time saving state is set, the game can be played while expecting the establishment of the specific time saving end condition, and new game characteristics can be provided.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown with reference to FIG. 2, the V winning device 650 that is opened when a small win is won is arranged in the right region, and a right-handed game is played during a small win game. By doing so, the V winning device 650 wins the ball, and when the ball that has won the V winning device 650 passes through the specific area (the V switch 650e3 detects the ball), two types of winning are set. ing. Furthermore, the content of the jackpot set as the two types of wins (the content of the jackpot game, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, etc.) is configured to be set according to the type of the small win, which is the result of the lottery of the special symbols. are doing.

In such a game property, for example, when a small prize is won, the result of the lottery is identified by the stop display mode of the first symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first display device 37 to correspond to the small prize of this time. By determining the content of the jackpot that is set as a When winning a small win in which a game state disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, which is less than the game, the act of intentionally winning the second prize is not performed, and the following is performed. There is a fear that a game is played so as to aim for a small winning.

Therefore, as the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The right side area is set to be longer than the period from when a stop pattern indicating the lottery result of the pattern is stop-displayed to when the small winning game is executed (until the time when two types of winning can be obtained during the small winning game). Of these, it is preferable to provide a delay channel for delaying the flow of the ball upstream of the V winning device 650 .

By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain two kinds of hits when a right-handed game is played after determining the lottery result of the special symbols stopped and displayed on the first display device 37.例文帳に追加Therefore, in order to obtain two types of hits, the right-handed game can be executed continuously from before the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed (from the special symbol variable display). It is possible to suppress the execution of malicious games.

In this case, for all the small wins, the period until the ball fired in the right game reaches the V winning device 650 is the stop symbol that shows the lottery result of the special symbol on the first display device 37. There is no need to make it longer than the period from when is stopped until the small winning game is executed (until the time when two types of winning can be obtained during the small winning game), and some small winning games ( In particular, it suffices if the small winning type in which the content of the big winning that is advantageous to the player is set) is executed so as to satisfy the conditions.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the degree of expectation per two types during the small winning game (the possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area during the small winning game in the case where the right-handed game is continuously performed) is It is configured to vary depending on the type of small hit, and specifically, as described above, it is configured to vary the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k according to the type of small hit that has been won. Without being limited to this, for example, by varying the opening timing of the V winning opening 650a rotated in the small winning game according to the winning small winning type, the degree of expectation (continuation) for the two types during the small winning game It may be configured to vary the possibility of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning game) when the right-handed game is played.

In this case, for example, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k during the small winning game is set to a constant operation regardless of the type of the small winning, and the flow path through which the ball that wins the V winning device 650 during the small winning game flows down is specified. An operation pattern is set in which a first period of communication with the channel (special discharge channel 650e2) passing through the area and a second period of communication with the other channel (normal discharge channel 650e1) are alternately established. , the opening timing of the V winning opening 650a may be set to be different from the timing at which the first period and the second period are established.

Furthermore, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the right hitting game can be continued by executing the same effect as the small winning game. In this case, when the special symbols are lost in the lottery, the fixed display time of the special symbols, that is, the period of stop display of the lottery result of the special symbols is changed according to the type of the loss, so that special In a part of cases where the lottery result of the symbol is lost, the fixed display time of the special symbol can be lengthened (the period until the next special symbol variation is executed can be lengthened).

Therefore, it is possible to carry out a game aiming at two kinds of wins other than the case of winning the small win game. Further, by applying the effect (pseudo small winning game effect) at the time of loss to the pachinko machine 10 having the game board 13 using the above-described delay member, the right-handed game can be played more continuously.

Furthermore, it is possible to set a small winning type in which an opening operation (small winning game) in which the ball cannot win a prize is executed in the V winning device 650a, and when a small winning (unfortunate small winning) of the small winning type is won, that is, , It may be configured to execute the above-described (pseudo small winning game effect) even when a small winning game without two types of expectations is executed.

In addition, to measure the number of times the special symbol lottery result (specific deviation, disappointing small hit) that the above-mentioned pseudo small hit game effect can be executed, and to establish the time saving end condition based on the measurement result may be configured. As a result, the time saving state can be terminated based on the number of times the pseudo small winning game production is executed, so that it is possible to grasp whether the small winning game production this time is a pseudo one, that is, In order to grasp whether or not the ball wins the V winning prize device 650 during the small winning game performance, it is possible to make it easy to continuously perform the right-handed game.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 105. FIG. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol, and in the content set as the end condition of the time saving state. The difference is that the content of the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made different.

In the first embodiment described above, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the end condition of the fluctuation count established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the number of winnings established based on the number of winnings won in the small hit end conditions can be set, and the time saving state is ended when any one of a plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied. As a result, it is made difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the time saving state is continuously set, and the player is allowed to play a game with a sense of tension during the time saving state, thereby providing a game that does not get bored. there were.

Furthermore, since different conditions can be set according to the type of small win to be set as conditions for ending the number of times of winning, the end timing of the time saving state is made more difficult to understand. In addition, since different time-saving termination conditions can be set according to the jackpot type for which the time-saving state is set, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made even more difficult to understand.

However, in the above-described first embodiment, it is only difficult for the player to grasp the plurality of time saving end conditions set according to the result of the game and the time saving information updated during the time saving state. There is also a problem that it is difficult to make the player think that he or she has won the jackpot by himself because the result of the special pattern lottery determines which of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select whether to play the right-handed game or the left-handed game in the state where the time saving state is set. And, according to the selected game content (right-handed game, left-handed game), it is configured to vary the time-saving end conditions that are likely to be established.

In the second embodiment thus configured, the player can select the game content during the time saving state. Therefore, in the game during the time saving state executed according to the game content selected by the player, even if the time saving end condition is satisfied early, even if the time saving state can be continued for a long time, It can be made to think that it is the result of playing a game with.

Furthermore, the second embodiment is configured to be able to acquire two types of hits as in the first embodiment described above, and when the first game (left-handed game) is performed during the time saving state, the second game (Right-handed game), the expected value of the period in which the time-saving state is set continuously, and the expected value of acquiring 2 types (expected value of acquiring 2 types per special pattern 1 variation) , are configured to be different.

Specifically, when the first game is performed, the period in which the time saving state can continue is likely to be short, and the time saving game is executed in which it is easy to win two types during the time saving state, and the second game is performed. If you do, the period in which the time saving state can continue is likely to be long (longer than the first game), and it is difficult to acquire two types during the time saving state (compared to the first game It is configured so that a time-saving game (which is difficult to acquire) is executed.

By configuring in this way, the game content during the time saving state can be selected according to the player's own convenience. It is possible to provide a game machine that allows even players who are not satisfied to play games without complaints. A detailed description of the contents for performing a game with different game characteristics during the time saving state will be given later.

<Regarding production content in the second embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the contents of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 82(a), the effect contents during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends will be described. FIG. 82(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Among the elements displayed on the display screen, the elements that are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), during the ending period of the jackpot game, a message titled "After the jackpot is your preference" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to guide the game method during the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends. Please enjoy the game" and the comment "Jackpot end" for notifying that the jackpot game has ended are displayed.

Then, in the sub display area Ds, a first guidance display area Dm4 showing the contents of the first game executable during the time saving state, and a second guidance display area showing the contents of the second game executable during the time saving state Dm5 and an acquisition content display area Dm9 for indicating the privilege acquired during the jackpot game are formed. In the second embodiment, "left-handed" indicating a left-handed game as the first game that can be executed during the time-saving state, and "short-handed" indicating a characteristic game property when performing a left-handed game during the time-saving state. A race against time” is displayed in the first guide display area Dm4.

In addition, in the second guidance display area Dm5, "right hitting" indicating a right hitting game as a second game that can be executed during the time saving state, and a characteristic game property when performing a right hitting game during the time saving state is displayed in the second guide display area Dm5. That is, in the second embodiment, as the game method during the time saving state, it is possible to select a left-handed game in which the time-saving state is settled in a short period of time and a right-handed game in which the time saving state can be enjoyed for a long period of time. The fact can be displayed immediately before the time saving state is set (during the ending period of the jackpot game). Therefore, at the timing when the time saving state is set, the player can be made to play a game with an arbitrary game method.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the major differences between the first game and the second game are displayed in characters in the first guidance display area Dm4 and the second guidance display area Dm5, and the game method during the time saving state is displayed by the player. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to display all the points of difference between the first game and the second game, or the points of difference may be displayed with pictures instead of letters. It may be configured to Also, as shown in FIG. 82(a), only the major differences are displayed in the first guidance display area Dm4 and the second guidance display area Dm5, and during the period during which the first guidance display area is displayed By selecting Dm4 or the second guide display area Dm5, detailed contents may be displayed.

By constructing in this way, it is suitable for the player who thinks that it is sufficient to roughly understand the game contents that differ depending on the game method, and for the player who wants to grasp the details of the game contents that differ depending on the game method. can also provide an appropriate display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG.82(b), the display content immediately after a time saving state was set is demonstrated. FIG.82(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen displayed immediately after a time saving state was set. As shown in FIG. 82(b), the second embodiment has a function of holding and storing the second special symbol lottery up to a predetermined number (four) as opposed to the first embodiment described above. In the second display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reservation for indicating the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is displayed. The symbol is a "triangle" mark, and four reserved symbols Dsf to fourth reserved symbol Dsi are displayed.

Similar to the above-described reserved symbols of the first special symbol (first reserved symbol Dsb to fourth reserved symbol Dse), this reserved symbol is in the order of reserved and stored (second The order in which the ball enters the entrance 640) is displayed in order from the first reserved pattern Dsf to the fourth reserved pattern Dsi, that is, from the left side to the right side of the second display area Ds2. In other words, both the reserved symbols (Dsb to Dse) of the first special symbols and the reserved symbols (Dsf to Dsi) of the second special symbols are displayed so as to gradually shift toward the running symbol Dsa. The player can easily grasp the pending symbol corresponding to the special symbol to be executed next from the display contents of each special symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), the character "?" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2 immediately after the time saving state is set. This is a display indicating that the player has not determined whether the current time saving state is to be executed in the first game (left-handed game) or in the second game (right-handed game). In addition, other than the display mode shown in FIG. 82(b), a display mode for indicating that the game method during the time saving state has not been determined may be displayed in the game guide display area Dm2. , or a character "left or right" may be displayed to indicate that it is a period in which any game of right-handed games may be played.

Although details will be described later, in the second embodiment, it is determined whether the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is the first ball entrance after the time saving state is set. is discriminated, and the game method arbitrarily selected by the player is discriminated based on the discrimination result. Therefore, during the period from when the time saving state is set until the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the character "?" is displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the display contents of FIG. is set, the variation pattern is set so that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information retained and stored ends. By configuring in this way, if the winning information for winning a big hit is included in the reserved ball of the special symbol, before the first game or the second game is determined and displayed (in the game guidance display area Dm2 The special symbol variation corresponding to the big win can be ended before the display mode for guiding the game method is displayed.

Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which a big win is won due to a special symbol variation on the side different from the game method selected by the player, it is possible to suppress the sense of incongruity given to the player.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82(b), the game method during the period in which the time saving state is set is configured to be displayed in the guide display area Dm2. may be configured to display the currently set game method in . That is, during the jackpot game, it is necessary to perform a display for guiding (instructing) a game method that is advantageous to the player. is set, regardless of which game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) the player selects, the same game result can be obtained. Instead of the guidance display area Dm2 for guiding (instructing) a game method that is advantageous to the player, the game method may be displayed in another area for displaying the current game method. In addition, when displaying in the guidance display area Dm2, the state of guiding (instructing) the game method to the player and the current game method (for example, by changing the display mode (for example, the color and shape of characters)). The game method selected by the player may be configured to be distinguishable from the situation in which the game method is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83(a), description will be given of the effect content when the first game (left-handed game) is executed in the state where the time saving state is set. FIG. 83(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the first game (left-handed game) is being executed. As shown in FIG. 83(a), when the first game is executed, a game result display 810 imitating a "lottery box" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the lower left of the main display area Dm. A game content display 811 for guiding the player to the game content of the first game is displayed on the side. Further, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, there is formed a remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 for suggesting the number of times the first game is finished.

That is, in the first game in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment (left-handed game in the time-saving state), a lottery is executed in accordance with the variation of the special symbol (lottery), and the result (1st grade to out) is displayed as the game result display 810, an effect display is executed to inform the lottery result of the special symbols. In addition, when the first game (left-handed game) is executed (set) as the game method during time saving, the characters "left-handed" indicating the game method of the first game are displayed in the game guide display area Dm2. .

When a specific game method (game direction) such as "left-handed" or "right-handed" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2, a game method (game direction) different from the displayed game method (game direction) is displayed. When the game is played in the method (game direction), an error notification is made to correct the game method (game direction). That is, after it is determined that the first game (left-handed game) is performed during the time-saving state, error notification is executed when the right-handed game is performed, and the second game (right-handed game) is performed during the time-saving state. After it is determined to be performed, error notification is executed when a left-handed game is performed. In addition, during the period in which neither game method is fixed in the time saving state, the error notification is not executed even if either the left-handed game or the right-handed game is played. there is

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), on the right side of the main display area Dm, a special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 for displaying the reserved number of the first special symbol (number of reserved designs), and the second special symbol A special figure 2 reservation number display area Dm7 that displays the number of reservations (number of reservations) is formed, and a special design ( 1st special symbol) is displayed (the number of retained balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Ds1). By configuring in this way, only the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of special symbols corresponding to the game method selected by the player can be emphasized and displayed (effect display).

In addition, the actual number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) corresponding to each special symbol is configured to be displayed in a dedicated special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm7. Therefore, the player can be informed of the exact number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) for each special symbol. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 83(a), the player can easily identify the current number of reservations "0" in the special figure 1 reservation number display area Dm6 and the special figure 2 reservation number display area Dm7. Although it is configured to be displayed in a size, the number of reserved symbols for each special pattern is displayed in a size that cannot be identified unless the player is conscious of it, or the number of reserved symbols is displayed with an identifier other than a number. should be configured to

Then, when the effect display corresponding to the left-handed game shown in FIG. 83(a) is executed, the lottery result is displayed in the main display area Dm as the effect result corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol. Based on the progress of each value (the number of variations of the special symbols and the number of wins of the small prize) for the time saving end conditions, the remaining number of times of saving time for suggesting the number of times of saving time is updated and displayed in a time saving times display area Dm10. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game during the time saving state by grasping the lottery result and the display contents of the time saving number display area Dm10.

On the other hand, when the right-handed game is selected as the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 83(b), a character 812 imitating a boy searches for a treasure box 813 for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. At the same time, the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved balls) of special symbols (second special symbols) corresponding to the selected game method (right-handed game) is displayed in the second display area Ds2. In addition, the characters "Right shot" are displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. In addition, regarding the content of the effect executed when this right-handed game is selected, the effect using the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is different from the effect content of the first embodiment described above. Other than that, they are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, among the effects executed when the right-handed game is selected during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the effects different from the effects of the first embodiment described above Explain the content. FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the game screen when the right-handed game is selected during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the second embodiment, it is configured to display whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied or the degree of expectation for winning a big hit with respect to the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In FIG. 84, the notice display mode 820 showing the characters "chance" for the first reserved symbol Dsf corresponding to the next special symbol variation is the third reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation after three variations. An advance notice display mode 821 showing the characters "end" is displayed for the symbol Dsh.

The advance notice display mode set for each reserved symbol is selected and displayed using a reserved display selection table 222aa, which will be described later.

Thus, by displaying the advance notice display mode for the reserved symbols, the player is motivated to obtain a big win by the time the special symbol variation is executed while predicting the special symbol variation that will end the time saving state. You will actually play games. Also, based on the content of the advance notice display mode, it is possible to grasp the period during which the time saving state does not end, and to execute the special symbol variation without anxiety.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, game contents during the time saving state in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram schematically showing the game contents during the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type among the game contents during the time saving state in the second embodiment. be. As shown in FIG. 85, the second embodiment is configured so as to be able to win a small prize in the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol is better than the above-described first embodiment. It is configured so that it is easier to win a small winning game (a small winning game executed corresponding to a small winning A) in which two kinds of winnings are more likely to be won than the second special symbol.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the above-described first embodiment is used, and when the time saving state is set, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than in the normal state. The opening operation control of the electric accessory 640a is varied so as to make it easier to enter the ball. That is, when the second game (right-handed game) is executed during the time-saving state, more balls than in the normal state are entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is executed more. be able to. On the other hand, even if the time-saving state is set, the ease with which a ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 does not change from the normal state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 85, description will be given while comparing the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game), which are game contents during the time saving state. First, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player during the time saving state (the number of prize balls that can be obtained by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) will be described. The number of prize balls in this time saving state is configured to be larger in the second game than in the first game. Then, when the first game is played during the time-saving state, only the same number of prize balls as when the normal state is set can be obtained, and the number of balls (holding balls) decreases during the time-saving state. A game that goes on is executed. On the other hand, when the second game is performed, it is possible to enter many balls into the second ball entrance 640, so that many prize balls can be obtained, and as a result, during the time saving state. A game of keeping (maintaining) a ball (holding ball) is executed.

The period during which the time saving state can be continuously set is shorter when the first game is performed than when the second game is performed. Specifically, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, as the end condition of the number of fluctuations that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the end condition of the number of fluctuations that is established when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times. and a variation count end condition established when the variation count of the second special symbol reaches 80 times, and when the first game is executed, the maximum special symbol variation is 30 times. Only, it is configured so that the time saving state is not set continuously.

Furthermore, the expectation of winning a big hit (including one type and two types) for each special symbol variation (lottery) performed during the time saving state is higher when the first game is performed. It is configured to be higher (larger) than when two games are played. To explain the degree of expectation for winning this big hit, in the present embodiment, a first special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery executed when the first game is executed) and a second special symbol lottery (second The probability of winning a big win (probability of winning per type) is set to be the same (1/200) between the lottery of special symbols executed when two games are executed). In other words, the first game and the second game are configured so that the degree of expectation for winning two types of hits is different.

To explain this point in detail, the lottery for the first special symbol executed during the first game is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is 1/10, and executed during the second game. The lottery for the second special symbol is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is 1/2. Then, the distribution of the types of small hits set in the case of winning the small prize is set so that the ratio of small prize A:small prize B is 9:1 when the small prize is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. It is In other words, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed by the first game, the small win A is executed with a probability of 1/11.

On the other hand, when a small win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the small win A is executed with a probability of 1/200. In this way, by differentiating the probability of winning a small hit and the sorting of the small win types set when winning a small win, the first game is more likely to have a special symbol change once than the second game. Based on the (lottery), it is configured so that the expectation of winning a big win (including winning one kind and winning two kinds) is high.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established when the first game is executed and the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established when the second game is executed are set differently. Specifically, when the first game is executed, the time-saving end condition that is established when the small hit A is won once is most likely to be established, and then the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times. It is set so that it becomes difficult to satisfy in the order of the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the small win B is won, and the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the small win B is won three times.

When the second game is executed, the time-saving end condition, which is established when the small win D is won 20 times, is most likely to be established, and then is established when the number of variations of the second special symbol reaches 80 times. It is set so that it becomes difficult to be satisfied in the order of the time saving end condition and the time saving end condition that is met when the small win A is won once.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the player selects a game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) during the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game. game can be executed.

In addition, as different game properties, a game property of aiming for a big win in a short period of time (first game) and a game property of aiming for a big win in a long period of time (second game) can be selected. In addition, as a technique for differentiating the game method, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set, and the case where the first game is performed and the case where the second game is performed are different. It constitutes so that time saving end conditions may be easily satisfied. Thereby, the period in which the time saving state is continuously set can be made different between the first game and the second game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 92, the details of the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 are changed. The difference is that Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 86(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86(a), in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, instead of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning random number 2 table 202aa is replaced with the first winning type selection table 202b. 1 per type selection 2 table 202ab is replaced with a variation pattern table 202d, the variation pattern 2 table 202ad is replaced with a time reduction grant table 202e, and the time reduction grant 2 table 202ae is replaced with a small hit type selection table 202f. The difference from the above-described first embodiment is that the type selection 2 table 202af is replaced with the release scenario table 202g and an release scenario 2 table 202ag is provided.

The first winning random number 2 table 202aa is different from the first winning random number table 202a of the first embodiment described above in that the value (first winning random number counter value C1) for determining small winning is changed. there is Here, the first per random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 87(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87(a), the first winning random number 2 table 202aa includes a special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 corresponding to the second special symbol. ,have.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1. This special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 is different from the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 of the above-described first embodiment in that a value for determining a small hit is added, and other elements are the same. Descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa defines "10 to 109" among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 as the small winning judgment value. That is, when determining (executing) the special symbol lottery using the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 (when performing the lottery of the first special symbol), it is determined to be a big hit at a rate of 1/200. , is configured to be determined as a small hit at a rate of 1/10.

Next, referring to FIG. 87(c), the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 will be described. FIG. 87(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2. As shown in FIG. 87(c), in the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2, among the values of the first winning random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as the big hit determination values, and "5 to 499" are the small winning values. It is specified as a judgment value. That is, when determining (executing) the lottery result of the special symbol using the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 (when executing the lottery of the second special symbol), it is determined to be a big hit at a rate of 1/200. , and is configured to be determined as a small hit at a rate of 1/2.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, in any case where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to win a small hit. Configure. Thereby, even if the first game (left-handed game) for executing the lottery for the first special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the second game (right-handed game) for executing the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Even so, it is possible to establish a condition for ending the number of wins, which is established based on the number of times a small win is won.

Further, since the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special pattern and the probability of winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special pattern can be set differently, the first game and the second game. The easiness of fulfillment of the condition for ending the number of times of winning can be varied between. Therefore, it is possible to provide various games in which the easiness of ending the time saving state is different between when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed.

Returning to FIG. 86(a), the description is continued. The first hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the first hit type selection table 202b of the first embodiment described above in that the presence or absence of the time saving state given to some jackpot types is changed. and the other elements are identical. Descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Here, the contents of the first winning type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIGS. 88(a) to (c). Figure 88 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first per type selection 2 table 202ab, FIG. 88 (b) is the content defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 88(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the first per type selection 2 table 202ab includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a special figure 2 jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol. It has a selection 2 table 202ab2, and various tables are selectively used according to the corresponding special symbols.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 is, as shown in FIG. In the range, "jackpot A" is defined as the jackpot type, "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in the range of "10 to 49", and "jackpot C" is defined as the jackpot type in the range of "50 to 99". is stipulated.

The ``jackpot A'' stipulated here is a jackpot type in which a round game executes 15 rounds of jackpot games, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. The "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the round game is 5 rounds, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. "Jack C" is a jackpot type with 5 rounds of round games, and if the game state at the time of winning (at the time of setting) is normal, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, and at the time of winning (at the time of setting ) is a time-saving state, the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, the second embodiment has a jackpot type (jackpot C) defined so as to change the game state set after the jackpot game ends according to the game state when the jackpot is won. ing. As a result, the player can be made aware of whether or not the jackpot has been won, the set jackpot type, and even the game state at the time of winning. can be suppressed.

Next, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2, as shown in FIG. D" is defined.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description is continued. The variation pattern 2 table 202ad is different from the variation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the specified contents of the variation pattern selected during the period in which the time saving state is set are different. . Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202ad, and FIG. 89(b) is defined in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 of the variation pattern 2 table 202ad. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically. Fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad, as shown in FIG. 89(a), normal variation pattern table 202d1 to be referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and refer to when the time saving state is set It has a time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2, and when setting the variation pattern of the special symbol (when executing the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39)) A variation pattern according to the game state It is configured to set a variation pattern (variation time) by referring to a table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89(b), the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 will be described. This time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 is different from the time-saving variation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment described above in the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined number of times after the end of the big win (after the end of the big win game). On the other hand, it differs in that it is configured to set a variation pattern (variation time) in which a specific time is defined.

Specifically, when the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit, the total time of 1 to 4 special symbol changes after the end of the big win is constant (3 seconds). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, until a predetermined period of time (4 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the jackpot game, a selection display (Fig. 82 (b ) is configured to display.

By configuring in this way, the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball (reserved pattern) which has already been acquired when entering the time saving state is displayed during the period when the selection display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it can be made easier to execute, a special symbol different from the special symbol variation (eg, first special symbol) mainly executed by the game method (eg, left-handed game) selected during the time saving state (eg, second 2 special symbol), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern (fluctuation time) set when winning (big win, small win) is won within 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the big win is changed to the special symbol after the end of the big win. The timing of stopping and displaying the lottery result of the special pattern in the fourth rotation after the end of the big win, the timing of stopping and displaying that the lottery result of the special pattern in the third rotation is winning, and The timing of stop-displaying that the lottery result of the special pattern in the second rotation is winning and the timing of stop-displaying that the lottery result of the special pattern in the first rotation is winning are all constant. are doing.

By configuring in this way, the selection display screen (see FIG. 82 (b)) displayed when the time saving state is set is displayed for a predetermined period (at least 3 seconds) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) corresponding to many reserved balls can be digested using the period in which the selection display screen is displayed.

Furthermore, when a win (small win, big win) is won immediately after the time saving state is set, a specific variation pattern is executed according to the number of special symbol variations after the time saving state is set. By doing so, if a win is won within a predetermined period after the end of the big win (within a predetermined number of special symbol variations (within 1 to 4 rotations)), the timing of informing the player of the winning result The timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol (third symbol) indicating ) is configured to be constant.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a variation pattern table that selects a special variation pattern for the variation pattern set in the period from when the time saving state is set until the variation of the special symbol is executed four times is used. However, for the period in which the special variation pattern is selected after the time saving state is set, other periods may be used, for example, the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (4 pieces), A special variation pattern may be selectable for the number of special symbol variations (8 times) corresponding to the total number (8) of the maximum number of held balls (4) of the second special symbol. However, the period from when the time saving state is set to when the special symbols are changed twice may be the target. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when a winning is won, a variation pattern dedicated to winning is set. It may be configured to determine whether or not, and set the variation pattern based on the determination result.

Specifically, if you win a hit, if you win a jackpot, and a small hit with a small hit A set (that is, there are two types of small hits that are easier to win than other small hit types. It may be configured to set a variation pattern dedicated to winning only when winning a set small winning. As a result, it is possible to make the player who notices that the special symbol variation based on the variation pattern (variation time) different from the normal one is executed have a great sense of expectation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), as the variation pattern (variation time) set for the special symbol variation after the fifth rotation (including the fifth rotation) after the time saving state is set, the first special The symbol is configured to set a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the second special symbol. As a result, if the variation of the special symbol can be executed continuously in the time saving state, the game (first game, left-handed game) that varies the first special symbol is the lottery (variation) of the special symbol ) can be executed many times in a short period of time.

In addition, in FIG. 89(b), as the content defined in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 that is referred to when the time saving state is set, the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot (the number of special symbol variations ) shows only one type of variation pattern for the lottery result of the special symbol after the 5th rotation (including the 5th rotation), but in fact, a counter (not shown) One of a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times is selected according to the value acquired from the loop counter whose value is updated, but detailed description thereof is omitted.

Thus, even in the variation pattern table configured to select one variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns, the first special symbol is set with a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the second special symbol. It is configured so that it is easy to Therefore, if the variation of the special symbol can be executed continuously during the time saving state, the game (first game, left-handed game) that varies the first special symbol is the lottery (variation) of the special symbol. can be performed in a short period of time. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time described above is likely to be set, in all of the selectable fluctuation patterns, in addition to the case where the first special symbol is set to a shorter fluctuation time than the second special symbol, the most The average variation time per variation when the variation time of the variation pattern that is easily selected is set to be shorter for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol, or when all the variation patterns are set according to the design value. is set so that the first special symbol is shorter than the second special symbol, or the shortest variation time that can be set according to the variation of the first special symbol is set according to the variation of the second special symbol. It also includes a configuration that is set to be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time that can be obtained. That is, when the player actually plays the pachinko machine 10 in the time saving state, the number of fluctuations per unit time is the second special symbol in the first game (left-handed game) that executes the fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is sufficient if it is set to be greater than

The time saving 2 table 202ae differs from the time saving giving table 202e of the above-described first embodiment in that the time saving end conditions (values set in various counters) set for each jackpot type are different, and the time saving The difference is that the type of the counter for setting the end condition value is changed (increased). Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents defined in the time saving provision 2 table 202ae will be described with reference to FIG. 88(d). FIG.88(d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the specification content of the time reduction provision 2 table 202ae. This time saving 2 table 202ae replaces the time saving medium counter 203k with the special figure 1 counter 203ad and the special figure 2 counter 203ae with respect to the above-described time saving giving table 202e, and replaces the small winning C counter 203p with the small winning D The difference is that a counter 203ac is provided and the values set (given) to the various counters are different.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the player selects the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game) as a plurality of games with different game characteristics during the time saving state. It is configured to be able to make it possible, and it is easy to be satisfied among a plurality of end conditions (time saving end conditions) for ending the time saving state when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed. Configured so that the termination conditions are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88(d), when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "100", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "100", The value of the small winning A counter 203m is defined to be "2", the value of the small winning B counter 203n to "100", and the value of the small winning D counter 203ac to "100". In the case of, "30" to the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad, "80" to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae, "1" to the value of the small hit A counter 203m, "3" to the value of the small hit B counter 203n ”, and to set the value of the small winning D counter 203ac to “20”.

Also, if the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is 40", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "70", the value of the small hit A counter 203m is "2", and the small hit The value of the B counter 203n is set to "5", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "40". ", "80" to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae, "1" to the value of the small hit A counter 203m, "3" to the value of the small hit B counter 203n, and "20" to the value of the small hit D counter 203ac specified to be set.

In other words, when the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to the "big hit A" is set, when the first game is executed, by winning the small hit A twice (the small hit A counter 203m When the value becomes 0, the time-saving end condition that is established becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be established, and when the second game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 100 times (especially When the value of the counter 203ae in FIG. 2 becomes 0, the time-saving end condition that is established becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be established.

In addition, when the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to the "big hit B" is set, when the first game is executed, by winning the small hit A once (the small hit A counter 203m When the value becomes 0), the time-saving end condition that is established becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be established, and when the second game is executed, by winning the small hit D 20 times (the value of the small win counter 203ac becomes 0), the time-saving end condition that is established becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be established.

When the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to the "big hit C" is set, when the first game is executed, by winning the small hit A twice (the value of the small hit A counter 203m When the time-saving end condition that is established becomes 0) becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be established, and when the second game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 70 times (special figure 2 When the value of the counter 203ae becomes 0), the time-saving end condition that is established becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be established, and when the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the "jackpot D" is set, the above-mentioned " The same time-saving state (time-saving end condition) as the jackpot B" is set.

That is, in a state in which the time saving state is set, by differentiating the game method to be executed (selected) (by the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game)), establishment It is possible to vary the time-saving end conditions that are easy to do. Therefore, the player can be made to play a different game as a game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot, the time saving end conditions (values set in various counters) are configured to be different, and are established when the same game (for example, right-handed game) is played during time saving. It is configured so that the time-saving end conditions that are easy to do are made different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time.

In this embodiment, four types of jackpots are provided as jackpot types set when winning a jackpot, but the number of jackpot types is not limited to this, and five or more jackpot types are provided. can be In this case, a plurality of jackpot types having the same game contents (opening period, number of round games, interval period between rounds, ending period) of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won are provided, and time-saving end conditions are provided for each jackpot type. should be configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the time saving state (the content of the time saving end condition) set after the jackpot game ends based on the content of the jackpot game to be executed.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88(d), when the first game is executed than when the second game is executed, the time-saving end condition is likely to be established in a shorter period of time. Configure. Thereby, the 1st game can shorten the period (time shortening) during which the time saving state is continuously set.

In addition, in the second embodiment, executing the first game makes it easier to obtain two kinds of hits than executing the second game. It is configured so that it is easy to win a prize. By configuring in this way, the first game is a game that provides the player with the game property of aiming for two types in a short period of time, and the second game is a game that aims for one type in a short period of time. It can be a game that provides sexuality to the player.

Therefore, by the player selecting the game method (first game, second game) to be executed during the time saving state, games with different game characteristics can be executed, and the player is provided with a game that does not get bored. be able to. In addition, in the second embodiment, the game period during the time saving state is different between the first game and the second game, so that the player can select the game method according to the period in which the game can be played. It is possible to provide a suitable game for a suitable player.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, even if any game method is selected during the time saving state, the jackpot probability during the time saving state (the probability of winning a jackpot by lottery of special symbols, The sum of the probabilities that the ball passes through a specific area and wins a big hit) is made substantially the same (including an error that the player does not notice (for example, an error of 10% or less)), so for any player You can play games with peace of mind.

In the second embodiment, no matter which jackpot type is set, in the first game and the second game, the time-saving end condition is set so that the player does not have an advantage or disadvantage. As another configuration, for example, when a predetermined jackpot type is set, a time-saving end condition is set so that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the predetermined jackpot type is set. When a specific jackpot type is set, the time saving end condition may be set so that the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game.

By configuring in this way, a game method advantageous to the player can be set according to the set jackpot type (executed jackpot game), so that the interest in the game can be improved. It should be noted that, in the case where the game method (first game, second game) advantageous to the player is configured to be different according to the jackpot type, a predetermined distribution rate is considered for all jackpot types. It is preferable to configure so that the player is not disadvantaged or advantageous when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed. As a result, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to prevent the player from always selecting only one game method.

In addition, a storage means for storing the jackpot type (time saving state) set during a predetermined period (for example, the period after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) is provided, and the contents stored in the storage means ( A reporting means for reporting (displaying) the time saving history to the player may be provided. Thereby, based on the time saving state set in the past, the time saving state to be set in the future can be predicted, and the game method can be selected. In addition, by using the performance display (jackpot performance display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, the player is notified of a suggestive mode suggesting a game method that is advantageous to the player. can be

Returning to FIG. 86, the description is continued. The small hit type selection 2 table 202af is different from the small hit type selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above in that it is possible to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). , The difference is that the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202af will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 90 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202af, Figure 90 (b) is the content defined in the special figure 1 small type selection 2 table 202af1 FIG. 90(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 small per type selection 2 table af2.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), the small per type selection 2 table 202af is a special figure 1 small per type selection 2 table 202af1 that is referred to when executing the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), It has a special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2 that is referred to when executing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

The special figure 1 small per type selection 2 table 202af1, as shown in FIG. ” is defined as “90 to 99”, and “small hit B” is defined as a small hit type.

Here, the small hit type "small hit A" is the same as the "small hit A" of the above-described first embodiment, and when V passes (when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, 2 "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type of the jackpot to be set (executed) when the seed win is won). "Small hit B" is the same as the "small hit B" of the first embodiment described above, and when passing V (when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, when two types of hits are obtained ), "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type of the jackpot set (executed).

In addition, the special symbol 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2 is, as shown in FIG. , “1 to 99”, “small hit D” is defined as the small hit type.

Here, the small hit type “small hit D” is a small hit type in which a small hit game is executed with the lowest expectation for two types among a plurality of small hit types (about 5%), and V passage A "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type of the jackpot to be set (executed) at time (when the ball passes through the specific area during the small win game, when two wins are won). In other words, it is the most disadvantageous small win for the player.

The opening scenario 2 table 202ag is different from the opening scenario table 202g of the above-described first embodiment in that an opening scenario corresponding to the small win D is defined instead of the opening scenario corresponding to the small win C. are otherwise identical. In the open scenario corresponding to the small win D, the ON period of the flow path solenoid 650k is shortened among the open scenarios corresponding to the small win C, making it more difficult to pass V (pass the ball to a specific area). The only difference is that the release scenario set at the time of passing V (at the time of acquisition of 2 types) is changed from 15 rounds to 5 rounds, so detailed illustration is omitted.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86(b). FIG. 86(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86(b), in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment, a small hit D counter 203ac is provided in place of the small hit C counter 203p, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, and a special symbol. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab, a special figure 1 counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 counter 203ae are added.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the first implementation failure described above. Since it is provided for the second special symbol, detailed description is omitted. It is variably set when the lottery (fluctuation) of special symbols is executed.

The small hit D counter 203ac is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small win set with the small win D as the small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process 2 (S1554 in FIG. 98), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612 in FIG. 98: Yes), it is defined in the time reduction grant 2 table 202ae A value is set (S1653 in FIG. 98).

Then, in the small hit time saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 94) of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94), the small hit won this time When it is determined that the small hit type is the small hit D, the value of the counter is decremented by 1 (not shown). When it is determined that the value of the small hit D counter 203ac after the subtraction is 0, the time saving end condition is established, so the normal state is set as the game state. In addition, in the second embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions are set for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the termination condition is met), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end conditions (fifth time-saving end conditions) referring to the value of the small hit D counter 203ac are met, the small hit D counter Since the value of 203ac is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated after the time saving state is terminated.

The special figure 1 counter 203ad is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol executed during the period when the time saving state is set, and ends the time saving state when the time saving state is set. A value corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the first special pattern set as a termination condition for making the game is set, and the set value is subtracted by 1 each time the first special pattern fluctuates during the time saving state. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value of the counter is 0, processing for ending the time saving state is executed.

The special figure 2 counter 203ae is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol executed during the period when the time saving state is set, and ends the time saving state when the time saving state is set. A value corresponding to the number of times of variation of the second special pattern set as a termination condition for making the second special pattern is set, and 1 is subtracted from the set value each time the second special pattern fluctuates during the time saving state. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value of the counter is 0, processing for ending the time saving state is executed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the end condition (time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state is established based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. We have a time limit condition. As a result, when the first game (the game in which only the first special symbol is varied) and the second game (the game in which only the second special symbol is varied) are executed, the time-saving end conditions dedicated to each can be established. can be

In addition, in the second embodiment, by providing a special figure 1 counter 203ad and a special figure 2 counter 202ae, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol are configured to be measured. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the number of fluctuations of special symbols executed during the time saving state (total fluctuation obtained by adding the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol number of times) (corresponding to the time saving counter 203k of the first embodiment), and means for measuring either the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (for example, special figure 1 counter 203ae), and by executing the process of subtracting the special figure 1 variation number from the total number of variations, the number of variations of the special figure 2 (second special symbol) may be calculated. good.

By configuring in this way, among the time-saving end conditions, the end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol as the end condition of the number of fluctuations established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the second special symbol A termination condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols and a termination condition established based on the total number of fluctuations of the special symbols can be managed using two counters. In addition, in order to achieve the same effect, the value measured by the special figure 1 counter 203ae of the second embodiment (subtracted value) and the measured value of the special figure 2 counter 203af (value subtracted) are added may be configured to calculate the total number of fluctuations.

Next, contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. As shown in FIG. 91(a), the ROM 222 of the second embodiment has a status display selection table 222b and a final status display selection table 222b in contrast to the ROM 222 (see FIG. 26(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a pending display selection table 222aa is provided instead of the table 222c.

In addition, RAM223 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the RAM223 (see FIG. 26 (b)) in the first embodiment described above, provisional hit determination flag 223h, provisional time saving end Flag 223j, time-saving lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, time-saving before-end fluctuation flag 223n are deleted, special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223aa, right-handed flag 223ab, left-handed flag 223ac, time-saving start flag 223ad , in that a time-saving counter 223ae is provided. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 91(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 91(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

The reserved display selection table 222aa is for the reserved design (see FIG. 84(a)) displayed on the third design display device 81 according to the reserved ball of the special design acquired during the time saving state, and the prize for the reserved design. It is referred to when selecting the display mode (see FIG. 84 (a)) that informs the player of the pre-determination result of information, whether the time saving state ends (update status of time saving end condition), And, it is intended to suggest (notify) the player in advance the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is appropriate.

Here, with reference to FIG. 92, the contents defined in the pending display selection table 222aa will be described. FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pending display selection table 222aa. In the second embodiment, the same display mode as the state display mode set for the special symbol variation being executed in the first embodiment described above, so as to execute the suspension mode effect to be set for the suspension symbol (see FIG. 84).

Suspension display selection table 222aa is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the suspension mode effect, provisional working hours information stored in the temporary working hours information update area 223i (tentatively updated based on the result of the look-ahead process Various holding display modes are defined based on the obtained time saving information) and the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o. Note that the values indicating the pending display mode described in the pending display selection table 222aa are the same as the state display modes of the first embodiment described above, and the display modes shown with reference to FIG. Since it is defined correspondingly, its detailed description is omitted.

Specific description of the content defined in the pending display selection table 222aa, special The lottery result of the pattern is "big hit", and at the stage before this process is executed, the information indicating the big hit (hit information) is not already stored in the provisional time saving information update area 223i (hit information "none"), and pre-end information indicating that the pre-end condition for time saving is satisfied is stored (pre-end information "yes"), the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to The reserved display mode "3" is defined in the range of "69", and the reserved display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

In addition, when the result of the winning/failure determination is "big hit", the information about the previous win is "none", and the information before the end is "none", the value of the state effect counter 223o falls within the range of "0 to 49". The reserved display mode "3" is defined, the reserved display mode "1" is defined in the range "50 to 69", and "9" is defined in the range "70 to 99".

Further, when the information on the hit is "yes", regardless of the presence or absence of the information on the change before the end, the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". However, in the range of "70 to 99", the reserved display mode "9" is defined.

In this way, the winning information corresponding to the pending pattern for which the pending display mode is to be set this time, and the winning information already stored in the provisional time saving information update area 223i (obtained earlier than the winning information to be targeted this time Winning information), and by variably setting the pending display mode according to the result of the judgment result of the special symbol included in and the progress of the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol, It can be suggested in advance whether the time saving state will end or not.

Therefore, when the reservation display mode which is likely to end the time saving state is displayed, the game can be motivated to win a big win before the reservation display mode is displayed. In addition, by making it possible to set multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, it is possible to suppress the sudden end of the time-saving state in amusement machines that make it difficult to understand the period during which the time-saving state is set to continue. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

Next, in the case where the win/loss determination result of this time is "small win A", the previous win information is "no", the pre-end information is "yes", and the value of the state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49". The pending display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the pending display mode "5" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the pre-end information is "none" When the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49", the pending display mode "7" is in the range of "50 to 69", and the pending display mode "7" is in the range of "70 to 99". "9" is specified in the range.

Further, when the information on the hit is "yes", regardless of the presence or absence of the information on the change before the end, the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". However, in the range of "70 to 99", the reserved display mode "9" is defined.

On the other hand, in the case where the current win/loss determination result is "small win B, D", the previous win information is "no", and the pre-end information is "yes", the value of the state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49". ", the pending display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the pending display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the pre-end information is "none" In this case, the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49" for the suspended display mode "2", and in the range of "50 to 69" for the suspended display mode "4" and "70 to 99". "9" is defined in the range of

Further, when the information on the hit is "yes", regardless of the presence or absence of the information on the change before the end, the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". However, in the range of "70 to 99", the reserved display mode "9" is defined.

When the result of this win/fail judgment is "miss", the information on previous win is "no", and the information before the end is "yes", the value of the state effect counter 223o is displayed in the range of "0 to 49". In the case where mode "1" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", pending display mode "4" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the pre-end information is "none", When the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69", the reserved display mode is defined as "1", and in the range of "70 to 99", "9" is defined.

Further, when the information on the hit is "yes", regardless of the presence or absence of the information on the change before the end, the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". However, in the range of "70 to 99", the reserved display mode "9" is defined.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the pending display selection table 222aa is described so that the same display mode is selected for the same conditions as the situation display mode of the first embodiment. there is In addition, if the winning information obtained earlier includes information about winning a jackpot (result of winning or failing), the display modes that can be set (selected) for subsequent reserved symbols are restricted (reserved display Only mode "9" (see FIG. 15) is selected). Therefore, when it is configured to select and display a reserved display mode for each of a plurality of reserved symbols, it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause discomfort.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92, in the second embodiment, it is configured to change the display mode with a high probability with respect to the acquired winning information (reserved symbols). For example, the pending display mode selected in the pending display selection table 222aa, the determination means for determining whether or not to actually display, and the display mode of the pending design is varied according to the determination result of the determination means Alternatively, if the obtained value of the state effect counter 223o is within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 39"), the suspension display mode may not be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the future game content (whether or not the time saving state has been completed, whether or not a jackpot has been won) from being easily grasped only by the display mode of the reserved symbols.

Furthermore, regardless of the information included in the acquired winning information (reserved pattern), the reserved display mode "9" is selected with a predetermined probability, so that the future game can be played only by the display mode of the reserved pattern. It is possible to further suppress the content (whether or not the time saving state has been completed, or whether or not the jackpot has been won) from being easily grasped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 91(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

When the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa receives a command related to the second special symbol among the reserved ball number commands transmitted from the main control device 110, the second special symbol according to the contents indicated by the command It is a counter for updating the number of reserved balls in the design. The detailed configuration is the same as the configuration of the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a except that the target command is changed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The right-handed flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that it is a period for the player to execute a right-handed game (second game). game) is to be executed. This right hitting flag 223ab is, in the game state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101 (a)) executed in the winning information related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100), the received winning information is special figure 1 (first 1 special symbol) related winning information (that is, special figure 2 (second special symbol) related winning information) when it is determined (S3002 in FIG. 101 (a): No), is set to ON be.

Then, it is referred to in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101(b)) and the pending display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to OFF when the time saving state ends.

The left-handed flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that it is a period for the player to execute a right-handed game (second game). game) is to be executed. This left-handed flag 223ac indicates that the received winning information is the special figure 1 (first 1 special symbol) When it is determined that the winning information is related (S3002 in FIG. 101(a): Yes), it is set to ON.

Then, it is referred to in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101(b)) and the pending display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to OFF when the time saving state ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the game method (first game or second game) when the time saving state is set can be selected by adjusting the direction in which the player actually shoots the ball. It is configured as follows. The game method selected by the player is determined as an appropriate game method during the time saving state, and the game method not selected by the player is determined as an inappropriate game method during the time saving state. .

In addition, in the second embodiment, the ball entrance where the ball first enters after the time saving state is set is in the left-handed area (area where the ball can flow down (pass) when performing a left-handed game). The first ball inlet 64 (see FIG. 2) provided, or the second ball inlet provided in the right-handed area (area where the ball can flow down (pass) when playing a right-handed game) 640 is determined by analyzing the winning command transmitted from the main controller 110, and based on the determination result, an appropriate game method during the time saving state is determined. In the set state, it is sufficient to determine whether or not an appropriate game is being played, and to execute an error notification when an appropriate game is not being played. Configurations other than the configuration of the form may be used.

For example, an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided, and during a jackpot game or during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, the game method in the time saving state is It may be configured to select by operating the operation means, and to set an appropriate game method when the ball passes through the game area corresponding to the game method selected by the operation means. As a result, the game method desired by the player can be set as an appropriate game method more reliably.

Also, while the time saving state is set, the player may variably set an appropriate game method. By configuring in this way, by varying the game method while predicting the update status of the time saving end condition, the player can actively select a game (to set the game method) so as to be in a more advantageous time saving state. game) can be performed. In this case, it is set by operating the operation means to change the game method, and during the game method variable period, any game (the first game, the second game) is executed, which is inappropriate. It is good to configure so that it is not determined as a game. As a result, it is possible to smoothly perform the operation for changing the game method during the time saving state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when one ball enters a specific ball entrance, an appropriate game method is set according to the type of ball entrance into which the ball enters. However, for example, after the time-saving state is set, an appropriate game method may be set according to the type of ball entrance into which a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls enter. As a result, it is possible to prevent a wrong game method from being set by causing a ball to be shot into a game area corresponding to an undesired game method due to an erroneous operation.

The time saving start flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the time saving state has been set as the game state, and indicates that the time saving state has been set by being set to ON. This time saving start flag 223ad determines that a time saving related command has been received (S2215 in FIG. 99: Yes) in the command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) described later, and further, the received time saving related command is When it is determined that it is the time saving setting information (information indicating that the time saving state has been set) (S2252 in FIG. 99: Yes), it is set to ON (S2253 in FIG. 99).

Then, it is referred to in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) (S3301 in FIG. 104), and 4000 is set to the value of the short time counting counter 223ae described later (S3302 in FIG. 104) when it is determined to be ON. ), the flag is set to OFF (S3303 in FIG. 104). That is, the time saving start flag 223ad is used to determine that the time saving state has been set on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and dedicated processing (time saving state is set).

The time-saving time counter 223ae is a counter for continuing the elapsed period (elapsed time) after the time-saving state is set. When the time-saving state is set, a predetermined value is set, and the value is subtracted. By doing so, the elapsed period after the time saving state is set is determined. The time saving counter 223ae has a value of 4000 when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301 in FIG. 104: Yes) in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104). is set (S3302).

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the game flow in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 and FIG. 28 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (during the normal state), the left-handed game is performed and the special 1 game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 is executed. be done. Here, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of the jackpot won.

Specifically, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. It is configured to later shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and if a big win is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the big win is completed. It consists of This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not enter a ball into the second ball entrance 640 even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state (during a normal game). (difficult to do), the act of executing the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state is regarded as cheating, and the player who committed the cheating is not allowed to play an advantageous game. This is a measure for As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery (game) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol can be performed in the time saving state. Therefore, there is a risk that the second special symbol lottery may be conducted by cheating. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to suppress the lottery for the second special symbol from being performed due to fraud.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since it does not have a configuration to hold and store the winning information of the second special symbol (winning information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640), for example, time saving During the state (during the state where the electric accessory 640a is likely to be moved to the projecting position), the winning information of the second special symbol is retained and stored, and based on the retained and stored winning information, the second special symbol is drawn during the normal state. (variation) is never executed. As a result, when a normal game is played, it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the opening operation (projection operation) of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the second ball entrance 640. Since it becomes possible to make it possible, a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 is performed.

Here, if a small win is won by the second special symbol lottery, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small winning game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (the ball passes through a specific area), a jackpot game is started. In this embodiment, when a big winning game is set (executed) via a small winning game, after the big winning game ends, a time saving state is set as a gaming state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the big win via the small winning game from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this embodiment, by the lottery of the second special symbol, depending on the small hit type (small hit A to C) set when winning the small hit, the ball can pass through the specific area during the small hit game. It is configured to execute small winning games with different characteristics (possibility of V switch 650e3 detecting a ball).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol (first special symbol or second 2 special design) The number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) reaches the specified number of fluctuations (100 times) The condition for ending the number of fluctuations (1st time reduction end condition) and the lottery of special patterns (2nd special design) As a result, the operation count end condition (second time reduction end condition) that is established when the number of times of winning the small win (the number of times of operation of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small win) reaches the specified number of operations , is set.

In addition, although details will be described later, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small winning type (small winning game to be executed) set when winning a small winning. there is

Then, in the state (situation) where the time saving state is set, before the first time saving end condition or the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the special symbol jackpot lottery is elected (per type Winning), or winning a small win in a lottery of special patterns, and passing a ball through a specific area during a small winning game according to the winning small win (small winning game according to the small winning type) to win a big win. When acquired (acquired per 2 types), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of special symbol fluctuations) or the second before acquiring one type or two types When any of the time-saving end conditions (end condition corresponding to small winning (operation of V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the game state is shifted (set) from the time-saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way has the possibility of ending the time saving state ( It is possible to provide the player with both the possibility that the second time-saving end condition is satisfied) and the possibility of winning two kinds of prizes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game (lottery for the second special symbol) to be executed during the time saving state can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the time saving state is set and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state, that is, the state in which the left-handed game is performed, the number of reserved balls (number of reserved memories) of the first special symbol is the upper limit. A jackpot is won when the number is four (4), and a jackpot is won in ``first special symbol variation (lottery) during the time saving state'' that can be executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Even so, it is possible to suppress providing the player with a result that is disadvantageous to the player.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the second embodiment>
The control processing in the second embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in the contents of the control processing in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 . Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 98. FIG. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) is changed to the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 94) in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, and executed in the special symbol variation processing. Time saving number of times update processing (see FIG. 42) instead of time saving number of times update processing 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed, and starting winning processing (see FIG. 43) is changed to starting winning processing 2 (see FIG. 96), The difference is that the prefetching process 2 (see FIG. 97) is executed in place of the prefetching process (see FIG. 44) executed in the starting winning process. Furthermore, the difference is that the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 98), and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154). In this special symbol variation processing 2, the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) of the above-described first embodiment acquires the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab and the time saving number update processing It is different in that it executes the time saving number update process 2 (see FIG. 95) instead.

When this special symbol variation process 2 (S154) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are performed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are changing (S202), and if the display modes of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are not changing (S202 : No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are acquired (S251), and the acquired value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab It is determined whether (N2) is greater than 0 (S252).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is not 0 (S252: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (S253), and changed by calculation. A special symbol 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is set (S254). After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S254, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (S255). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S252, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38) and Similarly, the processes of S206 to S210 are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S202: Yes), S211 to S213 similar to the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38) process is executed. In the processing of S213, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit (S213: Yes), the processing from S214 to S218 is executed in the same manner as the above-described special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38), and this processing is performed. exit.

In the processing of S213, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S213: No), the time saving number update processing (see FIG. 42) of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment Instead, the time saving frequency update process 2 is executed (S271). This time saving frequency update process 2 (S271) is a process for updating the time saving frequency and setting the game state to the normal state, similarly to the time saving frequency update process (see FIG. 42). The details of this time saving frequency update process 2 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the time saving number update process 2 (S271) ends, this process ends after executing the processes of S220, S221 and S218 in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the time reduction number update process 2 (S271) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving frequency update process 2 (S271). This time saving number update process 2 (S271) subtracts the time saving number of times also for the fluctuation of the first special symbol with respect to the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above, and the time saving end condition The difference is that it is determined whether or not is established, and the rest of the processing is the same. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the time saving number update process 2 (S271) is executed, the processes of S601 and S602 are executed in the same manner as the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above. When the processing of S602 is finished, it is determined whether the variation of this time is the variation of the special figure 2 (S651). If it is determined that the variation of this time is the variation of the special figure 2 (S651: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is subtracted by 1 (S652), and the process proceeds to S653. On the other hand, in the processing of S651, if it is determined that the current variation is not the variation of the special figure 2 (that is, the variation of the special figure 1) (S651: No), the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is 1 Subtract (S654) and proceed to the processing of S653.

In the process of S653, to set the remaining time reduction number of times command indicating the value of various counters (S653), then, during the time reduction counter 203k, special figure 1 counter 203ad and special figure 2 counter 203ae either value is 0 Determine (S655). When it is determined that none of the values of the time saving counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad and the special figure 2 counter 203ae are not 0 (S655: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S655, if it is determined that the value of any one of the time saving counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0 (S651: Yes), the above-described first embodiment The processing from S605 to S607 is executed in the same manner as the time saving number update processing (see FIG. 42), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 96, the contents of the starting winning process 2 (S155) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting winning process 2 (S155). In this starting winning process 2 (S155), in addition to the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning). When there is a start winning to the entrance 640, processing for holding the values indicated by the various random number counters and processing for prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol from the values shown by the reserved various random number counters. is added, and the prefetching process 2 is executed instead of the prefetching process (see FIG. 44).

When the starting winning process 2 (S155) is started, first, the process of S701 is executed in the same manner as the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S701, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the processes of S702 and S703 described above are executed.

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 4 If not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S753. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than 4 (S703: Yes), from S704 described above The process of S706 is executed.

When the processing of S706 is completed, it is next determined whether the present time is during time saving or during a special symbol jackpot (S751). If it is determined that the current time is during time saving or during the special symbol jackpot (S751: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of S751, when it is determined that the present time is not during time saving and during the special symbol jackpot (S751: No), prefetching process 2 (S752) is executed, and the process proceeds to S753.

In the processing of S701, if the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is not detected (S701: No), there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b When the value (N1) is the maximum value of 4 (S703: No), and when the process of S752 is completed, the process of S753 is executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. (S753). In the process of S753, similarly to the process of S701, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S753: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is acquired (S754), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the number counter 203ab is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S755).

Then, if there is no ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (S753: No), or even if there is a winning prize to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab If it is not less than 4 (S755: No), the process proceeds to prefetching process 2 (S752). On the other hand, if there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S753: Yes) and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is less than 4 (S755: Yes), special symbol 2 reserved The value (N2) of the ball number counter 203ab is incremented by 1 (S756). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation is set (S757).

The special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is also stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in the same way as the special figure 1 reserved ball number command set in the process of S705, and executed by the MPU 201 It is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab from the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, and saves the extracted value as the special symbol 2 in the RAM 223. Stored in the reserved ball number counter 223aa.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S757, each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the first area out of the vacant reservation areas (special figure 2 reservation first area to special figure 2 reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203aa of the RAM 203 (S758). In the process of S758, as in the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 2 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 2 reservation 2nd area, if the value is 2, the special figure 2 reservation 3rd area, if the value is 3, the special figure 2 reservation 4th area , respectively, as the first area.

Next, when the process of S758 ends, the process proceeds to the prefetching process 2 (S752) and ends this process.

Next, contents of the prefetching process 2 (S752) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the contents of prefetching process 2 (S752). The look-ahead process 2 (S752) in the second embodiment is different from the look-ahead process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment described above. 1 random number table 202a, special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and fluctuation pattern table 202d (normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 or time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2) instead of 1st random number 2 table 202aa, special figure 1 Jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, special figure 1 small per type selection 2 table 202af1, and variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving variation pattern table 202ad2), lottery in the second special symbol The only difference is the addition of look-ahead of the result, otherwise they are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the prefetching process 2 (S752) is executed, first, the process of S801, which is the same as the prefetching process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment described above, is executed. In the process of S801, if there is no new winning at the first ball entrance 64 (S851: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 (S851: Yes), special symbol 1 random number 2 table aa1, special figure 1 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab1, special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table Based on 202af1 and fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal fluctuation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving fluctuation pattern table 202ad2), the lottery result, big hit type, small hit type, and fluctuation pattern are acquired in advance (S852).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the variation pattern obtained in the process of S852 is set (S853), and the process proceeds to S854. On the other hand, in the process of S851, even if there is no new winning at the first ball entrance 64 (S851: No), the process proceeds to S854.

In the process of S854, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the second ball entrance 640 (S854). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning at the second ball entrance 640 (S854: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the second entrance 640 (S854: Yes), special symbol 2 random number 2 table aa2, special figure 2 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab2, special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table Based on 202af2 and fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal fluctuation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving fluctuation pattern table 202ad2), the lottery result, big hit type, small hit type, and fluctuation pattern are acquired in advance (S855).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the variation pattern obtained in the process of S855 is set (S856), and this process is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554). This jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is executed by replacing the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It is a process that is different from the above-described jackpot control processing (see FIG. 52) in that the time saving content (time saving end condition) set at the end of jackpot control (end timing of ending effect) is different. .

When the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is started, first, the same processes as S1601 to S1612 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) are executed. If it is determined (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning is during working hours (S1651). When it is determined that the jackpot winning is during working hours (S1651: Yes), the process proceeds to S1653. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot winning time is not during the time saving (that is, it is in the normal game state) (S1651: No), it is determined whether the special game being executed was the jackpot C (5R time saving no jackpot). It discriminates (S1652).

When it is determined that the jackpot winning is in the normal game state (S1651: No), and when it is determined that it is not the jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot) in the process of S1652 (S1613: No), or in the process of S1651 When it is determined that the jackpot winning time is in the time saving (S1651: Yes), the time saving end condition corresponding to each jackpot type is set based on the time saving 2 table 202ae (see FIG. 88 (d)) (S1653 ).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot winning is in the normal gaming state (S1651: No), and when it is determined in the process of S1652 that it is the jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot) (S1652: Yes), or S1653 When the process of (1) ends, the same processes as S1617 to S1620 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) described above are executed, and this process ends.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105, control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the command determination process (see FIG. 56) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 99), and the winning information related process (see FIG. 57) is changed from the above-described first embodiment. The point of replacing the winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 100), the point of replacing the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) with the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 103), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) is changed to the effect setting process 2 (Fig. 104), detailed descriptions of various counter update processes (see Fig. 105(a)) are added, and effects update process (see Fig. 105(b)) are detailed. The only difference is that a special explanation is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S2163). This command determination process 2 (S2163) is different from the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the related processing (see FIG. 57) is changed to the winning information related processing 2 (see FIG. 100), and the content of the processing to be executed when a time saving related command is received is changed. are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S2163 of FIG. 99) is executed, the same processes of S2201 to S2209 as the command determination process (S2113 of FIG. 56) of the first embodiment are executed. In the process of S2209, if it is determined that the command received this time is the winning information command (S2209: Yes), the winning information related process 2 is executed (S2251), and then the process proceeds to S2217. Details of the winning information related process 2 executed in the process of S2251 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the winning information command (S2209: No), then the same command determination process as in the first embodiment (S2113 in FIG. 56) is performed. Execute the processing of S2211 to S2215, and in the processing of S2215, if it is determined that the command received this time is a time-saving related command (S2215: Yes), then the content of the time-saving related command received is time-saving setting It is determined whether the information is information transmitted from the main controller 110 when the time saving state is newly set (S2252).

In the process of S2252, if it is determined that the information received this time is the time saving setting information (S2252: Yes), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S2253), and the time saving stored in the time saving information update area 223g Information is updated (S2254), and the process proceeds to S2217. In addition, in the process of S2254, the value used as time saving end conditions is set to various counters based on the information contained in the time saving related command received this time. Specifically, for example, a command (jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 98) including time saving setting information transmitted at the timing of the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot B Time saving corresponding to the contents set in S1614 command indicating information) is received, referring to the time saving 2 table 202ae, the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "30", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "80", the small hit A counter The value of 203m is set to "1", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is set to "3", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "20" (see FIG. 88(d)).

Returning to FIG. 99, the description continues. After completing the processing of S2254, the processing of S2217 is then executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2252, if it is determined that the information included in the time-saving related command received this time is not the time-saving setting information (S2252: No), that is, the information included in the time-saving related command received this time is If it is information (time saving update information) that updates the time saving information (number of fluctuations and small winning times) corresponding to the time saving end condition (bring it closer to the time saving end condition), the information on the time saving end condition has already been set. Since the time saving game has been started, the process of S2253 for setting the time saving start flag to ON is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2254.

In the process of S2254 in this case, the time saving update information is read out of the plurality of information included in the time saving related command received this time, and the process of updating the target working time saving information is executed. In addition, when the content indicated by the time saving information after updating indicates that the remaining period until the time saving end condition is satisfied is shorter than a predetermined period, that fact is stored in the time saving information update area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the details of the winning information related process 2 (S2251) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information related process 2 (S2251). This winning information related process 2 (S2251) is different from the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) of the above-described first embodiment. The difference is that the content of the processing is different and the processing for setting the game method (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) during the time saving state is added. ing. Since other elements are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning information related process 2 (S2251) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f (information indicating the currently set game state) is read (S2301), and the read information is read. It is determined whether the game state indicated by is a game state indicating a time saving state (whether it is during time saving) (S2302). By the processing of S2302, when it is determined that the present is not in the time saving (S2302: No), after executing the same processing as S2312 of the winning information related processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 57), S2311 to process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the currently set game state is the time saving state (S2302: Yes), then the game state setting process is executed (S2351). This game state setting process (S2351) determines whether the game method selected by the player in the current time saving state is the first game (left-handed game) or the second game (right-handed game). , It is intended to execute a process for setting a suitable game in the time-saving state, the detailed content will be described later with reference to Figure 101 (a).

After finishing the processing of S2351, next, the game content determination processing is executed (S2352). This game content determination process (S2352) is for executing a process for determining whether an appropriate game is being executed during the time saving state. For details, see FIG. will be described later. After the process of S2352 is completed, the pending display setting process is subsequently executed (S2353), the process proceeds to the process of S2311, and the process ends.

The pending display setting process (S2353) executes processing for setting the display mode of the pending symbols displayed in response to the winning information command received this time based on the winning information included in the winning information command received this time. The detailed content will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101(a), the contents of the game state setting process (S2351) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 of the figure 100) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state setting process (S2351). In this game state setting process (S2351), the game method (game direction) to be executed during the current time saving state is set based on the winning information included in the first winning information command received after the time saving state is set. Execute the process for

When the gaming state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101(a)) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001). This time saving start flag 223ad is, in the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99), when it is determined that the time saving setting information has been received (S2252 in FIG. 99: Yes), that is, when the time saving state is newly set It is set to ON (S2253 in FIG. 99). That is, in the processing of S3001, it is determined whether the state is immediately after the time saving state is set.

In the process of S3001, when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001: No), next, the winning information received this time is special figure 1 related (first special symbol lottery (fluctuation) Winning information for showing the result) (S3002), and if it is determined that it is related to special figure 1 (S3002: Yes), in a state where the time saving state is set, it is arranged in the left-handed area Since it indicates that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 provided, the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set to ON (S3003), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF (S3004), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the winning information received this time is not related to special figure 1 (it is related to special figure 2 (second special symbol)) (S3002: No), the time saving state is set. Since this indicates that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 provided in the right-handed hitting area in the state where the player is batting rightward, the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to ON (S3005), and the process proceeds to S3004. and then terminate this process. Moreover, when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON in the process of S3001 (it is set to OFF) (S3001: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In other words, in the second embodiment, the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON until the first winning information command is received after the time saving state is set, and while the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the area where the ball entrance into which the ball entered is located (right-handed area, left-handed area) A game in which a ball is shot against is set to be an appropriate game during the time saving state, and the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF.

As a result, the timing for setting the game method during the time saving state can be limited to the period during which the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON.

Next, referring to FIG. 101(b), details of the game content determination process (S2352) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) give an explanation. FIG. 101(b) is a flow chart showing the content of the game content determination process (S2352). In this game content determination process (S2352), the winning information included in the winning information command received this time is the winning information based on the appropriate gaming method with respect to the gaming method set as the appropriate gaming method during the time saving state. or not, and executes processing for setting an error command based on the determination result.

When the game content determination process (S2352) is executed, first, it determines whether the winning information received this time is related to the special figure 1 (winning information for indicating the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol) ( S3101), when it is determined that it is related to special figure 1 (S3101: Yes), it is determined whether the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3102). In the processing of S3102, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3102: Yes), the left-handed game (first game) during the time saving state is set as an appropriate game. In the state where the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is turned on, a prize-winning command indicating the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 into which the ball fired by the left-handed game can be entered is received. Since this is the case, this process is terminated as it is without determining that it is abnormal.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3102, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3102: No), the right-handed game (second game) during the time saving state is set to be an appropriate game (with the right-handed flag 223ab turned on), the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 into which the ball fired by the left-handed game can enter. Since the winning command indicating the ball has been received, it is determined that an appropriate game is not being played, an error command for display is set (S3104), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S3101, the winning information received this time is not special figure 1 related (winning information for showing the lottery (fluctuation) result of the first special symbol), that is, the winning information received this time is special figure 2 related When it is determined that it is (winning information for indicating the lottery (fluctuation) result of the second special symbol) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3103 ), and if it is determined that the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to ON, the present processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3103, if it is determined that the flag 223ab during right hitting is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3103: No), the left hitting game in the time saving state (first game ) is set to be an appropriate game (while the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is on), the ball to the second ball entrance 640 into which the ball fired by the right-handed game can enter. Since it is a case where a prize winning command indicating a winning ball has been received, it is determined that an appropriate game is not being played, an error command for display is set (S3104), and this processing ends.

As described above, by the gaming state setting process (S2351) shown in FIG. By the game content determination process (S2352) shown in b), it is possible to determine whether or not the game method during the time saving state is appropriate. With this configuration, even if the player can select the game method (the direction in which the ball is shot) at his or her own will, the game method selected by the player can be set as an appropriate game method and Since an error command indicating an abnormality can be set when a game method other than the above is executed, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 100), after executing the game state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)), the game content determination process (see FIG. 101(b)) is executed. , the game content determination process is not executed in a state in which neither the right-handed flag 223ab nor the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON. there is Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101(b), if one flag (one of the right-handed flag 223ab and left-handed flag 223ac) is not set to ON, the other flag (right-handed Since it can be determined that the other of the middle flag 223ab and the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON, the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 can be simplified.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the game state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)), an appropriate game method in the time saving state is set based on the winning information included in one winning information command. Therefore, when the game content determination process (see FIG. 101(b)) is executed, an appropriate game method has already been set (one of the right-handed flag 223ab and left-handed flag 223ac is ON). is set to ).

On the other hand, for example, as a gaming state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)), a plurality of winning information commands are received, and based on the winning information included in the received winning information commands, appropriate When executing the processing for setting the game method, until a predetermined period of time has passed since the time-saving state was set (until the winning information command is received a predetermined number of times), an appropriate game method for the time-saving state is set. It becomes impossible. In such a case, a flag (unset flag) is provided to indicate that the game method has not been set. (See FIG. 101(b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent an error command from being set based on the game (shooting the ball) that was executed while the game method was being determined.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the game method (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) during the time saving state is included in the winning information command received from the main controller 110 Since the determination is made based on the winning information, there is no need to collect dedicated information for determining the game method, and the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be simplified. However, it is not limited to this. It may be configured to collect the ball passage detection results of each means and set an appropriate game method during the time saving state. By configuring in this way, it is necessary to add a dedicated configuration and the control processing becomes complicated. can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in order to discriminate the game method selected by the player, the detection result of a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotational operation amount (rotational position) of the operating handle 51 from changes in electric resistance is used. can be configured to

Next, referring to FIG. 102, the contents of the pending display setting process (S2353) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) will be described. . FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the content of the pending display setting process (S2353). In this pending display setting process (S2353), when an appropriate winning information command is received during the time saving state, the update status of the time saving state and the jackpot game are displayed for the pending symbols displayed in response to the winning information command. A process of setting the performance mode of the pending suggestion performance suggesting the possibility of execution is executed.

When the pending display setting process (S2353) is executed, first, the winning information command received this time is the winning information related to the special figure 1 (winning information for showing the lottery (fluctuation) result of the first special symbol) Command including It is determined whether (S3201), and if it is determined that it is related to special figure 1 (S3201: Yes), it is determined whether the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3202). In the process of S3202, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3202: Yes), the winning information command received this time is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game. Then, the processing for executing the pending suggestion effect is executed using the pending symbol corresponding to the received winning information command.

On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S3202: No), the winning information command received this time is an appropriate game. Because it is a winning information command that does not correspond to (in a state where the right-handed game (second game) is determined as an appropriate game, because the winning information command of the first special symbol is received), the processing of S3203 to S3206 is skipped, and this processing ends.

Similarly, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not special figure 1 related winning information (S3201: No), that is, special figure 2 (second special symbol) related winning information If it is determined that it is, then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3207), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3207: Yes), the winning prize received this time Since the information command is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, the process proceeds to the processing of S3203 to S3206, which will be described later, and the processing for executing the pending suggestion effect using the pending symbol for the received winning information command is executed. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S3207, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S3207: No), the winning information command received this time is an appropriate game Because it is a winning information command that does not correspond to (in a state where the left-handed game (first game) is determined as an appropriate game, the winning information command of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is received), This process ends by skipping the processes of S3203 to S3206.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the winning information command is received, the winning information included in the received winning information command is the winning information corresponding to the gaming method selected by the player. and, only when the winning information corresponds to the game method selected by the player, an effect (holding display effect) using the winning information included in the winning information command is executed. ing. This prohibits execution of the pending display effect for a game unintended by the player (for example, a game in which the player erroneously operates the operation handle 51 and shoots the ball in a direction different from the intended direction). can do.

Therefore, by continuing the game method selected by the player himself/herself, it is possible to acquire information advantageous to the player (information provided to the player by the pending display effect). It is possible to make a game by itself. In addition, in the second embodiment, when the player plays an unintended game (a game method different from the game method selected by the player himself/herself), the pending display effect is not executed. Compared to the case where the player plays the game method selected by himself/herself, the information that can be acquired by the player may be configured to be disadvantageous. The content of the information indicated by the display mode displayed by pressing the button may be reduced, or a display mode may be displayed that indicates information that is different from the fact.

Returning to FIG. 102, the description continues. In the process of S3203, the information in the temporary working hours information update area 223i is updated based on the winning information received this time (S3203), and based on the contents of the temporary working hours information update area 223i, the holding display mode using the holding display selection table 222aa is selected (S3204), and the selected pending display mode is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3205), and a pending display command for display corresponding to the selected pending display mode is set (S3206), End this process.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S2134) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S2134). This variable display setting process 2 (S2134) replaces the effect setting process (S2804 in FIG. 63) with the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above. (see S2851 of )), and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the effect setting process 2 (S2851) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2851). This effect setting process 2 (S2851) differs from the effect setting process (S2804) of the first embodiment in that the process executed when the time saving state is set as the game state is different. are doing. Other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, when the production setting process 2 (S2851) is executed, the same S2901 and S2902 processes as the production setting process described above (see FIG. 63) are executed, and the information read in the process of S2902 is information indicating the time saving state. If it is determined that it is not (S2902: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information read in the processing of S2902 is information indicating the time saving information (S2902: Yes), next it is determined whether the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301). Here, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that it is time to set the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the time saving state is set ( S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

In the processing of S3302, 4000 is set to the value of the time saving counter 223ae, then the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF, the game selection command for display is set (S3304), and this processing ends. The display game selection command set in the processing of S3304 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display game selection command, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a game selection screen for allowing the player to select a game method during the time saving state (see FIG. 82(b). ) to display.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON (set to OFF) in the processing of S3301 (S3301: No), it is checked whether the value of the time saving counter 223ae is greater than 0. It is determined (S3305).

The time saving timer counter 233ae measures a predetermined period (4 seconds in this embodiment) from the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the time saving state is set, and in the process of S3305, It is determined whether or not the current timing has passed the above-described predetermined period (four seconds in this embodiment).

In the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ae is greater than 0, that is, after the time saving state is set, 4 seconds have passed since the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation. If it is determined that it is not (S3305: Yes), it is during the period of continuously displaying the selection screen (see FIG. 82(b)) for selecting the game method on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the processing of S3306 to S3308 is skipped and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the short time counting counter 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3305; No), the hold included in the prize winning information storage area corresponding to this change Mode information is read out (S3306), a rendering mode corresponding to the read-out pending mode information is set (S3307), a display rendering command indicating the selected rendering mode is set (S3308), and this processing ends.

As described above, when setting the variable display corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special symbols, the effect mode corresponding to the variable display is set based on the reservation mode information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Therefore, it is possible to perform the variable display of the effect mode associated with the pending effect display already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the pending mode information. Therefore, it is possible to execute the performance with relevance for a long period of time (the period during which a plurality of variations of the special symbols are executed), thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, as described above in the pending display setting process (see FIG. 102), the winning information corresponding to the game method selected by the player (first game (left-handed game) or second game (right-handed game)) Since it is configured to set the reservation mode information only for, the target special symbol variation when the effect setting process (S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed corresponds to the game method selected by the player. In the case of the special symbol variation that is not displayed, since the reservation mode information is not set in the winning information storage area 223a, there is no need to set the performance mode for the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect display (see FIGS. 83(a) and 83(b)) using a predetermined effect mode only for the special symbol variation corresponding to the game method selected by the player, and an effect that is easy for the player to understand. can be provided.

Next, various counter update processing 2 (S2161) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105(a). FIG. 105(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the various counter updating process 2 (S2161). This various counter updating process 2 (S2161) is different from the various counter updating process (S2111) of the above-described first embodiment in that a process for updating (subtracting) the value of the short time keeping counter 223ae is added. Other elements are the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

When the various counter updating process 2 (S2161) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223ae is greater than 0 (S3401). The value of the short time counting counter 223ae is decremented by 1 (S3402), then the values of other various counters are decremented by 1 (updated) (S3403), and this processing ends. Note that the details of the various counters updated in the process of S3403 are the same as the various counter update process of the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3401: No), the process of S3402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3403. End this process. In other words, the value of the short time counting counter 223ae is decremented by 1 (updated) each time various counter update processing 2 (S2161) executed at intervals of 1 millisecond is executed. The value of 4000 set in S2851 of FIG. 104) is a value for measuring a period of 4 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105(b), the content of the effect update process 2 (S2162) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update process 2 (S2162). This effect update process 2 (S2162) differs from the effect update process (S2112) of the first embodiment in that a process for setting the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 during the time saving state is added. and the others are the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

When the effect update process 2 (S2162) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving state is set (S3501), and if it is determined that the time saving state is set (S3501: Yes), then the time saving It is determined whether the value of the clock counter 223ae is greater than 0 (S3502). That is, it is determined whether a predetermined period (4 seconds) has passed since the special symbol variation during the time saving state was executed.

In the process of S3502, if it is determined that the value of the short time counting counter 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3502: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON. Then (S3503), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3503: Yes), a right-handed command for display is set (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3508. When this display right-handed command is set, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 . When the display control device 114 receives the display right-handed command, it displays the characters "Right-handed" in the guidance display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and displays the characters "Right-handed" to the player. Guidance is displayed to execute a beating game.

In the processing of S3503, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S3503: No), then the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON. (S3504), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3505: Yes), a left-handed command for display is set (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3508.

In the process of S3506, when the left-handed command for display is set, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the left-handed display command, it displays the characters "left-handed" in the guidance display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and displays the characters "left-handed" to the player. Guidance is displayed to execute a beating game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3505, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S3505; No), that is, the time saving state is set and then retained and stored Although the variation of the special symbol was executed, if 4 seconds have passed without a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a display standby command is set. (S3507), and the process proceeds to S3508. The display standby command set in the processing of S3507 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display standby command, it continuously displays the character "?" The screen for selecting the game method (see FIG. 82(b)) is continuously displayed.

By configuring in this way, even if the game is temporarily interrupted for a restroom break or the like after the jackpot game ends, the game can be easily restarted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, different time-saving end conditions are set for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the player A game (left-handed game) for executing the lottery of special figure 1 and a game (right-handed game) for executing the lottery of special figure 2 are configured to be selectable.

As a result, it is possible to play a plurality of types of games in the state in which the time saving state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the games.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the game (left-handed game) for executing the lottery of special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state, the game (right-handed game) for executing the lottery of special figure 2 is executed It is configured so that the time-saving end condition is more likely to be established than in the case of doing so, and it is easier to win a small win that makes it easier to win two types of wins.

By configuring in this way, the player can select a game in which a big win is likely to occur but the time saving state is likely to end and a game in which a big win is unlikely to occur but the time saving state is difficult to end. The game can be arbitrarily selected according to convenience.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the state in which the time saving state is set is an advantageous state, and in the advantageous state, the player is configured to select a plurality of types of games. , For example, the game state in which the variable probability state is set may be the advantageous state, or the case where the variable probability state and the time saving state are set may be the advantageous state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in a state in which an advantageous state (for example, time saving state) is set, when the end condition (for example, time saving end condition) for ending the advantageous state is satisfied, it is disadvantageous to the player Although the game state (for example, normal state) is configured to be set, it is not limited to this, for example, when the advantageous state end condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied, than the advantageous state It may be configured to shift to a super advantageous state that is even more advantageous. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to quickly transition from the advantageous state to the super advantageous state.

Furthermore, as an advantageous state end condition for ending an advantageous state, an unfavorable ending condition in which a disadvantageous state (for example, normal state) that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state is set by being established, and a super advantageous state that is more advantageous than the advantageous state ( For example, it may be configured to set an advantageous end condition in which a latent state) is set, and in addition to the ease of establishment of the advantageous state end condition, an unfavorable end may be set according to the selected game method. It is preferable to configure so that the easiness of establishment of the condition and the advantageous end condition are also different.

By constructing in this manner, it is possible to greatly change the subsequent game results according to the game method selected while the player is in an advantageous state, so that the player feels as if he/she played the game by himself/herself. can give

In addition, in the second embodiment, the game method selected by the player shows an example of two types (left-handed game, right-handed game). It may be configured to select a game method.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 124. FIG. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a second variable winning device 1650 is provided in place of the V winning device 650 and the game contents are based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. They are different in one respect.

Specifically, in the above-described first embodiment, as a result of the lottery for the second special symbol, when a small win is won, a small win game for opening the V winning device 650 is executed, and during the small win game There are two types of wins in which a big win game is executed (set) after the small win game is completed when the winning ball of the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area. , only a small winning game that opens the second variable winning device 1650 is executed, and the second variable winning device 1650 is not provided with a specific area. That is, the third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it uses a pachinko machine 10 that does not have the same game characteristics as the two types.

First, referring to FIG. 106, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that a second variable prize winning device 1650 is provided instead of the V winning device 650, and the configuration of the electric role object 640a. , and the other configurations are the same.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the ball flowing down the right side area (right hitting area) of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the through gate 67, A second inlet 640 is provided, labeled 640a. A plurality of general prize winning ports 63 are provided on the downstream side thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, similarly to the first embodiment described above, while the normal state is set as the game state, the balls flow down to the left side area (left hitting area) of the variable display device unit 80. A game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game, that is, a game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is the main is performed, and the variable display device unit 80 is displayed while the time saving state is set as the game state. A game aimed at the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game in which a ball is made to flow down to the right side area (right-handed area), that is, a game in which the lottery of the second special symbols is mainly performed.

The details are omitted because they have been explained in the first embodiment, but in the second embodiment as well, the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Therefore, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

Here, as shown in FIG. 106, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a left area (on the left side of the lower end position of the variable display unit 80) where balls shot by a left-handed game can flow down. A second variable winnings device 1650 is provided. This second variable prize winning device 1650 performs an opening operation in a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won by lottery of the second special symbols.

Although details will be described later, in the small winning game of the third embodiment, an opening operation (opening period is 0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 1650 is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable prize winning device 1650 is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the ball to reach.

That is, only the second special symbol among the plurality of special symbols is configured to win a small hit, and when a right-handed game is performed to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, the ball may flow down. It is configured to provide a second variable winning device 1650 in a left-handed area that does not have a player. By configuring in this way, when the small winning game is executed, it is configured such that the ball is unlikely to win the second variable winning device 1650 .

In the third embodiment configured as described above, the small winning of the second special symbol can be used only in order to establish the end condition of the time saving state. Therefore, since the bonus (prize ball) is not given to the player by the small winning game executed by winning the small winning, even if the winning probability is set so as to win the small winning with a high probability, the player will not be able to win. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the privilege is excessively given.

Furthermore, since the period in which the second variable prize winning device 1650 is opened is set to a short period (0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second variable prize winning device 1650, a small hit is possible with a high probability. Even if the winning probability is set so that the player wins the prize, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player is given the privilege excessively.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the second variable winning device 1650 is provided in the left area different from the game area (right area) where the ball fired in the right-handed game that performs the lottery for the second special symbol flows down. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is playing the right-handed game to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is being opened (executing a small winning game). A small winning game can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning device 1650 is configured to be visible to the player. A decorative member may be provided between the second variable winning device 1650 to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the second variable winning device 1650 . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is playing the right-handed game to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is being opened (executing the small winning game). A small winning game can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to a player.

In addition, a decorative member provided in the vicinity of the second variable winning device 1650 is provided with a light emitting member (for example, an LED) for making the player visually recognize the light emitting state, and in some cases when a small winning game is executed It is preferable to configure the light emitting member to operate (light emission). Specifically, a small winning determination means for determining that a condition for executing a small winning game is established, and when the small winning determining means determines that a small winning game is executed, a predetermined lottery is executed. and light emission control means for controlling the operation of the light emitting member when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a difference between the number of small winning games that are actually executed and the number of small winning games that are visually recognized by the player (operate the light emitting member), and the small winning game is actually performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of executions. Therefore, to make it difficult for a player to predict when a time saving end condition established based on the number of times a small prize game is executed (the number of times a small prize is won) is established (when the time saving state ends). can be done.

Further, it is preferable that the light emission control means executes the control to light the light emitting member described above even when the small prize is not won. As a result, the number of times the light-emitting member emits light can be made larger than the number of times the small win is actually won, so that time is shortened based on the number of times the small win game is executed (the number of times the small win is won). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the termination condition will be satisfied (when the time saving state will end).

In this case, when there is a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed or a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to the winning information retained and stored as a big hit, the light emitting member is operated. It should be configured in such a way that it becomes easier. In other words, it is preferable to configure so that the light emitting operation executed for notifying that effect when winning the small winning game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

As a result, when the light-emitting member emits light, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the small winning game is executed, whether the player wins the special symbol jackpot, or whether it is just a decoration presentation. . Furthermore, a state that is disadvantageous to the player (execution of a small winning game), that is, a state in which a factor for ending the advantageous state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is established, and a state that is advantageous to the player ( Winning a jackpot) causes the light-emitting member to emit light, so that the player can be interested in the game result after the light-emitting member emits light.

In the case of using the above-described configuration, the timing at which the light emission control means causes the light emitting member to emit light may be the timing at which the small winning is won (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the timing at which the small winning game is started, or the timing at which the small winning game is started. , Timing during the small winning game, timing after the end of the small winning game, timing at which the special symbol variation is executed, etc. Various timings may be set, or predetermined predetermined timing may be set.

Further, the light emission control means may change the conditions for light emission of the light emitting member based on the operation result of the operation means (the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. In this case, for example, when a predetermined operation condition (for example, an operation of pressing the frame button 22 10 times or more in 2 seconds (continuous hitting operation)) is established, the number of operations of the light-emitting member and the number of small winnings are equal. It is preferable to configure so that the light emission is controlled so as to approximate (more approximate than when the predetermined operation condition is not satisfied). As a result, the player can be made to actively operate the operating means, and the player can be motivated to participate.

In addition, using the light emitting operation of the light emitting member described above, for example, the situation until the time saving end condition is satisfied (remaining number of small hits won) and the type of small hit won this time are reported to the player (suggestion ). As a result, the player can be interested in the details of the light emitting operation of the light emitting member.

In addition, in the third embodiment, by making it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the small winning has been won, it is difficult for the player to understand the end timing of the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and a sense of tension is given. However, without being limited to this, the player is notified that the small win has been won, but the player is notified of the small win type set for the small win. It may be configured not to notify, or may be configured to notify the player even of the small winning type. In this case, in order to notify the player of winning the small prize, the third symbol display device 81 displays a specific display mode (for example, a display mode in which the player can identify that the small prize has been won). , the third symbol is stopped and displayed), or the second variable winning device 1650 is preferably provided in the right-hand hitting area. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of winning small prizes during the time saving state, so that the player can play the game while predicting the end timing of the time saving state.

<Regarding production content in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110, the effect during the time saving state executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. 107 to 110 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the basic configuration is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment. , the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the winning information of the second special symbol can also be reserved and stored, so the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It is different in that the effect using the second special symbol holding storage information is executed as the remaining time reduction suggesting effect (effect for suggesting the remaining period of the time saving state to the player) executed in . Hereinafter, the content of the short remaining time suggestive effect in the third embodiment will be described, focusing on the points different from the content of the effect used in the first embodiment.

Fig.107 (a) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen displayed when a time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 107(a), when the time saving state is set, an effect start screen for explaining the content of the effect to be executed during the time saving state is displayed. In the third embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, the small display area Dm11 includes a plurality of status display modes such as a first status display mode Dm11a, a second status display mode Dm11b, a third status display mode Dm11c, and a fourth status. A display mode Dm11d is displayed.

In this plurality of status display modes, each display mode corresponds to the degree of satisfaction of a plurality of time saving end conditions (progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied), and the progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied It is configured so that the display mode can be changed accordingly. Specifically, a bomb having a fuse of a predetermined length is displayed as each situation display mode, and the fuse is lit when the first variation is executed after the time saving state is set.

Then, among the time-saving end conditions, the situation display mode corresponding to the time-saving end condition that is likely to be satisfied is changed so that the length of the fuse is shorter than the other situation display modes. By varying the display mode of the situation display mode in this way, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be predicted by the player by the effect (remaining time reduction suggesting effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81. , the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 107( a ), in the production start screen (time saving start screen), in the central part of the main display area Dm, in order to inform the player of the content of the short remaining time suggestion production, "Even one explosion Then, the characters "time saving end" and "big hit with digestion completed" are displayed. As a result, if even one of the multiple bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 explodes, the time saving state ends, and the fire of the multiple bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 can be extinguished. It can be easily grasped that it will be a big hit.

The state shown in FIG. 107(a) is a state in which the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variation display area Dm1b, that is, the variation of the special symbol is executed during the time saving state. This is the state where the bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 are on fire. In addition, when the jackpot game is completed and the state in which the time saving state is set does not start the fluctuation of the special pattern (the state in which the special pattern does not start changing after the jackpot game ends), the time saving state standby As the screen, it may be configured to display a screen indicating that the remaining time reduction suggestive effect for starting the variation of the special symbol is executed.

When the game progresses with the time saving state set and the establishment of the time saving end condition is approaching (the number of fluctuations in the special pattern reaches a predetermined number, or the number of small wins during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number Then), as shown in FIG. 107(b), a combination status display mode Dm11z for suggesting (notifying) that effect is displayed in the small display area Dm11. FIG. 107(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the remaining working hours suggestive effect in the working hours saving state.

In this combination status display mode Dm11z, the progress of a plurality of time saving end conditions is a pre-end condition (for example, when the number of fluctuations of special symbols is set to 50 as the end condition of the number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of special symbols is set to 30 When it reaches, it is displayed when the condition that is established when the number of times of winning A winning reaches 3 when the number of times of winning A winning is set to 5 as the condition for ending the number of times of winning) is satisfied. be. Therefore, by displaying the combination status display mode Dm11z in the small display area Dm11, the player can be made aware that the time saving state will end soon.

In addition, by displaying the combination status display mode Dm11z in a state where the progress of a plurality of time saving end conditions satisfies the pre-end condition, when the time saving state ends (among the set time saving end conditions, When any time saving end condition is satisfied), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which time saving end condition is satisfied to end the time saving state. That is, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), while displaying a plurality of status display modes (Dm11a to Dm11d) in which the display mode is variable corresponding to the progress of each time saving end condition in the small display area Dm11, When the time-saving state ends, it is necessary to execute the effect of exploding one of the situation display modes, so that the player can easily know which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is the time-saving end condition established this time. There was a problem that it would be grasped by

In this way, the player easily grasps which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions the time-saving end condition established this time is, so that the plurality of time-saving ends set when shifting to the time-saving state There is a risk that the conditions will be easily predicted, and that the timing at which the time saving state will end will also be easily predicted. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the pre-end condition is satisfied for a plurality of time-saving end conditions, the progress of each time-saving end condition of the transition is prevented from being grasped by the player. Therefore, it is configured to display the combination status display mode Dm11z. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which time saving end condition is satisfied to end the time saving state.

In addition, in the present third embodiment, it is configured to display the combination status display mode Dm11z only when the pre-termination condition is satisfied for a plurality of time-saving end conditions, but even one time-saving end condition ends The combination status display mode Dm11z may be displayed when the pre-condition is satisfied, or the combination status display mode when a value corresponding to a specific time-saving end condition among a plurality of time-saving end conditions satisfies the pre-end condition. Dm11z may be displayed.

Then, when the time saving state ends, the screen shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed. FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the time saving state. Figure 108 (a) shows the display screen when the time saving end condition is established for one of the winning times end conditions, and corresponds to the second special symbol in the special figure 2 fluctuation display area Dm1b A combination of "341" indicating that the third symbol has won a small prize is stopped and displayed. In the central part, characters of "end" are displayed for notifying the player that the time saving state has ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(b), the contents of the remaining working hour suggesting effect for a special situation when the working hours reduction state is set will be described. Figure 108 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special figure 1 variation is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has means for holding and storing the winning information of the first special symbol, in the normal state (during the left-handed game), the first special symbol lottery When a jackpot is won and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is finished, there is a case where a special pattern variation corresponding to the reserved and stored first special pattern is executed.

And among them, there was a case where the prize information of the first special symbol that is reserved and stored includes the prize information that wins a jackpot (so-called reservation-in-residence). In this way, despite the fact that the time saving state is set, the next big hit based on the winning information already acquired before the time saving state is set, not the winning information of the special symbol acquired during the time saving state In the case where the game is executed, if the production (remaining time reduction suggestive production) executed during the time saving state is executed, the production content and the game result will be inconsistent, and the production effect will be reduced. There was a problem of hoarding.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set, it is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol that is reserved and stored has the winning information that becomes a big hit, and a big win is made. When it is determined that there is winning information, instead of starting (executing) the usual short remaining time suggesting production (see FIG. 107 (a)), a special production (production in the suspension during time saving) is configured to be executed. are doing. As a result, if the performance (remaining time reduction suggestive performance) executed during the time saving state is executed, a contradiction occurs between the performance content and the game result, and the performance effect is suppressed from being lowered. A feeling of superiority can be given to a player by executing a special performance in a rare situation that a jackpot is won again in the reserved memory after the jackpot is finished.

When the time-saving and on-hold production is executed, as shown in FIG. Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, the characters "Something is wrong" are displayed in order to suggest to the player that a performance different from the usual short remaining time suggesting performance is being executed. . By performing such a display, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that an unusual effect is being executed.

Further, in FIG. 108(b), since the variation of the first special symbol is executed as described above, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol changes in the special figure 1 variation display area Dm1a. It is displayed, and the 3rd design corresponding to the 2nd special design is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuation display area Dm1b.

It should be noted that the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (b), for example, before the time-saving state is set, based on the winning information already acquired, it is also executed when it is determined that any of the time-saving end conditions are established It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, the screen shown in FIG. 108(b) is displayed after the end of the big win, so that the big win can be performed immediately (until all the special symbol variations corresponding to the winning information held and stored are completed). or the end of the time saving state, the player can be interested in the performance contents to be executed next.

When the time saving state ends from the state shown in FIG. 108(b), a display screen similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed to inform the player that the time saving state ends. do. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won from the state shown in FIG. 108(b), the display screen shown in FIG. 109(a) is displayed. FIG. 109(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed at the timing when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won after time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 108(b).

As shown in FIG. 109(a), when the big hit is won in the special figure variation corresponding to the winning information of the first special symbol that has already been reserved and stored in the state where the time saving state is set, the special figure 1 variation display area In Dm1a, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "777" indicating a big hit, and in the small display area Dm11, the extinguished combined state display mode Dm11z is displayed. In the central part of the main display area Dm, characters of "extinguishment completed" and "jackpot" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot has been won.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot (the timing at which the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot) is set, it is retained and stored. The content of the winning information is determined, and as a result of the determination, if it is determined that there is winning information that will win the jackpot, a special performance (shorter time It is configured to execute the production in the middle hold.

By constructing in this way, a jackpot is won immediately after execution of the short remaining time suggesting performance, and a state occurs in which the content of the short remaining time suggesting performance and the game result do not match, or the game result is not matched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the effect of forcibly varying the performance content of the short remaining time suggesting performance, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the short remaining time suggesting performance.

Next, the production contents of the remaining time reduction suggesting production in the case where the number of special symbol fluctuations until the time reduction state ends is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 109(b). FIG. 109(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the number of remaining time reductions is determined during the time reduction state. In the third embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number end condition that is established when the special symbol fluctuation is executed, and the lottery of the special symbol A condition for ending the number of times of winning, which is established when a small win is won, is set in plurality, and the time-saving state is ended when any one of the plurality of end conditions for time-saving is established. By configuring as above, it is difficult for the player to predict the period in which the time saving state is continuously set (timing when the time saving state ends), and the interest of the game during the time saving state is improved. .

Even when a plurality of time saving end conditions are set in this way, the period until the time saving state ends may be determined. For example, the game progresses during the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 times until the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, and the number of winnings of the small win is 5 times until the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In the case, since only one small hit is won at maximum for one variation of the special symbol, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed three times, the time saving state is achieved. will end.

In the third embodiment, when the period until the time-saving state ends (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is determined, as shown in FIG. (“three times” in the example of FIG. 109(b)) is displayed. By configuring in this way, in a game machine that can set the timing at which the time saving state ends in a complicated manner by setting a plurality of time saving end conditions, when the timing at which the time saving state ends is determined in advance , the timing can be clearly notified to the player, so that the player can play the game while being conscious of the remaining period of the time-saving state.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the period until the time saving state ends (the number of special symbol variations) is determined, the number of remaining special symbol variations in the small display area Dm11 (in the example of FIG. 109 (b) 'three times') is displayed, the period during which this display is displayed is a period in which the time saving state is not terminated based on the number of times the small prize is won no matter how many times the small prize is won. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to win many small wins while the number of remaining special symbol variations is displayed in the small display area Dm11.

It should be noted that when such effect display is used in the above-described first embodiment and second embodiment, there is a possibility of winning two types of winnings by winning a small winning, so it is more motivated. You can play games. In other words, in the above-described first embodiment and second embodiment, when a small hit is won during the time saving state, a chance to win two types of hits and a pinch when the time saving state ends. , As shown in FIG. 109(b), it is a period in which the time saving state does not end based on the small winning election (a period that is determined to end based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol). By executing the performance to be notified (remaining period fixed notification performance), while the remaining period fixed notification performance is being executed, if a small win is won, only a chance to win two types of wins will come. Since the player can be notified, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to win many small prizes.

In addition, in the third embodiment, different time-saving end conditions are set based on the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot. Each time-saving end condition may be set so that the time-saving end condition does not hold during the period.

In the third embodiment, an effect for notifying the player that it is a period in which the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied after the time saving state is set is configured to be executable. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen at the time of rushing in after the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot D is set as the jackpot type.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113(a), but in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot D, at least until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times, the time saving state A time-saving end condition is set so that it does not end. In other words, the period from when the time saving state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times is a period in which the time saving state continues regardless of the special symbol lottery result.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the present is a specific period after the time saving state is set (a period in which the time saving state continues regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol). An effect (invincible effect) for informing the player of this fact is executed. During this invincible effect, a non-fired bomb is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the player is notified that the bomb is not exploding (the time-saving state is not terminated). there is

A remaining period state 820 for notifying the remaining period of the invincibility effect is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 110( a ), the characters “until the fuse is lit…” and “20” are displayed as the remaining period mode 820 . In this way, by executing an effect (invincible effect) for showing the player a period during which the time saving state will not end, it is possible to provide a period during which the player can play games with peace of mind during the time saving state. .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 are changed. . Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, instead of the first per random number table 202a, the first per random number 3 table 202ba is replaced with the ROM 202 (see FIG. 19 (a)) in the first embodiment described above, and the small per type selection table 202f is replaced with a small hit type selection 3 table 202bb, a time reduction grant table 202e is replaced with a time reduction grant 3 table 202bc, and an open scenario table 202g is replaced with an open scenario 3 table 202bd. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112(a), the contents of the first winning random number 3 table 202ba will be described. FIG. 112(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 112(a), a special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 and a special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2 are defined in the first per random number 3 table 202ba.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112(b), the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 will be described. FIG. 112(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1. This special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 defines the same contents as the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 20(b)) of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

FIG. 112(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2. This special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2 differs from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 20(c)) of the above-described first embodiment in that the range of values determined as small hits is different. different, otherwise identical. Specifically, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2, the obtained first winning random number counter value C1 defines a small winning determination value within the range of "5 to 499".

That is, in the third embodiment using the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2, when executing the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined that it is a big hit with a probability (ratio) of 5/1000 (1/200). Then, it is determined to be a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 495/1000. That is, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a big win or a small win with a probability of 1/2.

It should be noted that the range determined to be a big hit or a small hit is not limited to the above-described content, and may be defined so that the probability of being determined to be a small hit is lower than the probability of being determined to be a big hit. The range to be determined as a small hit may not only be defined by continuous values, but may also be defined with intervals. In addition, in the third embodiment, the same table is used regardless of the game state to be set to execute the determination of the big hit or the small hit. A different table may be used to determine a big win or a small win.

Specifically, the table used when the time saving state is set as the game state has a wider range of determination as a small hit than the table used when the normal state is set as the game state. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, even if the small prize winning used for ending the time saving state is configured to occur frequently during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the situation that frequently occurs in the normal state. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), in the third embodiment, there is no winning of a small hit by the lottery of the first special symbol, and only by the lottery of the second special symbol. However, it may be configured to win a small prize by lottery of the first special symbol.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the time saving state is set, the time saving state is ended immediately when the winning information of the first special pattern reserved and stored includes the winning information for winning a small hit. be able to. When such a configuration is used, for example, it is preferable to use it in a game machine that can provide a game state that is more advantageous to the player if the time-saving state ends immediately.

Specifically, as a game state, in addition to the normal state and the time saving state, as a result of the lottery of special symbols, the game state with a low probability of winning the jackpot (normal state: low probability state of special symbols, normal symbols Low probability state, short time state: High probability state of special patterns that is higher than low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) (variable state: high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns, Latent state: high probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) can be configured, and if the time-saving end condition is satisfied during the period in which the variable state is set, the latent state is set. It is preferable that the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

According to such a gaming machine, in a state where the variable probability state is set, it is possible to make it advantageous to the player that the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine full of interest. In addition, in such a game machine, when the variable probability state is set, if the winning information of the first special symbol held and stored includes the winning information for winning a small hit, the variable probability state is terminated immediately. By using the configuration to shift to the latent definite state, it is possible to motivate the game to store the winning information of the first special symbol up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) before the variable definite state is set. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 113(a), the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb is different from the small hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above. Other than that, for example, the small hit types defined for the range of the small hit type counter value C5 are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Unlike the above-described first embodiment, the third embodiment is not provided with the V winning device 650, and is a game in which a ball is passed through a specific area during a small win game to win a big win (two types of wins). Since it does not have a property, each small winning type defined in the small winning type 3 table 202bb is different in that the content of the big winning game set when winning two types is not associated.

FIG. 113(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving provision 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 113(b), the time reduction grant 3 table 202bc is set corresponding to each jackpot type with respect to the time reduction grant table 202e (see FIG. 21(d)) of the first embodiment described above. It is different in that the stipulated contents of the time saving end condition are different.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, among the time-saving end conditions, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k is set to "100" as the end condition of the number of fluctuations that is established based on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol. As the winning number end condition established based on the winning number of times, the value of the small winning A counter 203m is "1", the value of the small winning B counter 203n is "10", and the value of the small winning C counter 203ac is "50". specified to be set. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is completed, "the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 times", "the small hit A (set) is won once", "the small win The termination condition is established when either of the following conditions is satisfied: Winning 10 times for winning B (small winning set) or Winning 50 times for small winning C (small winning set). A time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving state a) is set.

In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, among the time-saving end conditions, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k is set to "50" and the number of small wins is set as the end condition of the number of fluctuations that is established based on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol. As the end condition of the number of winnings established based on, "5" is set to the value of the small hit A counter 203m, "5" is set to the value of the small hit B counter 203n, and "25" is set to the value of the small hit C counter 203ac. is defined as That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot B is completed, "the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 50", "the small hit A (set) is won five times", "the small win The termination condition is established when either of the following conditions is met: "win 5 times in the small win B (set)" or "win 25 times in the small win C (the small win set)". A time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving state b) is set.

When the jackpot type is the jackpot D, among the time-saving end conditions, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k is set to "100" as the end condition of the number of fluctuations, which is established based on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol, based on the number of winning small wins. As the end condition of the number of winnings to be established, it is defined that "20" is set to the value of the small winning A counter 203m and "80" is set to the value of the small winning C counter 203ac. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is completed, "the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 times", "the small hit A (set) is won 20 times", "the small hit A time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as time-saving state c) is set in which the end condition is satisfied when any of the conditions of "winning 80 times in winning C (small winning set)" is satisfied.

As described above, in the third embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, a plurality of different time-saving end conditions are set according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won, and the set time-saving end conditions Since it comprises so that a time saving state may be complete|finished when either is materialized, the timing which a time saving state complete|finishes can be diversified.

In addition, depending on the time saving state (a to c) set according to the jackpot type, since the time saving end condition that is easy to be established and the establishment are different, the time saving state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols during the time saving state The termination of the time saving state and the termination of the time saving state based on the number of small wins won during the time saving state can be mixedly generated, so that the patterns of the end of the time saving state can be diversified.

In the third embodiment, the number of items set as the time saving end condition is varied depending on the time saving state to be set. Specifically, in the time-saving states a and b, the time-saving end conditions that can be established when the small win B is won are set, but in the time-saving state c, the time-saving end conditions that can be established when the small win B is won. is configured so that is not set.

By configuring in this way, even if the player grasps the type of the small winning game executed during the time saving state (the first symbol corresponding to the small winning type set for the winning small winning is stopped and displayed In the gaming machine, even if the player grasps the type of the small winning game by grasping the first symbol that is stopped and displayed), it is possible to determine whether the type of the small winning game is set as a time saving end condition. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, a time saving end condition is set for all possible small hit types (small hits A to C) that can be set. However, as a configuration other than this, for example, a small hit type that is set when winning a small hit is added (for example, a small hit X to Z), and for the added small hit type, time saving The configuration may be such that the termination condition is not set.

By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the time saving state is approaching the end (time saving end condition). To make it difficult for a player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

Also, in this case, the small hit type (for example, small hit A) for which the time saving end condition is set and the small hit type (for example, small hit X) for which the time saving end condition is not set, the small hit game to be executed It is preferable to configure so that the operation contents are the same (including errors that cannot be identified by the player). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the current small winning type by the operation contents during the small winning game.

Next, referring to FIG. 114, the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd. As shown in FIG. 114, the opening scenario 3 table 202bd differs from the contents of the opening scenario table 202g in that the contents of the opening scenarios defined corresponding to the small wins A to C are different. , differ in that the content of the opening scenario defined corresponding to the jackpot D is different, and the other elements are the same.

Here, among the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd, the differences mentioned above will be explained. Note that detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted. As described above, the third embodiment is a small winning game that opens the second variable winning device 1650 as a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won (a small winning game that opens the second variable winning opening) configured to run Furthermore, in the third embodiment, even if a ball wins the second variable prize winning device 1650 during the small winning game, it is configured so as not to win the second prize.

Therefore, in the open scenario defined corresponding to the small winning A to C of the open scenario 3 table 202bd, only the operation contents for one round (1R) corresponding to the small winning game are defined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, in the present third embodiment, opening scenarios are defined corresponding to the small hits A to C with an error that is difficult for the player to identify.

Specifically, in the opening scenario corresponding to the small win A, an opening operation is performed in which the opening time of the second variable winning port of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.1 seconds, and the opening corresponding to the small win B is performed. In the scenario, an opening operation is performed in which the opening time of the second variable winning port of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.11 seconds. Each opening scenario is defined such that an opening operation is performed in which the opening time of the variable prize winning opening is 0.09 seconds.

By constructing in this way, it is made difficult to grasp the small winning type corresponding to the current small winning game from the contents of the actually executed small winning game while defining different opening scenarios for each small winning type. can be done.

In addition, in the third embodiment, in order to make it difficult to grasp the small winning type corresponding to the small winning game this time from the contents of the small winning game to be executed, the second variable winning is made to correspond to each small winning type It defines an opening scenario in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the device 1650 is changed to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to identify it. ) or the period of the end interval (0.5 seconds) may be varied to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between them. Also, each time may be varied so that the period of the open scenario defined corresponding to each small hit type is the same.

In addition, among a plurality of small winning types, for a specific small winning type, an opening scenario different from other small winning types (different to the extent that the player can easily identify) is defined. , It may be configured to allow the player to identify that a specific small hit type has been set, and in this case, it is different from other small hit types (different enough to be easily identifiable by the player) It is preferable to configure so as to set a time-saving end condition for a small hit type for which an open scenario is defined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the timing at which the time saving state ends by grasping the contents of the small winning game to be executed.

Furthermore, the same open scenario may be defined for a plurality of small hit types, and in this case, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition while the small hit game is being executed, according to the small hit type It is preferable to configure so that different effects are executed. Here, as a predetermined condition set while the small winning game is being executed, for example, during the small winning game, a ball enters the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650, or during the small winning game It is preferable to set a condition that is established when the player operates the frame button 22 or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period during which the small winning game is being executed (during the predetermined period).

In addition, as an effect that is executed when a predetermined condition is established during a small winning game, for example, an effect that changes the type of sound generated when a ball passes through a predetermined area (enters a ball), a frame button In addition to the effects of different sounds and lights based on the operation of 22, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be used to execute different effects.

Next, referring to FIG. 115(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 115(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c are deleted from the ROM 222 (see FIG. 26(a)) in the first embodiment, and a time saving remaining period determination table 222ba is added. The difference is that Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 116, the content of the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba will be described. FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba. This time-saving remaining period determination table 222ba is, for various time-saving end conditions set in the set time-saving state, game information corresponding to various time-saving end conditions (the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of small hits), that is, , the value of the time saving medium counter 203k, the value of the small hitting A counter 203m, the value of the small hitting B counter 203n, and the value of the small hitting C counter. Based on this, it is for determining that the time saving state has passed for a certain period of time.

By referring to this time saving remaining period determination table 222ba, the current time saving state can be roughly classified. By varying the presentation mode according to the classification, it is possible to roughly inform the player of the progress of the time saving state. In addition, in the third embodiment, the progress of the time saving state is configured to be determined in two stages, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to be determined in three stages or more. . In this case, for example, a plurality of thresholds may be defined in the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba, and the current progress may be determined based on the corresponding thresholds.

Next, referring to FIG. 115(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. In the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, the number-of-remaining-time reduction flag 223ba and the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb are added with respect to 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the number of special symbol fluctuations until the time reduction state ends has been determined, and is turned on when the special symbol variation number until the time reduction state ends is determined. is set. That is, in the third embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number end condition that is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, and a small hit during the time saving state Since the condition for ending the winning number of times that is satisfied when the number of times has reached a predetermined number is set, it is possible to determine the remaining period until the time saving state ends during the entire period in which the time saving state is set. configured so that it cannot.

That is, for example, when a value of "100" is set as the condition for ending the number of times of variation and a value of "2" is set as the condition for ending the number of times of winning, the special symbol changes 100 times, or 2 per small win. Since the time-saving state ends when the player wins twice, the remaining period of the time-saving state cannot be determined unless the period until two small wins are won is determined. On the other hand, even when the above-described time saving end condition is set, the game in the time saving state progresses, the special symbol variation is executed 98 times, and when it becomes a state where the small hit has not been won even once, the time saving state It is determined that the number of special symbol fluctuations until the end of is 2 times.

In this way, when the remaining period (number of special symbol remaining fluctuations) until the end of the time saving state is determined, the time saving state is suddenly ended by executing the effect of notifying the player to that effect. You can control the situation. Furthermore, as in the third embodiment, as the time saving end condition, if it has a fluctuation number end condition and a winning number end condition, when the remaining period until the end (special symbol remaining fluctuation number) is determined By executing the performance for notifying the fact to the player, the player can expect to win a small prize without having a sense of danger that the time saving state will end.

This remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is set to ON when it is determined that the remaining time reduction number of times has been determined in the time reduction remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123), and is set to effect setting process 3 (see S2871 in FIG. 122). (S3356 in FIG. 122). Then, when it is determined that this remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is set to ON (Fig. 122 S3356: Yes), a display time reduction command indicating the remaining time reduction number (special symbol fluctuation number) is set (Fig. 122 S3357). As a result, the number of special symbol variations until the time-saving state ends on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed (see FIG. 109(b)).

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbols until the time saving state is completed is decided, the remaining time saving number confirmation flag 223ba is provided as a flag for indicating that fact, but the player It may be a configuration for notifying the remaining period of the time saving state, for example, special figure 1 remaining time saving number of times to indicate that the number of remaining fluctuations of the first special symbol until the time saving state ends A confirmation flag and a special figure 2 remaining time reduction number confirmation flag for indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations of the second special symbol until the time saving state ends is confirmed are provided, and the special figure 1 remaining time reduction number confirmation flag is turned on When set to , the number of remaining fluctuations of the first special symbol is displayed, and when the special figure 2 remaining short time number determination flag is set to ON, the number of remaining fluctuations of the second special symbol is displayed. You can

By configuring in this way, for example, a game in which only the first special symbol is varied (lottery) during the time saving state and a game in which only the second special symbol is varied (lottery) are set separately. In the machine, it is possible to display the number of remaining fluctuations of special symbols according to the game contents actually executed (types of special symbols for which lottery is actually performed).

The fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that the period from the time the time saving state is set until the time saving end condition is satisfied at the shortest time is a predetermined period or more, and the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is set to ON when the number of symbol variations is 15 times or more. This fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is a value corresponding to the value of various counters indicating the time saving end condition in the fixed fluctuation discrimination process (see S3063 in FIG. 124) executed in the time saving remaining period discrimination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123) When it is determined that the minimum value is 15 or more (S3653 in FIG. 124: Yes), the display time saving command corresponding to the minimum value is set (S3654 in FIG. 124), and is set to ON (FIG. 124 S3655).

Then, when it is determined that the minimum value indicating the value of the various counters indicating the time saving end condition is not 15 or more (S3653 in FIG. 124: No), a display time saving command that does not indicate the minimum value is set (Fig. 124 S3656), in the time-saving remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123), when a plurality of pre-end conditions are satisfied (S3602 in FIG. 124), it is set to OFF (see S3608 in FIG. 123).

As a result, the player can be notified of the period in which the time saving end condition cannot be established after the time saving state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy that the time saving state ends immediately after the time saving state is set. Therefore, the player can play a game without worrying about the termination of the time-saving state during the time-saving state.

In addition, in the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not to set the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb to ON by referring to the values of all counters set corresponding to all the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state. However, it is sufficient that it is possible to determine the period during which the player can play games during the time saving state with peace of mind, for example, it can be established in the current time saving state. A time-saving state discriminating means for discriminating a time-saving end condition is provided, and only the value of the counter corresponding to the time-saving end condition discriminated by the time-saving state discriminating means is referred to to discriminate whether or not a fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON. Alternatively, a discrimination means for discriminating a time-saving end condition that cannot be established in the current time-saving state is provided, and only the counter value corresponding to the time-saving end condition discriminated by the discrimination means is excluded. Then, it may be determined whether or not to set the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb to ON.

<Regarding control processing in main controller 110 of the third embodiment>
The control processing in the third embodiment differs from the control processing in the first embodiment in the contents of the control processing in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 . Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is changed to timer interrupt processing 3 (see FIG. 118) in contrast to the first embodiment described above, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is changed. ) in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43), the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 119) and the start winning process performed in the above-described second embodiment Processing 2 (see FIG. 96) is executed, and further, the small winning control processing is different in that the small winning control processing is changed to the small winning control processing 3 (see FIG. 120), and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, the detailed description of the contents of the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the above-described second embodiment is also omitted.

First, the content of timer interrupt processing 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing 3. FIG. In this timer interrupt process 3, in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above, Special symbol variation processing 3 (see FIG. 119) and start winning processing 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the above-described second embodiment, and V entrance passage processing (see FIG. 47) and V passage processing (see FIG. 48) is not executed.

When this timer interrupt process 3 is executed, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above. Then, when the process of S103 is completed, the special symbol variation process 3 is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (S174). The details of the special symbol variation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, instead of the starting winning process (see FIG. 43), the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the above-described second embodiment is executed (S155). The details of this starting winning process 2 are the same as those of the above-described second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processes of S106 and S107 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 37), and then S110 of the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 37). , and the process ends.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S174) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S174). In this special symbol variation process 3, in contrast to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above, the point of acquiring the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab and the small hit start setting The difference is that the start of the small hit is set instead of the processing.

When this special symbol variation process 3 (S174) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are performed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. In the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not changing (S202: No), S251 to S251 which are the same as the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 94) of the second embodiment described above The process of S255 is executed. Details of the processing of S251 to S255 are the same as those of the above-described second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the processing of S252, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38 ), the same processing of S206-S210 as the processing of S206-S210 of ) is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S202: Yes), S211 to S220 as in the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38) process is executed. In the process of S220, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small win (S220: Yes), a small win open scenario according to the small win type set corresponding to the won small win, The open scenario 3 table 202bd is referred to and set (S271). Next, the start of the small hit is set (S272), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit medium flag 203g are set to ON (S273). After that, a small winning time saving update process is executed (S274), and the process ends. This small hit time saving update process (S274) is a small hit start setting process (FIG. 40, S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. It is the same processing as the winning time saving update processing (FIG. 41, S405), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the contents of the small winning control process 3 (S1555) will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S1555). This small hit control process 3 (S1555) is the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, instead of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment It is a process to be executed, and the process related to the V flag 203i and the V passing flag 203j is deleted from the above-described small winning control process (see FIG. 53), and the target to be operated during the small winning game is the V winning device The difference is that the second variable winning device 1650 is used instead of the 650 .

When the small hit control process 3 (S1555) is started, first, the same process as S1701 to S1705 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) is executed, and in the process of S1705, the second variable winning opening is opened If it is determined that it is the timing (timing to open the winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650) (S1705: Yes), S1706 which is the same as S1706 of the above-described small winning control process (see FIG. 53) Execute the process, and then terminate this process. In addition, the processing of S1701 to S1706 executed in the small winning control processing 3 is for executing the operation of opening the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650, and the small winning of the first embodiment described above. Although the object of operation is different from that of the control process (see FIG. 53), since the contents of control are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

Also, in the process of S1705, if it is not the second variable winning hole open timing (S1705: No), the same processes as S1711 to S1715 of the above-described small winning control process (see FIG. 53) are executed. In the process of S1715, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending production (S1715: Yes), the process of S1720, which is the same as the process of S1720 of the above-described small hit control process (see FIG. 53), is executed, End this process.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment configured as described above is configured to be able to set the normal state and the time-saving state as the game state, and the period in which the normal state is set is provided in the left area. A left-handed game is performed in which a ball is entered into a ball entrance 64 and a lottery for the first special pattern is executed, a big win is won in the lottery for the first special pattern, and a time saving state is set after the big win game is executed. When it is done, a right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol.

The time-saving state, which is a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbols is likely to be executed, is a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, that is, the number of fluctuations end condition established based on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbols (the number of times of lottery), Alternatively, it is continuously set until any of the conditions for ending the number of times of winning established based on the number of times of winning small wins by lottery of the second special symbol is satisfied.

By varying the content of the time-saving end condition according to the type of the winning jackpot, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the time-saving state ends (the period during which the time-saving state is set to continue). are doing. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the advantageous game state will continue for a long time.

In addition, even if the time-saving end condition is set so that the time-saving state is difficult to end, the time-saving end condition is set to end the time-saving state early by the lottery result of the special symbol or to easily end the time-saving state. Also, since the time saving state can be continued for a long time depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, the game state that is advantageous to the player is longer than the game machine in which the time saving state is set for a predetermined specific period. The game can be played while expecting the continuation of the game.

<Regarding control processing in the audio ramp control device 113 of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124, control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the command determination process (see FIG. 56) is replaced with the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 121), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) is changed to the effect setting process (see FIG. 63). The difference is that it is changed to the setting process 3 (see FIG. 122), and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, command determination processing 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S2183). This command determination process 3 (S2183) is the same as the command determination process 2 of the second embodiment (see S2163 of FIG. 99) in contrast to the command determination process (S2113 of FIG. 56) of the first embodiment. The point of executing the winning information related process (see S2251 in FIG. 100) and the point of changing the contents of the process to be executed when a command related to time saving is received are different, and the others are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S2183 of FIG. 121) is executed, the command determination process of the first embodiment (S2113 of FIG. 56) or the command determination process 2 of the second embodiment (S2163 of FIG. 99) If it is determined that the command received this time is a time saving related command in the processing of S2215 after that, (S2215: Yes), Next, the contents of the time saving information update area 223g After updating, the process proceeds to S2217. That is, in the third embodiment, when a time-saving-related command is received, the received command is stored as it is, instead of performing processing for varying the corresponding flags and counters as in the above-described first embodiment. Processing is performed.

Then, using the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to grasp the time saving state. Also in the third embodiment, when a time-saving related command is received as in the first embodiment described above, the corresponding flags and counters are changed as in the first embodiment described above. can be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the process of effect setting process 3 (S2871) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process 3 (S2871). In this effect setting process 3 (S2871), based on the progress of the time saving state (situation until the time saving end condition is satisfied (remaining fluctuation number) and the number of fluctuations after the time saving state is set), of the time saving state An effect mode of the effect for suggesting the remaining period is set.

When the effect setting process 3 (S2871) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read (S2901), and then it is determined whether the read information is the time saving state (S2902). . If it is determined that it is not in the time-saving state (S2902: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S2902: Yes), the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is read (S3351), and the special symbol type (special figure 1 Or, special figure 2), the lottery result is extracted from the variation pattern (S3352), and it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied with this variation (S3353).

As a result of the determination in S3353, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied (S3353: Yes), a display time saving command indicating the time saving end is set (S3355), and this process ends. In the process of S3354, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (not done) (S3354: No), then it is determined whether the remaining time saving number determination flag 223ba is set to ON (S3356), If it is determined that it is set to ON (S3356: Yes), a display time saving command indicating the number of remaining time saving times is set (S3357), and this process ends.

Then, in the process of S3356, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is not set to ON (S3356: No), the remaining time reduction period determination process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 123, is executed (S3358). , the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the contents of the remaining working hours determination process (S3358) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the contents of the remaining working hours determination process (S3358). In this time-saving remaining period determination process (S3358), the time-saving information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g, that is, according to the time-saving information updated based on the command transmitted from the main controller 110, the current time-saving A process for determining the situation and setting an effect mode based on the determination result is executed.

When the time saving remaining period determination processing (S3358) is executed, first, the time saving remaining period is determined based on the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba using the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g (S3601). . Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the remaining period has reached the pre-end condition more than once (S3602). , the process ends. It should be noted that the contents of the fixed fluctuation determination process (S3063) will be described later with reference to FIG. , A process for determining a period (number of times of special symbol variation) in which the time saving state does not always end when the variation of the special symbol (lottery) is performed is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a plurality of remaining periods have reached the conditions before termination (S3602: Yes), it is determined whether the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3604), and the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is turned ON. If it is determined that it is not set (set to OFF) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions has been determined. A time saving command for display indicating the mode is set (S3605), and the process ends. When the time saving command for display indicating the combination mode is set in the process of S3605, the combination status display mode Dm11z as shown in FIG. 107(b) is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving end condition is likely to be satisfied, and to notify that a plurality of time-saving end conditions have reached just before the establishment (that is, the time-saving state is long It is possible to notify that it is continuing).

In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3604: Yes), the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to OFF (S3608), and whether the number of remaining time reductions described above is fixed to the process of determining . Further, in the process of S3604, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions has been determined, then information indicating the number of remaining time reductions is stored in the time reduction information update area 223g (S3606), and the display time reduction indicating the number of remaining time reductions is stored. A command is set (S3607), the remaining time reduction number determination fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3608), and the process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the fixed fluctuation determination process (S3063) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fixed fluctuation determination process (S3063). In this fixed fluctuation determination process (S3063), as described above, the period in which the set time saving state cannot be terminated is determined, and a command for displaying that effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is issued. The setting process is executed. As a result, in a gaming machine having a game property (a game property having a plurality of time saving end conditions) where it is difficult to know when the time saving state ends, the player can see the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 110) ), it is possible to grasp the period during which the game can be played with peace of mind.

When the fixed change determination process (S3063) is executed, it is first determined whether the fixed change flag 223bb is set to ON (S3651), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S3651: No), time saving Medium counter 203k, small hit A counter 203m, small hit B counter 203n, values corresponding to small hit C counter 203p are read from the time saving information update area 223g, and the minimum value is extracted (S3652).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S3652, based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, it is configured to determine the values of the above-described various counters that the RAM203 of the main controller 110 has. However, without being limited to this, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a variable counter that is synchronized with the various counters of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 described above, and is configured to make a determination based on the value of the counter. Also good.

It is determined whether the minimum value extracted in the process of S3652 is a condition value (15 or more in this embodiment) that can be notified as a fixed variation (S3653). : Yes), then set a display time-saving command indicating the minimum value (S3654), set the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb to ON (S3655), and end this process.

By configuring in this way, only when the period (the number of special symbol fluctuations) in which the time saving state cannot end is a predetermined number or more, it is possible to notify the player to that effect, so that the fixed fluctuation The effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 only when the flag 223bb is set to ON can be made the effect mode for allowing the player to play the game with peace of mind. In other words, for example, when the period during which the time saving state cannot end (the number of times of special symbol fluctuations) is one time, the player is notified to that effect, and the player is prevented from feeling uneasy. be able to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the period during which the time saving state cannot be terminated (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, an effect mode for notifying the player to that effect is set. However, without being limited to this, the content to be notified to the player may be changed based on the operation content of the operation means that the player can operate. For example, when the player performs a specific operation In this case, even if the period during which the time saving state cannot end (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is less than a predetermined number of times, it may be configured to notify that effect, or the player performs a special operation. In that case, the period during which the time saving state cannot be terminated (the number of times of special symbol fluctuations) may be configured to notify that effect only when the number of special times is greater than the predetermined number of times.

In the process of S3653, if it is determined that the minimum value is less than the condition value (15) (S3653: No), the display time-saving command corresponding to the updated time-saving information is set (S3656), and this process ends. do. If it is determined in the process of S3651 that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3651: Yes), the processes of S3652 and S3653 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3654.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 153. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be drawn (fluctuation) at the same time (in parallel). They are different in terms of their structure.

Then, as a time-saving state, a time-saving state in which the variation time of the first special symbol is likely to be selected longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the second special symbol is drawn (varied) more often). time-saving state) and a time-saving state in which the variation time of the first special symbol is likely to be selected longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the time-saving state in which the first special symbol is more often drawn (varied). state) and can be set, and game states with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided in the time saving state.

Moreover, it is different in that different productions (display of the number of times of time saving) are executed corresponding to the plurality of time saving states described above.

Here, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the fourth embodiment will be described with respect to the differences from the above-described first embodiment. FIG. 125 is a front view of the game board 13 used in the game machine of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 125, the game board 13 of this embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right-handed area is different. In this figure, a ball launched in a left-handed game flows down a left-handed (left) region along an arrow PA1 shown on the game board 13, and a ball launched in a right-handed game flows down the game board. It is configured to flow down the right hitting (right side) area along the arrow PA2 shown in 13 .

As shown in FIG. 125, in the present embodiment, a first starting opening 64 (hereinafter referred to as a left first starting opening 64) is provided below the variable display unit 80. As shown in FIG. The left first starting port 64 has an opening large enough to allow one game ball to enter on the upper surface. They are widely spaced. By adjusting the inclination of this nail, the winning rate of the game to the left side first start port 64 (for example, when 250 game balls are fired, the number of game balls that win the left side first start port 64 ratio) can be varied.

In the right region of the variable display unit 80, a second starting port 640 and a first starting port 64 (hereinafter referred to as a right first starting port 64) are arranged vertically in parallel. The second starting port 640 has an opening on the side surface of the decorative member attached to the game board 60, through which one game ball can enter. A normal electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 is arranged on the front side (facing surface) of the opening. This ordinary electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls, and one end thereof is rotatably supported. Then, based on the winning of the second symbol, a predetermined number of times (once or twice in this embodiment) and a predetermined number of seconds (0.5 seconds or 1 second in this embodiment) can be guided to the second starting port 640 (direction away from the opening) at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in this embodiment). The ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In the normal state (other than when the second symbol is hit), the opening of the second starting port 640a is closed (vertically standing state).

Also, the right first starting port 64 is arranged below the second starting port 640 . Then, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in an open state (tilted in the horizontal direction), the normal electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position facing the opening of the right first start port 64. By configuring in this way, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it is possible to configure a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right first start port 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is the high probability state (probability variable state) and the time-saving game state, the probability that the second symbol is determined as winning is increased. Further, when the game state is the low-probability game state, the player shoots the game ball so that the game ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the game ball wins the left first starting port 64.例文帳に追加Play the game so that Then, the third pattern becomes a win, and the probability that the second pattern is determined to be a win increases when shifting to a variable probability game or a time-saving game. It is As a result, the player executes the game by shooting the game ball so as to pass through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game). In this case, the probability that the normal electric accessory 640a will be in the open state is high, so that the second starting port 640 is easily won, while the right first starting port 64 is less likely to win.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the variable probability gaming state, winning with the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than with the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, 50% of the jackpots are jackpots that are likely to be given probability variations after the jackpot games, and the remaining 50% are easy to give time-saving games (low probability game state) after the jackpot games ( It is configured so that a jackpot is given (hard to give a variable probability game).

On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when a big win is achieved, a 100% jackpot that is likely to be given a probability variable game after the jackpot game is awarded. That is, it is configured such that the probability variation gaming state is likely to be given to those who are elected in the second special symbol.

In addition, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the distance between the tip of the normal electric accessory 640a and the variable display unit 80 is 1 or more and less than 2 game balls. It is an interval of A through gate 67 having a gate-shaped opening is arranged so that a game ball flowing down the interval can easily pass through the through gate 67. - 特許庁A game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is difficult to enter the right first starting port 64 due to the nail arranged downstream of the through gate 67 . Specifically, on the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, the game ball flows down to the opening side of the right first starting port 64 by a nail arranged in the upper part of the opening of the right first starting port 64. It is configured with an interval (less than one game ball) that does not occur, and is configured to flow downward through the windmill as it is. That is, when winning the right first starting port 64, the normal electric accessory 640a is configured so as to be limited to being maintained in a closed state (vertically standing state).

In this embodiment, in the open state of the normal electric accessory 640a, it is configured not to win the right first starting port 64, but not limited to this, the game ball flowing down from the exit of the through gate 67 is the right first starting It is also possible to configure the opening 64 at an interval that allows winning, lower the ratio, and allow winning to the right first start opening 64 .

Next, the contents of the effect mode (the effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device) in the time saving state in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. First, with reference to Drawing 126, the display screen at the time of time saving state entry displayed corresponding to the classification of the set time saving state is explained.

In the fourth embodiment, although the details will be described later, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed (lottery) at the same time (in parallel). By making the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol different, a first time-saving state in which the variation of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than the variation of the second special symbol during the time-saving state, and the first special symbol. A second time saving state in which the variation of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the variation of , can be set.

Only the lottery of the second special symbol is set so that a small win is won, and when a small win is won, two kinds of wins can be obtained as in the above-described first embodiment. In addition, by simultaneously (parallel) changing (lottery) a plurality of special symbols, a specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery of one special symbol so as not to generate a lottery result that is advantageous to the player at the same time. When winning (for example, winning), the other special symbol during variation is forcibly stopped and displayed with a stop symbol indicating a loss.

Furthermore, when the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), time saving is performed in correspondence with the fluctuation start timing of each special symbol executed simultaneously (side by side). It is configured so that the number of times the state is set (time reduction number of times) is subtracted.

That is, when the first time-saving state in which the first special symbol mainly fluctuates is set, the time-saving game is likely to be performed in accordance with the number of fluctuations of the special symbol set as the time-saving end condition, but the second special symbol. When the second time-saving state that mainly fluctuates is set, the first special symbol during fluctuation is forcibly stopped based on the small hit as described above, so it is set as a time-saving end condition. There is a problem that a large difference occurs between the number of fluctuations of the special symbols and the number of games actually executed.

Specifically, when the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times is set as the time saving end condition, when the first time saving state is set, the first special symbol When configured so that only variation (lottery) is executed (so that a long time (longer time than the first special symbol varies 100 times) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol), the first time saving It is possible to execute about 100 special symbol variations during the state (the second special symbol will not be forced to stop due to the lottery result of the first special symbol).

On the other hand, when the second time saving state is set in the case where the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times is set as the time saving end condition, the second special symbol Only the variation (lottery) is executed (so that a long time (longer time than the second special symbol varies 100 times) is set as the variation time of the first special symbol), and In the lottery of the second special pattern, when it is constructed so as to win the small prize with a probability of approximately 1/1 (probability excepting only the probability of winning the big prize), the small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern. Each time, the variation of the first special symbol is forced to stop, so the actual number of variations is about 50 times.

In this way, even if the same condition is set as the time saving end condition, in the type of time saving game to be executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed while the time saving state is set (forced stop The number of fluctuations without ) will be different. In such a case, if the actually set number of times of time saving (for example, 100 times) is displayed to the player regardless of the type of the time saving state that is set, the time saving state that gives the player a sense of discomfort. There was a problem that it would provide

Therefore, in this embodiment, according to the type of the time saving state to be set, on the display screen (time saving state entry screen) when the time saving state is set, the number of times of time saving (remaining time saving number of times) to notify the player are configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a time-saving state that makes the player feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration for displaying the number of times of time saving to be notified to the player differently (the number of times of remaining time saving) to be notified to the player according to the type of the set time saving state, the remaining time saving to notify the player When the number of times and the actual number of times of shortening remaining time are different, it is configured to execute a process of correcting the number of times of shortening remaining time to be notified to the player.

By configuring in this way, for example, in the state where the first time saving state is set, by temporarily interrupting the game in the middle of the game, the second special symbol is executed multiple times, or the second time saving state is set In this state, even if the lottery result of the second special pattern wins a big win or a loss other than a small win and the first special pattern in fluctuation cannot be forcibly stopped, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to synchronize the notified number of remaining time reductions with the actual number of remaining time reductions.

Specifically, when the second time-saving state (time-saving A) described above is set, as shown in FIG. Even if reaching 100 times is set as a time saving end condition, ``50'' is displayed in the remaining time saving frequency display area Dm10 in consideration of the number of times of forcibly stopping the special pattern fluctuation by winning the small prize, and the first time. When the time saving state (time saving B) is set, "100" is displayed in the remaining time saving number display area Dm10 as shown in FIG. 126(b).

Thus, when the second time-saving state is set, the player can be made to think that the time-saving end condition is set such that the number of variations of the special symbol is 50 times. Even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is updated (subtracted) due to the forced stop of the special symbols, the number of remaining time reduction displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 is updated (subtracted) according to the update (subtraction). Since it is configured to update (subtract) the number of remaining time reduction displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 according to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is continuously set. It is possible to update (subtract) the period (the number of special symbol fluctuations) without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the present fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126(a) and (b), when the time saving state is set, the configuration is such that the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol are not displayed in the sub-display area Ds. are doing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from perceiving the number of variations of the special symbols that are actually executed while the time saving state is set, by the mode of digestion of the reserved symbols. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, instead of displaying the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol in the sub display area Ds, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm Special figure 1 reserved ball number display An area Dm6 and a special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm7 are formed. You may provide the notification means which uses a part and notifies the number of reservation balls of each special design in a light emission mode. Furthermore, this notification means may be used in the configuration of each embodiment described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the contents of the correction effect for correcting the number of times of remaining time reduction displayed in the above-described remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions displayed on the display screen (time reduction state setting screen) when the time reduction state is set is changed according to the type of the set game state. (see FIG. 126). In this case, for example, the game is temporarily interrupted in the state where the first time saving state is set, and the second special symbol is executed multiple times, or the second special symbol is executed in the state where the second time saving state is set. If the lottery result is lost and the first special pattern is not forcibly stopped, or if the special pattern changes under conditions different from the usual, the number of times of remaining time shortening reported and the actual remaining time shortening There was a possibility that the number of times would be different.

As such a case, for example, during the time saving game in which the time saving A is set and the second special design mainly fluctuates, if the lottery result of the second special design is lost and the first special design is not forcibly stopped, That is, when the actual number of times of reduced remaining time is greater than the number of times corresponding to the notified number of reduced remaining time, first, as shown in FIG. It is stopped, and the same effect mode (concept including an error that the player hardly notices) is displayed in the main display area Dm when notifying the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. In other words, during the variable display of the second special symbol, a pseudo stop effect is executed to make the player think that the variation of the special symbol has stopped, and the display mode of the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 is made to correspond to the pseudo stop effect. (Remaining short time count for notification) is updated (subtracted), and a correction effect is executed so as to be in the state shown in FIG. 127(b).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize the notified number of remaining time reductions with the actual number of remaining time reductions without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, although detailed description will be given later, this correction effect is performed only when the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (second special symbol) is a predetermined time or more (30 seconds or more) It is configured so that Therefore, even if the pseudo stop effect is executed during one time of the special symbol fluctuation period, the player does not feel uncomfortable. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, if the actual number of times of remaining time reduction is less than the number of times corresponding to the notified number of times of remaining time reduction, display of the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 across a plurality of special symbol variations An effect (multiple variation fusion effect) for updating (subtracting) the mode (remaining time reduction number for notification) may be executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 135, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 are changed from the above-described first embodiment. differ.

FIG. 128(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. The ROM 202 has at least a first winning random number 4 table 202ca, a first winning type selection 4 table 202cb, a second winning random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd, and a small winning type selection 4 table 202ce. It is

First, the first winning random number 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 129(a). FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 4 table 202ca. In this first per random number 4 table 202ca, as in the first embodiment described above, a random number table corresponding to the first special symbol and a random number table corresponding to the second special symbol are defined. It is different from the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 20(a)) in that the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol is replaced with the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2. are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(b), the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 will be described. FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2. As shown in FIG. 129(b), this special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 is different from the above-described special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in that the range determined as a small hit is from "5 to 989" to "5 to 998". ” and otherwise the same. That is, in the lottery for the second special symbol in the fourth embodiment, a small hit is won with a probability of 994/1000.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130(a), the first winning type selection 4 table 202cb will be described. FIG. 130(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 4 table 202cb. This first hit type selection 4 table 202cb replaces the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 with respect to the above-described first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 21(a)). The table 202cb1 is different in that a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 is provided instead of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 130(b). FIG. 130(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1. This special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1 is compared with the above-described special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 21(b)), the content of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type, and after the jackpot game ends The game state to be set is different.

Specifically, when the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, and then the time saving state (time saving A) is set, and when the jackpot B is selected , 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed as jackpot games, and then a time-saving state (time-saving A) is set. Then, when the jackpot C is selected, a jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, and then the normal state is set. That is, the jackpot types A and B are jackpots in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot C is a jackpot in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time-saving states (time-saving A, time-saving B) are set as time-saving states that can be set after the jackpot game ends.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the time saving A is set as the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed as a game during the time saving state, and when the time saving B is set, the time saving state is set. As a game, the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In this way, it is possible to set different game specifications in the time saving state by varying the variation (lottery) of the special symbols that are mainly executed during the time saving state according to the time saving state to be set. Become. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having game specifications equal to or greater than the types of game states that can be set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 130(c). FIG. 130(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2. This special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 is defined corresponding to the possible values of the first hit type counter value C2 with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 21(c)) The difference is that the types of jackpot types to be played are increased, the content of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type, and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished are different.

Specifically, as the jackpot types, the jackpot D is defined in the range of the first hit type counter value C2 of "0 to 69", and the jackpot E is defined in the range of "70 to 99". Then, when the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, and then the time-saving state (time-saving A) is set, and when the jackpot E is selected, the jackpot. A jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed as a game, and then a time saving state (time saving B) is set.

In other words, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, and the time saving state A is set in 70% of them, and the time saving B is set in 30%. . Here, when the time saving A is set as the time saving state, the time saving game centering on the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is executed again. On the other hand, when time saving B is set, a time saving game mainly based on lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol is executed.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in the normal state and probability variable state, left-handed hitting is performed, and when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the latent probability state is advantageous at a rate of 58% (jackpots B, D). configured to move to Then, in the latent definite state, the player hits to the right, and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the advantageous latent definite state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hits E to G). Therefore, once the latent state (probability variable state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is performed by winning the second ball entrance 1640 by hitting to the right. It is easy to execute, and the state of high jackpot probability and the jackpot of the second special symbol are likely to be repeated. Therefore, the player can play the game with the purpose of making the transition to the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the variation pattern 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. As described above, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd defines random values for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 131, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd includes a normal variation pattern table 202cd1 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, and a time saving A table for determining the variation pattern in the time saving state At least a variation pattern table 202cd2 and a variation pattern table for time saving B 202cd3 are defined. Next, specific contents of each of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. In each table shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the fluctuation time is expressed in units of milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in units of seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. This normal variation pattern table 202cd1 is a table referred to when the game state is the normal state. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal variation pattern table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 132, the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 is a random value for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and stop type of special symbol (result of judgment) ( counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) is defined.

Specifically, the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol (special figure 1) wins (jackpot) in the lottery is normal reach ( 20 seconds) is associated, and super reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 198".

On the other hand, if the first special symbol (special figure 1) is lost in the lottery, a short out (8 seconds) variation pattern is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 70". A variation pattern of long outliers (12 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 120", and a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "121 to 170". In addition, super reach (30 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, which is out of the range of "171 to 198".

Furthermore, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the out long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thus, when right-handed hitting is performed in the normal state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the variation time is set to 600 seconds each time, so the game efficiency is extremely worse than left-handed hitting. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133(a), details of the variation pattern table 202cd2 for time saving A will be described. FIG. 133(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving A fluctuation pattern table 202cd2. The variation pattern table 202cd2 for time saving A is referred to for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a state in which the time saving A is set among the time saving states. is a table.

As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the first special symbol (special figure 1) jackpot has a jackpot super short variation (1 second ) are defined in association with each other. In addition, the deviation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) and the super long variation (60 seconds). there is

On the other hand, the jackpot of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in association with the jackpot short fluctuation (5 seconds) for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, The small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in association with the small hit short fluctuation (5 seconds) for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the deviation of 2 special symbols (special figure 2), deviation short fluctuation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the whole range of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0 to 198).

Next, details of the time saving B variation pattern table 202cd3 will be described with reference to FIG. 133(b). FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving B variation pattern table 202cd3. This time-saving B variation pattern table 202cd3 is referred to for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a state in which the time-saving B is set among the time-saving states. is a table.

As shown in FIG. 133(b), the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a jackpot short variation (5 seconds) for the full range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) are defined in association with each other. In addition, the deviation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) and the super long variation (5 seconds). there is

On the other hand, in the jackpot of the second special symbol (special figure 2), a jackpot super-short variation (1 second) is defined in association with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take. , The small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in association with the small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) for the entire range of values that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0 to 198), In the deviation of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the deviation long variation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, details of the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce will be described. This small hit type selection 4 table 202ce is a data table referred to for determining the type of small hit when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit. In this small hit type selection 4 table 202ce, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 134, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 69" in association with "small hit A". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which a small hit game of the same opening pattern as the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the small hit type counter C5, 70 random numbers become "small hit A", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit A" is obtained. is determined 70% (70/100).

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "small hit B". This "small win B" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to be opened 6 times for 0.06 seconds during the small win game. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, since the number of random numbers that become the "small winning B" is 30, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small winning, the "small winning B" is obtained. is determined is 30% (30/100).

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 137 to 151, control processing of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, in contrast to each of the above-described embodiments, it is significantly different in that the lottery (fluctuation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is configured to be redundantly executable. are different.

Then, in the state where the time saving state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed more frequently than the lottery of the second special symbol (first time saving state), and the lottery of the first special symbol. It is different in that it is configured to be able to set the time saving state (second time saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is more frequently executed than.

In the fourth embodiment, the first time saving state and the second time saving state which is more advantageous than the first time saving state can be set as the time saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player. , a plurality of game states with different advantageous levels can be provided to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 137, special symbol variation processing 4 (S194), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 4 (S194). The special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194) performs various judgments and determinations based on each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the variable display mode determined by a predetermined control, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to simultaneously perform variable display, or stop display is performed in a display mode indicating the determination result. control is executed. The special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (whether or not the jackpot flag 203d is ON) (S7001), and the jackpot is in progress (during the jackpot). If it is determined that the flag 203d is on (S7001: Yes), there is no need to set the lottery of special symbols or the stoppage of the variable display, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not in the big hit (the flag 203d during the big hit is off) (S7001: No), whether or not the small hit game is in progress (whether the flag 203g during the small hit is on) is determined (S7002). In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that the small winning medium flag 203g is on (S7002: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the small hit (the flag 203g during the small hit is off) (S7002: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S7003).

In the process of S7003, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S7003: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S7005), and the process proceeds to S7006. Here, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005), when the variation time of the first special symbol during variable display has elapsed, processing for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol being changed is forcibly stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the loss. executed. Details of the first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S7003, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S7003: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. On the condition that it is, the first special symbol variation start processing for executing the big hit determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the reserved data is executed (S7004), and the processing proceeds to S7006. The details of this first special symbol variation start process (S7004) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the processing of S7006 executed after the first special symbol variation start processing (S7004) or the first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005) is performed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in variation. Then (S7006), if the second special symbol is being changed and displayed (S7006: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S7008), and this process ends. This second special symbol variation stop processing (S7008) is similar to the first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005), when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol during variable display has elapsed, the second special symbol It is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result. The details of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S7006, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S7006: No), on the condition that a new start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected, A special symbol lottery is executed to execute a second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display (S7007), and this process is terminated. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the variation (lottery) control of the first special symbol and the variation (lottery) control of the second special symbol are configured to be executed independently. . By configuring in this way, regardless of whether or not the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery for the special symbol a plurality of times in a short period of time, and the game efficiency can be improved.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a special symbol lottery wins a big win or a small win, and while a winning game (big win game, small win game) based on the winning is being executed, new special symbols are drawn. It is configured so that the variation (lottery) is not started. By constructing in this way, it is not necessary to perform a complicated act of predicting the lottery result of the special symbols while playing the winning game, and the player can be made to pay attention to the winning game during the winning game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, one of the plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that one special symbol has won the jackpot. In the event that the other special symbol is changed, it is configured to forcibly stop and display the other special symbol in a display mode indicating the deviation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the special symbols fluctuate during the jackpot game, or a state in which one special pattern wins the jackpot (during the jackpot game) and the other special pattern wins the jackpot. Since it can be eliminated, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in the present fourth embodiment, the special symbol variation start processing and the special symbol variation stop processing are not executed in any of the big winning game and the small winning game, but it is limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the special symbol variation start processing and the special symbol variation stop processing may not be executed only during the big win game, or the special symbol variation start processing may be performed during the big win game or the small win game. , and a special symbol variation stop process may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute more variations of special symbols (lottery), so that the player can enjoy the game in a short period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the first special symbol variation start process (S7004), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S7004).

In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S7101), and the acquired value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b ( N1) is a value greater than 0 (S7102). In the processing of S7102, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (S7102: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted by 1 Then (S7103), a pending ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203b after subtraction is set (S7104).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control is performed. It is sent towards device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b.

When the process of S7104 is completed, next, the data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S7105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the processing of S7105 is completed, next, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing is executed (S7106). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 138, S7106) will be described later in detail. It is a process for executing a big win determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the game state being played.

When the process of S7106 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 138, S7107). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) includes the determination result of the first special symbol, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of .

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) ends, next, the game state update process is executed (S7108). This game state update process (FIG. 138, S7108) updates the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 (time saving medium counter 203k), although the details will be described later. This is a process for When the process of S7108 ends, this process ends. A detailed description of this game state update process will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S7102, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S7102: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the first special symbol big hit determination process (S7106), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S7106).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7201). Next, it is determined whether or not the range of the random numbers for the big win or the small win specified in the first winning random number table 202a matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer. A determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S7202).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S7202 is a jackpot (S7203), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S7203: Yes), the jackpot flag 203ca is turned on for the first special symbol. Set (S7204), and set the lottery result of the first special symbol to a big hit (S7205). Then, based on the value of the obtained winning type counter, the first special symbol jackpot symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7206), and the value corresponding to the current game state (for example, in the normal state If there is, it is 0, and if it is a time saving state, 1) is stored (set) in the winning state storage area 203cf (S7207), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7203, when it is determined that the lottery result is out (S7203: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7208), and then , the process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so as not to win a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, when it is determined that it is not a big hit in the process of S7203 (S7203: No), the lottery result is out. It is determined that there is, and the processing of S7208 is configured to be executed. If it is determined (S7203: No), it may be determined whether or not a small prize is won, and the processing according to the determination result may be executed. In this case, with respect to special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (see S7708 in FIG. 145), which will be described later with reference to FIG. do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 140, S7107), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol was determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first It is determined whether or not a jackpot of 1 special symbol is set (S7301). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the big hit flag 203ca is turned on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON in the processing of S7204 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 139).

In the processing of S7301, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S7301: Yes), the first Based on the value of the per type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined (selected) from the first per type selection 4 table 202cb (see FIG. 130) (S7302), and the process proceeds to S7303.

On the other hand, in the process of S7301, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203ca for the first special symbol is off) (S7301: No), the process of S7302 is performed. Skip and move to the processing of S7303.

In the process of S7303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7303). Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S7304), and the process proceeds to S7305. Here, in the fourth embodiment, the time saving state that can be set as a game state is advantageous to the player, time saving A (first time saving state), and time saving B (second time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than time saving A state) can be set, the game state that can be set is configured to be three types of normal state, time saving A, and time saving B, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k, and the time saving The current game state is determined based on the information stored in the state storage area 203cd.

Specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0, it is determined that the current game state is the normal state, and when the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (not 0), the current game A state is discriminate|determined with a time saving state. And, when the information indicating the time saving A in the time saving state storage area 203cd (for example, the information indicating the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set) is stored, the current game state is the time saving A (first time saving state). If it is determined that there is, and information indicating the time saving B is stored in the time saving state storage area 203cd (for example, information indicating the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set), the current gaming state is the time saving B (second time saving state).

The configuration for determining the current gaming state is not limited to the configuration used in the fourth embodiment, and other configurations may be used. For example, a game state storage area is provided to temporarily store the currently set game state while constantly updating it, and the current game state is determined using the information stored in the game state storage area. You can By configuring in this way, although the capacity of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased, the current game state can be reliably determined. Furthermore, even when the types of game states that can be set are increased (for example, four types), it is possible to easily determine the current game state.

In the process of S7305, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (variation pattern table corresponding to the current gaming state) (7305), and then based on the selected variation pattern , Set the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S7306).

When the processing of S7306 ends, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop design is set (S7307). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S7308), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the game state update process (S7108), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 138), will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing this game state update process (S7108). In this game state update process (see S7108 in FIG. 141), a process for subtracting the number of special symbol fluctuations set continuously in the time saving state is executed.

That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the update of the time saving end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is configured to be executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, whereas this In the fourth embodiment, the update of the time saving end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is executed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, even when using a process that can independently execute the variation (lottery) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (variation start of special symbol Even if the order and the special symbol variation stop order are changed), it is possible to appropriately set the time saving state corresponding to the predetermined special symbol variation frequency.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 141) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (S7401). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S7401: No), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state, the processing of S7402 and S7403 is skipped, and this End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S7401: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203k is set to 1 After subtracting (S7402) and setting the remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the counter 203k during time reduction (S7403), this process is terminated.

The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the remaining time reduction command, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the time reduction counter 203k from the remaining time reduction command, and stores the extracted value in the time reduction information update area 223g of the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the time saving information update area 223g according to the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the value of the time saving medium counter 203k of the main control device 110 Synchronizes You can update its value while

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the first special symbol variation stop process (S7005), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation stop process (S7005). In this first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005), when the variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped, and when the first special symbol stops with a combination of symbols indicating a big hit, during variation A process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol with a combination of symbols indicating the deviation is executed.

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 142, S7005), first, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation display of the first special symbol (S7501), and if it is determined that it is the end timing ( S7501: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S7502). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the first special symbol (S7502: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7503), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203cc has been turned on (S7504). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a symbol (S7505).

When the processing of S7505 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S7506), and the jackpot flag 203ca and the counter 203k during time saving are reset (S7507). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S7508), the jackpot middle flag 203d is set to ON (S7509), and the process proceeds to S7510.

On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S7502: No), the process of S7503 to S7509 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7510.

In the process of S7510, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is fixed and stopped (stopped display) is set (S7510). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S7511), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7501, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S7501: No), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S7512), this process ends. The special symbols are variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 while the processing of S7512 is being executed.

Thus, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005), when the prescribed variation time of the first special symbol during variable display has passed (S7501: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game A process (S7503 to S7511) for stopping the variable display is executed. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S7502: Yes), a process (S7503, S7504) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

In the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being changed is forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol. is not limited to For example, it may be configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed (after the jackpot game is completed), the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a more natural presentation than when the game is forcibly stopped due to a failure.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, based on the game state stored in the state storage area 203cf at the time of winning in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 139), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 142) ), the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S7506, for example, using the opening period of the jackpot game, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) is stored in the winning state storage area 203cf A jackpot scenario may be set in the process of S7506 based on the game state.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol (one) is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol (other) is forcibly stopped and displayed as a missing symbol. , but not limited to this, for example, when the stop symbol of one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is stopped with a small winning symbol, that is, a combination of stopping symbols indicating that a small winning has been won, The other design (for example, the second special design) may be configured to be forcibly stopped in the off design, or at the time when the small winning design of one design (for example, the first special design) is stopped and displayed, the other design. The variable display of the symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). After the jackpot of one pattern (for example, the first special pattern) is finished (after the jackpot game is finished), the variable display of the other pattern (for example, the second special pattern) may be restarted.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment and the above-described example, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with a specific stop symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) indicating a hit, the other special symbol is stopped or temporarily changed. Although the configuration to stop has been described, as long as it is configured so that both winning games are not executed at the same time, other configurations may be used. symbol), the variation of the other special symbol is continued without being stopped or temporarily stopped, and during execution of the winning game based on one special symbol (for example, a jackpot game), the other special symbol is displayed. is displayed in a stopped pattern (for example, a jackpot pattern) indicating a win, the execution of the winning game (for example, a jackpot game) based on the other special pattern is on standby (postponed) until one of the winning games is completed. ).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols, and to prevent a plurality of winning games from occurring at the same time, thereby providing a game that is difficult to understand. can be suppressed. Furthermore, after one winning game is finished, another winning game can be started continuously, so that advantageous benefits (winning games) can be continuously provided to the player, and the interest in the game is improved. can be made

It should be noted that when such a configuration is used, the effect (hit effect) executed during one winning game is used to win the big hit in the other special symbol (the big winning symbol is stopped and displayed). It is preferable to configure so as to notify the person. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the other special symbol while concentrating on the winning game, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the other special symbol executed during one of the winning games is not winning (losing), it is constructed so as not to notify the winning by using the winning performance being executed. good. As a result, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a lottery result that does not give a new privilege to the player, the effect for the privilege currently given is preferentially provided to the player. , it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a lottery is performed independently (in parallel) for a plurality of special symbols, and as a result of the lottery, one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol indicating a hit (small win, big win). At the point of time, the control is performed to forcibly remove the variation (lottery) of the other special symbol, but as another configuration, for example, the lottery result of one special symbol , jackpot), (when the variation of the special pattern whose lottery result is a hit starts), in the subsequent lottery of the other special pattern, a forced lottery that excludes the winning lottery result. (Determination using a special table in which deviations are defined for the entire range of the acquired first random number counter value C1) may be executed.

By configuring in this way, even if a plurality of special symbol lotteries are independently executed, it is possible to suppress the simultaneous execution of a plurality of winning games. In addition, not the timing when the stop symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed, but the timing when the special symbol lottery is performed (the start timing of the variation when the stop symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed), the other special symbol Since it is possible to perform forced detachment control against it, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the content of the effect executed during the variable display of the other special symbol and the lottery result of the other special symbol. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the second special symbol variation start process (S7007), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S7007).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 143, S7007), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to OFF (S7607), and this process ends. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is stopped and displayed with a stop design (jackpot design) indicating that the lottery result of the first special design is a big hit when the big hit fluctuation of the first special design is completed. ), it is a flag that is set to ON while stopping and displaying the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the loss. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is ON, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set.

Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is ON in the process of S7601, without executing each process of S7602 to S7606 to set the start of fluctuation, it is configured to end this process as it is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol that is forcibly stopped from starting to fluctuate again within the same processing when the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a jackpot symbol. can. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, as described with reference to the special symbol variation processing 4 (S194) in FIG. 137, after executing the variation processing regarding the first special symbol, the variation processing regarding the second special symbol is performed. Since it is configured to be executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is used, but for example, in the special design fluctuation processing 4 (S194) of FIG. 137, after executing the fluctuation processing regarding the second special design, When configured to execute the variation process related to the first special symbol, instead of the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203cc, the special figure 1 variation stop flag (target is changed from the second special symbol to the first special symbol flag) may be used.

Also, as in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to independently (in parallel) change (lottery), and the lottery result of one special symbol wins. , it is preferable to define the variation processing of each special symbol (special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 137)) so that the variation processing for the special symbols that is advantageous to the player is executed first. As a result, for example, in the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided with a suspension storage function (suspension storage means), and the special symbols are started to fluctuate at the same time (within the same process) after the jackpot game ends, the player It is possible to preferentially handle the lottery results of special symbols that are advantageous to the player, and to suppress the provision of a disadvantageous game to the player.

Specifically, for example, a first special symbol lottery that tends to give a player an advantage (for example, per 16 rounds), and a second special symbol lottery that makes it harder to give a player an advantage than the first special symbol lottery. A game machine capable of independently executing a special pattern lottery is provided with a storage means capable of storing a plurality (for example, four) of rights for executing the lottery of each special pattern up to an upper limit, and after a jackpot game is finished. Etc., the lottery of each special design is performed at the same time (same process), and as a result of the lottery of each special design, both have the same fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds). To impart a winning game (privilege advantageous to a player) of a first special pattern regardless of a lottery result of a second special pattern by configuring to execute processing related to the first special pattern with priority. can be done.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7601, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S7601: No), the second entrance 640 It is determined whether or not winning (ball winning) has been detected (S7602). If the winning (entering the ball) to the second ball entrance 640 is detected (S7602: Yes), then the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small Each value of the hit type counter C5 is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (S7603), and the second special symbol big hit determination for executing the second special symbol big hit determination based on each stored counter value Processing is executed (S7604). The details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S7604 is completed, then, based on the result of the second special symbol lottery and the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained in the process of S7603, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is performed. Execute (S7605). The details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S7605 ends, the game state update processing (see FIG. 141) described above is executed (S7606), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7602 that the winning for the second ball entrance 1640 has not been detected (S7602: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to execute the variation (lottery) independently (in parallel), and the variation of the special symbol (Lottery) is configured to execute a process of updating the game state (processing of subtracting the number of times of time reduction) when it is executed. That is, in the state in which the time saving state is set, when executing the process of varying (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time (within the same process), the number of times of time saving is subtracted by two. will be

Here, in the fourth embodiment, a configuration is used in which a plurality of special symbols are independently (parallelly) varied (lottery). is used as the main special symbol, and a performance is executed to make it look as if a game using only the main special symbol is performed (see FIG. 126), thereby providing an easy-to-understand performance to the player. However, even when the third symbol display device 81 executes the variable display emphasizing only the main special symbol, internally, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, Since the number of times of time saving is subtracted according to the variation (lottery) of special symbols), a contradiction arises between the display mode of the number of times of time saving and the update state of the game state (internal number of times of time saving). Alternatively, there is a problem that the updated content of the display mode of the number of times of time saving is inconsistent with the effect content of the variable display emphasizing only the main special symbol.

Regarding such a problem, detailed contents will be described later, but in the fourth embodiment, the number of times of time reduction for display (number of times of remaining time reduction) is updated according to the number of times of fluctuation (lottery) of the main special symbol. Display control is performed, and if there is a difference between the number of time savings on the display and the actual number of time savings, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the main special symbol meets a predetermined condition (for example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more). When it is determined that a predetermined condition is satisfied, a process of correcting the number of times of reduced hours for display is executed so as to fill the difference between the number of reduced hours on the display and the actual number of reduced hours. .

By configuring in this way, the player only needs to play the game while paying attention to the effect executed corresponding to the main special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the appropriate time reduction situation (remaining time reduction) The number of times) can be grasped, and an easy-to-understand game can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S7604), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 143, S7007), will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139 ) will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604) is executed, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (second special symbol reserved ball execution area) is acquired (S7701). Then, the processing of S7702 for acquiring the lottery result as to whether or not a big win is executed based on the acquired counter values and the first 4-win random number table 202ca. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the special symbol reserved ball execution area (second special symbol reserved ball execution area), and the other is the first special symbol jackpot determination. The same control as the process (see FIG. 137) is executed.

When the process of S7702 ends, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S7703), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S7703: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a big hit. The processing of S7704 to S7707 is executed for this, and the processing ends. In each process of these S7704 ~ S7707, the same process as each process of S7204 ~ S7207 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 137) is executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S7703, if it is determined that the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S7703: No), the small hit of the second special symbol or the stop symbol corresponding to the loss is set. Special figure 2 deviation processing is executed (S7708), and this processing ends. Next, the details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 deviation variation process (S7708).

In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S7708), first, the lottery result obtained in the process of S7702 in FIG. 144 determines whether it is a small hit of the second special symbol (S7801). (S7801: Yes), the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S7802), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S7803). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S7804), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S7801 (S7801: No), the second special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S7805), and then, End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 145, S7007), will be described. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 146, S7605), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the special symbol reserved ball execution area (second special symbol execution area) (S7901). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (S7902). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203ca is turned on for the second special symbol. This jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON in the processing of S7704 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 144).

In the process of S7902, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S7902: Yes), the variation pattern 4 table 202cd corresponding to the current game state (see FIGS. 131 to 133) Read out (S7903). Then, based on the value of the first per type counter C2 acquired in the process of S7701 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 144), the first per type selection 4 table 202cb (see FIG. 131 (a) ) determines the jackpot type (S7904).

When the process of S7904 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S7905), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set. (S7906). Then, the process proceeds to S7908.

On the other hand, in the process of S7902, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S7902: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S7907) is executed, and the process of S7908 Transition.

In the processing of S7908, the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the stop design is set (S7908). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S7909), and then terminates this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S7907) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S7907).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 147, S7907), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S8001). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8001). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is ON (S8001: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S8002). Then, based on the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce (see FIG. 134), the small hit type is selected (S8003).

Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S8004), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the small hit variation corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 A pattern is selected (S8005). After that, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern (S8006), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S8001, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a loss) (S8001: No), the variation pattern 4 table 202cd ( 131 to 133) is read (S8007), and from the read variation pattern selection table, an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S8008). Then, based on the variation pattern of the selected deviation, to set the special figure 2 variation pattern command (S8009), to end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the second special symbol variation stop process (S7008), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing (S7008).

In the second special symbol variation stop processing (S7008), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101). In the process of S8101, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: Yes), the jackpot flag 203ca is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set (S8103). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the second special symbol (S8103: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S8105), The process proceeds to S8106.

Next, the processing after S8106 differs from the processing after S7505 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 140, S7005) in the following points. In the processing of S8106 and S8102 corresponding to the processing of S7505 and S7512, the point that the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and the processing of S8112 corresponding to the processing of S7511, the special figure 1 confirmation command special figure 2 in that it is changed to a definite command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: No), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S8102), the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S8103, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to OFF for the second special symbol (S8103: No), special figure 2 out stop processing is executed (S8104), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, special figure 2 deviation stop processing (S8104), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 148, S7008), will be described. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S8104).

In the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (FIG. 149, S8104), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S8202). Next, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S8203).

After completing the processing of S8203, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S8204). After that, the small hit flag 203cb is set to OFF (S8205), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to ON (S8207).

When the processing of S8207 ends, a special figure 2 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the second special symbol is set (S8208). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37, stops variably in the small hit symbol (S8209), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8201, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S8201: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. Set a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing that to the audio lamp control device 113 (S8210). After that, the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S8211), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594). This jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is executed at the end timing of the ending production, that is, at the end timing of the jackpot game ( The difference is that the contents of the processing for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game) are different. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that there are differences between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above in terms of the configuration of the game board 13 and the contents of the main control, and therefore there may be differences in detailed operation contents during the jackpot. Even in this case, the processing contents are assumed to be the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is executed, the same processes of S1601 to S1612 as the jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) of the first embodiment described above are executed. That is, during the period from the start of the big win to the end of the big win, the same process as the big win control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) is executed. Then, in the processing of S1612, when it is determined that the present time is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the current big win type is the big win C (S1691).

In the processing of S1691, based on the information stored in the V passage jackpot type storage area 203h and the information stored in the memory area that temporarily stores the currently executed jackpot type, the current jackpot type determine.

In the processing of S1691, if it is determined that the type of the current jackpot is not the jackpot C (any of the jackpots A, B, and D) (S1691: No), that is, after the end of the jackpot (after the end of the jackpot game) ), if it is determined that the time saving state is set, then it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S1692). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot types are the jackpots A and B, and when the jackpot D is set, a time saving state in which the degree of advantage to the player is different is set. The process of S1692 is a process for determining whether to set a time saving state (first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player or to set a time saving state (second time saving state) that is more disadvantageous than the first time saving state. .

In the processing of S1692, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot D (S1692: No), information indicating the time saving A state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S1693), and the process proceeds to S1694. . On the other hand, in the processing of S1692, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is the jackpot D (S1692: Yes), information indicating the time saving B state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S1695), and the process goes to S1694 Transition.

When the time saving A state is set here, that is, when the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A, B, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time saving state In addition, the variation pattern table 202cd2 for time saving A (see FIG. 133 (a)) is referred to, and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) is more likely to be executed than the variation of the first special symbol (lottery). When the time saving B state is set, that is, when the current jackpot type is the jackpot D, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time saving state , The time saving B variation pattern table 202cd3 (see FIG. 134 (b)) is referred to, and the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) is executed more easily than the variation of the second special symbol (lottery). A time saving game is executed. be done.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the time saving state is provided according to the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set, and the first special symbol executed during the time saving state By varying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol and the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol depending on the type of jackpot in which the time saving state is set, the second special symbol becomes the main special symbol Time saving state (time saving A ) and a time-saving state (time-saving B) in which the first special symbol is the main special symbol can be set. And it is configured so that the lottery for the second special symbol is easier to give the player an advantage than the lottery for the first special symbol.

By configuring in this way, in the fourth embodiment, as the time saving state set as the game state, the time saving state (time saving B) disadvantageous to the player and the time saving state advantageous to the player (time saving A ) can be set. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of game states having different degrees of advantage for the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Also, as described above, it is possible to set game states with different degrees of advantage only by varying the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol, so there is no need to use a special configuration for varying the degree of advantage. Therefore, the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 150, the description continues. When the processing of S1693 or S1695 is finished, next, the value of the time saving counter 203k is set to 100 (S1694), and the state command for notifying the set game state to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1696). ). After that, the processing of S1617 and S1618, which are the same as the jackpot control processing (see S1504 in FIG. 52) described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time saving states (time saving A, time saving B) can be set, and even if any time saving state is set, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is set to 100 It is configured to In other words, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state in the fourth embodiment, it is configured to set only the end condition of the number of fluctuations that is established when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches 100 times. , You may comprise so that the time saving state by which multiple time saving end conditions were set may be set like each embodiment mentioned above, without restricting to this.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, regardless of the type of the set time-saving state (time-saving A, time-saving B), the same time-saving end condition (the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k is 100) is configured to be set. However, different time-saving end conditions may be set according to the type of the set time-saving state, and when the time-saving state in which the time-saving game advantageous to the player is set, it is disadvantageous for the advantageous person. It may be configured to set a time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established than when a time-saving state in which a time-saving game is performed is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the contents of the small winning control process 4 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning control process 4 (S1595). This small hit control process 4 (see S1595 in FIG. 151) is part of the process executed at the opening timing of the V winning opening with respect to the small hit control process (see S1505 in FIG. 53) of the first embodiment described above. is deleted, otherwise the same process is executed. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the small hit control processing 4 (S1595 in FIG. 151) is executed, first, the same S1701 to S1706 processing as the above-described small hit control processing (see S1505 in FIG. 53) is executed, and when the processing of S1706 is finished , S1707 and S1708 are skipped, S1709 and S1710 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1705, if it is determined that the current timing is not the V winning opening opening timing (S1705: No), the processing of S1711 to S1721, which is the same as the above-described small winning control processing (S1505 in FIG. 53), is performed. Execute and terminate this process.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation configuration ), 1 type of winning by lottery of special patterns and 2 types of winning by winning small prizes by lottery of special patterns and winning a big prize when the ball passes through a specific area during the small winning game. and a configuration (so-called one-type two-type mixed configuration), which is different from each of the above-described embodiments.

Then, in the game state in which the time saving state is set, the time saving state (time saving B) in which the variation of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and the time saving state (time saving A) in which the variation of the second special symbol is mainly performed ) can be set by varying the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol set in the simultaneous variation.

Furthermore, the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol, and the time saving state in which the time saving A is set is more likely to be played than the time saving state in which the time saving B is set. It is configured so that the game state is advantageous to the player. In addition, the time saving state in which the time saving B is set is configured so that the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol is larger than that in the normal state.

That is, the above-described simultaneous variation configuration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described one type and two types mixed configuration, and the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol during the time saving state is changed according to the jackpot type. , a time-saving game in which many variations (lottery) of the second special symbols are executed and a time-saving game in which many variations (lottery) of the first special symbols are performed can be executed.

In addition, the second special pattern is more likely to win the small prize than the first special pattern (including a configuration in which the small prize lottery is not performed in the first special pattern), so that the time-saving game is played during the time-saving state. , by aiming for both one type and two types, an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (time-saving game that executes many variations (lottery) of the second special pattern), and a disadvantageous time-saving that aims only for one type It is possible to set a state (a time-saving game in which a large number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol are executed). Further, even when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

Therefore, as a game state advantageous to the player, only the game state (time saving state) in which it is easier to obtain two types of wins than in the normal state can be set. By setting a plurality of game states with different stages, it is possible to provide various games to the player, and to provide games full of interest.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously varied. can be displayed. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big win or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 152 and 153, control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, in contrast to the above-described embodiments, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) lottery (fluctuation) can be redundantly executed (so-called simultaneous variation configuration ) is significantly different.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as a time saving state, a time saving state (time saving B) that mainly executes the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol, and a time saving state that mainly performs the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol state (time saving A) can be set, and the number of times of time saving displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (number of times of time saving on display) is changed according to the time saving state to be set. It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the number of times of time saving according to the number of times of variation production executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the number of times of variation of the main special symbol).

Specifically, the fourth embodiment is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (see FIG. 129 (b)), and win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. When it does (when it is stop-displayed with a small-win symbol indicating a small win), the variation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped-displayed with a losing symbol indicating a failure.

And, since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit at a ratio of 994/1000 (see FIG. 129 (b)), in the gaming state in which the time saving A is set, the time saving number of times Even if 100 times is set as , the variation (lottery) of the main special symbol (second special symbol) can only be executed about 50 times.

Therefore, when the time saving A is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display 50 times as the number of times of time saving for display, and the main special symbol (second special symbol) fluctuation (lottery ) is configured to update (decrease) the display time saving number of times each time. As a result, the number of times of time saving is actually set to 100 times, and the number of times of time saving is reduced in correspondence with the variation of the first special symbol to be forcibly stopped, without making the player aware that the number of times of time saving is reduced. An easy-to-understand game can be provided by making the player think that 50 times have been set.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time saving number of times display, for example, when the second special symbol is selected by lottery, or when the reserved memory of the first special symbol is lost and a new variation of the first special symbol is started If the first special symbol does not change at the time of winning the second special symbol (when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, at the timing of stopping the variation of the second special symbol If a situation occurs in which the fluctuation of the first special pattern cannot be stopped, the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (main special pattern) that can be executed during the time saving state becomes greater than the number of times of saving time for display. , During the variation of the second special symbol, or when the variation of the first special symbol stops while the variation of the second special symbol is not performed, and a new variation of the first special symbol is started, the second Since the variation of the first special symbol is executed regardless of the variation of the special symbol, the number of variations of the second special symbol (main special symbol) that can be executed during the time saving state will be less than the number of time saving times for display. a problem arises.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined error occurs between the display time saving count and the actual time saving count, the time saving count correction performance for correcting the error is executed. (See FIG. 127). As a result, the time-saving state ends with an error occurring between the number of times the main special symbol changes (the remaining number of times during the time-saving state) and the number of time-saving times for display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is put away and gives a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, since the number of times of time saving for display is updated according to the variation of the main special symbols executed during the time saving state, the player pays attention to the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the number of times of time saving. A game can be played during the time saving state with peace of mind.

In addition, as the correction effect of the number of time saving times described above, the subtraction correction effect that is executed when the number of time saving times for display is greater than the actual number of time saving times is the variation pattern of the selected main special symbol for a predetermined time (for example , 30 seconds) or more, and if it is a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined time or more, a pseudo-variation production (pseudo-variation stop and pseudo- When the fluctuation is stopped (temporarily stopped), or when the fluctuation is resumed from the temporarily stopped state, the display time reduction number is updated (subtracted). be done. As a result, it is possible to subtract the number of times of shortening the display time during one special pattern variation without any sense of incompatibility.

On the other hand, the addition correction effect that is executed when the number of times of time saving for display is smaller than the actual number of times of saving time is whether the variation pattern of the selected main special symbol is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or more. is determined, and if it is a fluctuation pattern for a predetermined time or more, an addition display is performed to indicate that the number of times of time reduction for display is added on the display screen, and the number of times of time reduction for display is added. good. As a result, the player can be made to think that the number of time reductions has been added on the way.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the same number of times of time saving is set, by setting the number of times of time saving displayed differently according to the time saving state to be set, the player The game can be played during the time saving state without giving a sense of incongruity. In addition, since the number of time saving times to be displayed in advance is changed according to the time saving state that is set, the frequency of executing the effect for correcting the number of time saving times for display during the time saving state can be reduced. Easy game can be provided.

In addition, the production mode of the correction production for correcting the number of display time reductions during the time reduction state is not limited to the above-described one. By displaying the item on the display screen, it may be configured to subtract a plurality of times of time saving for display in one main special pattern variation, or the number of times less than 50 is displayed in advance as the number of times of saving time for display. Alternatively, the execution frequency of the subtraction correction performance may be extremely reduced.

In addition, the effect mode of the addition correction effect is not limited to the one described above. may be configured so as not to be understood by the player, or when it is grasped in advance that the lottery of main special symbol variations is consecutively lost, a plurality of main special symbol variations can be combined into one main. It is configured to perform a pseudo variation so as to look like a special pattern variation, and is configured to subtract only one time from the number of times of time reduction for display although the main special pattern variation is actually performed twice. can be

Also, even when there is no error between the number of times of time saving for display and the actual number of times of time saving, it may be configured to intentionally execute the subtraction correction effect and the addition correction effect. As a result, since various effects can be executed during the time saving state, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get bored.

Among the contents of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment, the points that differ from the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. do. First, with reference to FIG. 152, the content of the effect setting process 4 (S2891) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the content of effect setting process 4 (S2891).

This production setting process 4 (S2891) is a part of the production setting process 2 (FIG. 104) of the second embodiment described above in contrast to the production setting process (S2804 of FIG. 63) of the first embodiment. (See S2851 of )), setting different display commands according to the type of time saving state to be set (time saving A, time saving B), and displaying according to the actual number of time saving (number of remaining time saving) The difference is that a process for correcting the number of times of use is added.

When the effect setting process 4 (see S2891 in FIG. 152) is executed, first, the processes of S2901 and S2902 which are the same as the above-described effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) are executed, and then the above-described effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S3301: No), that is, in the state where the time saving state is set, the first special When the pattern variation has ended, the same S3306 to S3308 processing as the production setting processing 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed, and then the time reduction number correction processing for display is executed (S3376), and this processing exit.

In this display time saving number correction process (S3376), the display time saving number displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the time saving state and the actual time saving number are discriminated, and a predetermined error occurs in the discrimination result. In this case, a process for correcting the value of the number of times of reduced working hours for display is executed. The detailed content of this display time reduction number correction process (S3376) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the currently set time saving state type is time saving A (S3371 ), if it is determined that it is not time saving A (S3371: No), the display time saving B start command is set (S3372), and the process proceeds to S3374. The display time saving B start command set here is output toward the display control device 114 by the command output process in the same manner as the other display commands described above, and the display screen shown in FIG. 126(b) is displayed. referred to when

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time saving A in the process of S3371 (S3371: Yes), the time saving A start command for display is set (S3373), and the process proceeds to S3374. When the time saving A start command for display is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 126(a) is displayed.

In the processing of S3374, the corresponding time saving state (time saving type) is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S3374), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF (S3375), and the present processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the contents of the time reduction number correction process for display (S3376) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the content of the time reduction number correction process for display (S3376). In this display time reduction number correction process (S3376), it is determined whether or not to execute the above-described lower correction effect process with reference to FIG.

When the display time reduction frequency correction process (S3376) is executed, first, the value of the display time reduction frequency counter Ca, that is, the remaining time reduction frequency displayed in the remaining time reduction frequency display area Dm10 of the display screen is read (S3701). . When the time saving number counter Ca for display is set to the time saving A, that is, when the time saving state in which the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is mainly performed is set, the second special symbol It is updated every time the variation is executed, and when the time saving B is set, that is, when the time saving state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is mainly performed is set, the first special symbol is updated each time a change in is performed.

Next, the actual remaining number of time saving stored in the time saving information update area 223g is read (S3702), and the difference between the value read in the process of S3701 and the value read in the process of S3702 is calculated (S3703), In the process of S3703, it is determined whether there is a difference between the compared values (S3704), and if it is determined that there is a difference (S3704: Yes), the variation time set in the current variation pattern is read (S3705), It is determined whether the read fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds) (S3706).

In the process of S3706, if it is determined that it is 30 seconds or more (S3706: Yes), then the number of pseudo stops corresponding to the difference value calculated in the process of S3703 (special symbol (third symbol) in the pseudo stop effect is temporarily stopped) (S3707), and a correction fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set number of times of pseudo fluctuation (number of times of pseudo stop) is determined (S3708). Then, the value of the time saving counter for display Ca is corrected to the value of the time saving information update area, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3704 that there is no difference (S3704: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3706 that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or longer (S3706: No), this process is continued. finish.

<Regarding the first modification of the first embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the first special symbol lottery is executed by executing the left-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery is executed by executing the right-handed game. As shown, the first ball entrance 64 is arranged in the left area and the second ball entrance 640 is arranged in the right area. Then, when a small win is won by lottery of the second special pattern, a plurality of small win types (small wins A to C) can be set, and the number of times the small win is won in the state where the time saving state is set is determined. Based on this, in detail, when the set number of times of the small winning type set in the difference of winning the small winning reaches a predetermined number, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is established. .

On the other hand, in this modified example, by executing a right-handed game, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed. In this way, in the right-handed game executed during the time saving state, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed, thereby completing the time saving end for ending the time saving state. As conditions, it is possible to set a special figure 1 termination condition based on the lottery of the first special symbol and a special figure 2 termination condition based on the lottery of the second special symbol.

Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the time saving state ends, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous due to easy prediction of the game content and early boredom with the game. can.

Here, with reference to FIG. 154, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modification will be described. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 154, the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in the configuration of the right area. First, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right area, and balls shot in a right-handed game are alternately distributed to a left channel 701 and a right channel 702 formed on the left side of the distribution member.

A movable lid 1500 is provided on the upstream side of the left channel to form a flow-down surface thereof, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a fixed opening/closing operation is performed by a movable control means (not shown). It is configured to be positioned in an open state in which a ball can enter the right first ball inlet 64b disposed below the movable lid 1500 and a closed state in which it is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball. The opening/closing operation is executed at

Specifically, the main processing (see FIG. 51) of the main controller 110 is provided with a movable lid opening/closing process as a process executed every 4 milliseconds. , and a closing period of 2 to 3 seconds according to a predetermined scenario. The right first ball entrance 64b that is controlled to open and close in this way is configured to make it more difficult for a ball to enter than the first ball entrance 64. As shown in FIG.

After flowing down the left channel 701 and above the movable lid 1500, the ball flows down the curved portion of the left channel 701, passes through the through gate 67 provided at the downstream end of the left channel 701, and flows to the right side. It flows out into the lower region of the region. Furthermore, it is configured so that the electric accessory 640a can enter above the through gate 67 of the left flow path 701, and when the electric accessory 640a performs an opening operation, the ball flowing down the left flow path 701 is the first. It is configured to be guided to the 2-ball entrance 640 .

On the other hand, the balls distributed to the right flow path 702 by the distribution device 700 flow into the inlet 704a of the warp path 704b provided on the far side of the left flow path 701 (the far side from the viewpoint of FIG. 154), It is drained into the lower region of the right region. Here, the ball outflow position of the left channel 701 and the ball outflow position of the right channel 702 will be described with reference to FIG.

The operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will now be described in detail. This normally movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the pachinko machine 10 being powered on. there is Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main controller 110, motion control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. It is In this movable scenario, the movable member 1500 is constantly opened for 0.1 seconds and then closed for 0.8 seconds, which is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of Modification 1, the ball fired in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the rolling ball on which the movable member 1500 is always arranged is provided. It flows downstream while rolling on the surface. When the timing at which this ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is in an open state, The ball passes through the normally movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the left first ball entrance 64b.

The timing at which the constantly movable member 1500 rolls (or falls on the constantly movable member) is at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened is 0 in 0.9 seconds. Since it is 0.1 second, the timing at which the two coincide is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls enter the first left ball entrance 64b in one minute.

That is, in a game state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball enters the first left ball entrance 64b periodically, so that the jackpot game is performed. When it ends and shifts to the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state where there is no suspension of special figure 1. In addition, as the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened once, a period (0.1 second) during which it is difficult for the player to aim is set. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aiming at the mouth 64a.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, if a left-handed game is played, about 15 of the 250 balls that are shot will enter the first left ball entrance 64a. It is designed, and five prize balls are paid out when a ball enters. Also, it is designed so that about five balls enter the general ball entrance 63, and five prize balls are paid out when the balls enter. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, considering that the paid out prize balls are fired again, it is possible to make about 20 balls enter the first left ball entrance 64a. becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, when a right-handed game is played, out of the 250 balls that are shot, about 9 are designed to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. If the ball is entered, two prize balls will be paid out. Moreover, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in a right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if it is considered that the paid-out prize balls are fired again, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the right-handed game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes is not provided with the general winning opening 63, but in the normal state, the right-handed game The general prize winning opening 63 may be arranged based on a design concept to the extent that is not advantageous to the player. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game during the time-saving state or during the jackpot state.

Next, among the structures arranged in the right region of the game board 13 in Modification 1, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are different from the structure of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. We will focus on points.

In Modified Example 1, the through gate 67 is disposed downstream of the first flow path 701 having the bent portion 701a, and the second inlet is disposed downstream of the second flow path 702 (lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball mouth 640 is provided. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second ball inlet 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without lowering the flow velocity. Therefore, since the interval between the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 at the same time. can be suppressed. Also, when the third symbol display device 81 informs that the electric accessory 640a is open (see FIG. 23(b)) without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, A ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701, first flow path 701, 2nd flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the balls flow down only to one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entrance It is possible to make it difficult to enter the ball into 640 . In other words, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed, creating a state in which the balls flow down only in one flow path. By doing so, it becomes possible to create a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a situation in which it is easy to

By configuring in this way, when a right-handed game is played in a state in which the time saving state is set, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed. In addition, even if a ball is shot aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery for the second special symbol advantageous to the player, the flow path of the ball that can enter the second ball entrance 640 Since the left flow path 701 is provided with the right first ball entrance 64b for executing the lottery of the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this modification, a ball entrance (left first ball entrance 64b) that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and a ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol are located in the right area of the game board 13. An opening (second ball entrance 640) is provided so that a ball fired in a right-handed game can enter any of the entrances. A sorting device may be provided on the right side of the board 13 to alternately sort the balls into the first guideway leading to the first left ball entrance 64b and the second guideway leading to the second entrance 640. FIG.

By configuring in this way, by executing a right-handed game, it is possible to alternately establish the lottery condition for the first special symbol and the lottery condition for the second special symbol, so that it is excessive for the player. (i.e., only the second special symbol lottery is biasedly executed during the time saving state), and an excessively disadvantageous game state is provided to the player ( That is, it is possible to suppress the fact that only the lottery of the first special symbol is biasedly executed during the time saving state.

<Regarding the first modification of the second embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. FIG. In the second embodiment described above, the time-saving end condition (special figure 1 end condition) that can be established based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and the time-saving end condition that can be established based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 end condition) and are different, and the degree of expectation to obtain the two types of winning based on the lottery of the first special pattern, and the degree of expectation to obtain the two types of winning based on the lottery of the second special design, were configured differently.

Specifically, in the lottery of the first special pattern, the time saving state is easier to end than the lottery of the second special pattern (the time saving end condition is easier to be satisfied), and it is configured so that it is easier to win two types. Ta. Then, as shown in FIG. 82, when the time saving state is set, the left-handed game (the first special symbol lottery game) and the right-handed game (the second special symbol lottery game). It is constructed such that an effect screen for selecting one of them is displayed so that the player can play a desired game.

On the other hand, in the present first modification, one game (right-handed game) is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, and immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied in the one game When it is determined that it is in the state of (a state in which the condition before the end of time saving is satisfied), an effect for performing the other game (left-handed game) is executed. By configuring in this way, the game can be enjoyed to the maximum extent by playing the game along with the effect to be executed (by varying the game method).

Next, the display screen in the state in which the time saving state of this modified example is set will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. FIG. FIG. 155(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the ending screen of the jackpot (jackpots A, B, and D in the above-described second embodiment) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and FIG. 155(b) ) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the condition before the time saving end regarding the right-handed game is satisfied during the period when the time saving state is set, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen after the condition before the time saving end regarding the right-handed game is established during the period being performed. In addition, in each display screen, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that display the same effect modes as in the second embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), in the ending screen of the jackpot game, in addition to displaying "Right shot" in the guide display area Dm2, the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 also shows "Right shot". is displayed. Here, in this modified example, unlike the above-described second embodiment, an effect display for prompting the player to play the game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, and the player enters the game state in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. A display mode corresponding to an instruction command for notifying the corresponding game direction is displayed.

That is, during the jackpot game and during the time-saving state, the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is configured to always display the display mode indicating "right-handed". Furthermore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment saying "After the jackpot is over, enter the rush and hit right" is displayed in order to make the right-handed game be played after the jackpot game is over.

Then, when the right-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and just before the time saving end condition that can be established based on the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is satisfied (special figure 2 time saving end pre-condition is established), as shown in FIG. "Beat" is displayed.

As a result, the player ends the right-handed game and starts the left-handed game. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the time saving state has ended and the normal state has been set. In fact, since the time saving state has not ended, the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 continues to display "Right shot". In the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, reserved symbol displays Dsb to Dse of the first special symbols that can be acquired by the left-handed game are displayed.

Then, when the player starts a left-handed game, as shown in FIG. 156(a), an effect in the withdrawal zone is executed. In addition, since the effect in the pullback zone is the same as that in the above-described second embodiment, when the left-handed game is performed during the time-saving state, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 156 (b), in a state in which the time saving state is set, determine the degree of satisfaction (progress) of a plurality of time saving end conditions, hit right It is configured to execute an effect of causing a game to be played or a left-handed game to be played. As a result, there is an effect that the player can play various games during the time saving state.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the game direction is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 so as to perform a right-handed game in the first half of the time-saving state and a left-handed game in the second half. Thus, the right-handed game can be executed continuously from the jackpot game, and the left-handed game can be continuously executed when the time saving state is terminated and the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the game direction from becoming complicated.

Furthermore, when the time saving state in the right-handed game is in a state just before the end, that is, the time saving end condition established based on the information updated by the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is just before the establishment When it is determined that there is a left-handed game, the performance of guiding the left-handed game is executed, so that the player can be guided to the game in which the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is difficult to be satisfied according to the current situation. . Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to an advantageous game method.

In addition, in the second embodiment to which this modification is applied, as shown in FIG. It is configured so that the rate at which the ball enters the ball entrance 64 is the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the time-saving state is set or the normal state is set in the "pull-back zone" in which the left-handed game is performed in the second half of the time-saving state.

In addition, in the second embodiment to which this modification is applied, as described above, the time-saving state is configured to make it easier to acquire two types of winnings based on the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state. Therefore, during the "retraction zone" in which the time saving state is set, the ease of lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol is the same as when the normal state is set, but in the lottery Based on this, it is easy to acquire two types of hits, so the game state is more advantageous than the normal state.

Therefore, a game state in which a big win is actually more likely to be set (easier to obtain a double win) than in a normal state can be produced as a ``pull-back zone,'' so that the effect of production can be enhanced. Furthermore, the timing at which the condition before the time saving end is established based on the right-handed game differs depending on the lottery result of the right-handed game (lottery result of the second special symbol), so the period during which this "pullback zone" is executed is uncertain. become a thing. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the "pull-back zone" will continue for a long period of time.

In addition, in this modification, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is set according to the game state, and guidance display is performed according to the game state and the progress of the time saving end condition (whether or not the time saving end condition is met). The display mode of the area Dm2 is configured to be set, and the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 is displayed larger than the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 so as to positively guide the game method to the player. However, without being limited to this, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is configured to be variable according to the game state and the progress of the time saving end condition (whether or not the time saving end condition is met). can be It should be noted that, in this case, if the condition before the end of time reduction is established by the right-handed game (game for executing the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol) during the time reduction state, the condition before the end of time reduction is established. It is better to change the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 so that it is less conspicuous than when it is not.

Thus, in the state in which the time saving state is set, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode according to the progress of the time saving end condition (whether or not the time saving end condition is met). By changing to the notification mode, the player can visually determine the degree of advantage when the game is executed in accordance with the game direction (for example, hitting right) indicated by the game direction indication display mode Dm20. .

<Regarding the fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. FIG. This fifth embodiment is the same as the above-described second embodiment in that the player is allowed to select a game method when a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set. In the above-described second embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the game (first game) that performs the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) It was configured so that the player can select a game (second game) to perform (see FIG. 82). Then, when the first game is selected, the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed by aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the second ball is entered by the right-handed game. By aiming at the mouth 640, it was configured to perform a lottery for the special figure 2 (see FIG. 2).

Then, as a time saving end condition to end the time saving state, the conditions that can be established by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the conditions that can be established by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different, and the time saving end condition is easily established (the time saving state ends It is configured so that the player can select a game that is easy to play and a game that makes it difficult to satisfy the time-saving end condition (than the game).

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, the game (first game) in which the time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied is more likely to be satisfied than the game (second game) in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied. The probability of winning a big win, that is, the probability of winning a big win in a special pattern lottery, and winning a small win in a special pattern lottery, and winning a big win (2 kinds of wins) during the small win (during a small win game). It was configured so that the probability of adding up the probability of doing so would be high.

In the second embodiment configured in this way, various games can be executed by allowing the player to select the game method when the time saving state is set, so that the player gets bored with the game early. can be suppressed. In addition, the easiness of ending the time saving state (easiness of satisfying the time saving end condition) and the degree of expectation for a big hit for one special drawing are differentiated according to the game method selected by the player. Therefore, the player himself/herself can select a game suitable for him/herself, and games suitable for various players can be provided.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one game (second game) of the game methods selected by the player during the time saving state is the second ball entry that makes it easier to enter than in the normal state. The game aims at the opening 640, but the other game (first game) aims at the first ball entrance 64, which has the same ease of entry as in the normal state. There is a problem that it is difficult to give a sense of advantage due to the setting of the time saving state.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. FIG. This fifth embodiment is the same as the above-described second embodiment in that the player is allowed to select a game method when a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set. In the above-described second embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the game (first game) that performs the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) It was configured so that the player can select a game (second game) to perform (see FIG. 82). Then, when the first game is selected, the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed by aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the second ball is entered by the right-handed game. By aiming at the mouth 640, it was configured to perform a lottery for the special figure 2 (see FIG. 2).

Then, as a time saving end condition to end the time saving state, the conditions that can be established by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the conditions that can be established by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different, and the time saving end condition is easily established (the time saving state ends It is configured so that the player can select a game that is easy to play and a game that makes it difficult to satisfy the time-saving end condition (than the game).

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, the game (first game) in which the time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied is more likely to be satisfied than the game (second game) in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied. The probability of winning a big win, that is, the probability of winning a big win in a special pattern lottery, and winning a small win in a special pattern lottery, and winning a big win (2 kinds of wins) during the small win (during a small win game). It was configured so that the probability of adding up the probability of doing so would be high.

In the second embodiment configured in this way, various games can be executed by allowing the player to select the game method when the time saving state is set, so that the player gets bored with the game early. can be suppressed. In addition, the easiness of ending the time saving state (easiness of satisfying the time saving end condition) and the degree of expectation for a big hit for one special drawing are differentiated according to the game method selected by the player. Therefore, the player himself/herself can select a game suitable for him/herself, and games suitable for various players can be provided.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one of the game methods selected by the player during the time saving state (second game) is set to the time saving state, so that The game is aimed at the second ball entrance 640 which makes it easier to enter the ball, while the other game (first game) is the game where the player aims at the first ball entrance 64 in which the ease of ball entry is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to give the player a sense of advantage due to the setting of the time saving state. In other words, by setting the time-saving state, the variation (lottery) of special symbols is more efficiently performed than in the normal state, and in that state, different game characteristics (easy to end the time-saving state, one time It was not something that could provide a jackpot expectation in a special lottery.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed at the same time. By having a possible configuration (so-called simultaneous variation configuration) and varying the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol that can be set according to the game state, the player can select different game characteristics in the time saving state. It is configured as follows.

As a result, by setting the time-saving state, it is possible to perform the variation (lottery) of the special symbols more efficiently than in the normal state, and to provide a game that allows the player to select different game characteristics. It is configured as follows.

Next, referring to FIG. 157, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment has the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 (the game area on the right side of the variable display unit 80) and the game area below the variable display unit 80. 2 differs from the configuration (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment (same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment). Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is formed so that the right side area is divided into two, and the momentum of the ball fired by the right-handed game, that is, the operation handle 51 The amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the ball flows down different flow paths according to the magnitude of the resistance value (fire intensity) detected by a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the change in electrical resistance. is configured as

Specifically, when the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 exceeds a reference amount, the shot ball flows down the right side area. When the rotation operation amount (rotation position) is greater than the reference amount and less than the limit amount (weak right-handed game), it is divided into left and right by the regulation wall (regulation member) 900 provided in the center of the right side area. When the ball is shot toward the first right side area 901a on the left side of the area, and the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 is equal to or more than the limit amount and less than the limit amount (strong right hitting game) , the ball is projected toward a second right region 901 b on the right side of the regions divided into left and right by the regulating wall (regulating member) 900 . In the fifth embodiment, the firing intensity is increased according to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. However, the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation. However, the operation handle 51 can be rotated even after the firing intensity reaches its maximum. By configuring in this way, when performing a hard right-handed game, since it is not necessary to operate the operating handle 51 to the limit (to the upper limit) of the rotational operation range of the operating handle 51, the operating handle 51 is made difficult to break. be able to.

Hereinafter, in the right hitting game, a game aiming at the first right side area 901a is called a weak right hitting game, and a game aiming at the second right side area 901b is called a strong right hitting game. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is configured to be divided into a plurality of games depending on the magnitude of the firing strength of the right-handed game, but the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games by other configurations. For example, it may be configured to repeatedly set a plurality of different games alternately with respect to the magnitude of the firing strength, or even if the ball is fired with the same firing strength, the ball Different games may be set according to the timing and the number of balls fired, and the right area may be formed so that the balls flow down different areas for each different game.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games according to the launch strength of the ball. On the other hand, it may be configured to set a plurality of games.

Returning to FIG. 157, the description continues. A ball shot in a weak right-handed game enters an opening formed between a plurality of nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display unit 80) and the variable display unit 80. It intrudes and flows down the first right area 901a. On the other hand, the ball fired by the hard-right hitting game enters the opening formed above the plurality of nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display unit 80), and enters the second opening. It flows down the right area 901b.

As shown in FIG. 157, the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment has an identifier for indicating that the right side area is divided into a plurality of right side areas (first right side area 901a, second right side area 901b). As a result, a fish-like mark (first right area display) 910 and a turtle-like mark (second right side area display) 911 are displayed near the entrance of each area in a manner that the player can visually recognize (game board 13) is affixed. By configuring in this way, whether or not the game desired by the player (strong right-handed game, weak right-handed game) is actually performed can be determined by identifying the mark attached to the trajectory of the shot ball. can be easily identified.

In the fifth embodiment, the above-described first right area display 910 and second right area display 911 are attached one by one near the entrance of each area. , may be attached multiple times. In addition, instead of sticking to the surface of the game board 13, the surface of the game board 13 is made of a transparent member (for example, acrylic resin, etc.), and each mark is attached so as to be buried in the transparent member. can be configured to With this configuration, the marks (the first right area display 910 and the second right area display 911) do not come into contact with the shot ball. It is possible to suppress the problem of storage.

A second ball entrance 640 is provided in the first right side area 901a of the area partitioned by the regulation wall 900, and most (approximately 95%) of the balls that enter the first right side area 901a are second ball entrances. It is configured to enter the ball into the mouth 640 . Although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, the variation time of 10 minutes is set for the special figure 2 lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state. are doing. The number of balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls) when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is set to one.

By configuring in this way, even if a weak right-handed game is executed in the normal state, the number of balls does not increase (the number of balls paid out is less than the number of balls fired), and the second ball is entered. Even if the entrance rate to the mouth 640 is increased, it is possible to suppress the execution of the special figure 2 lottery efficiently.

Next, the through gate 67 and the right first ball entrance 964 are arranged in the second right side area 901b of the area partitioned by the regulation wall 900 . An electric accessory 964a is attached to the right first entrance 964. As shown in FIG. This electric accessory 964a operates on the same operating principle as the electric accessory 640a of the above-described second embodiment, and the lottery result of the normal figure lottery that is executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 Depending on the condition, the right first ball entrance 964 can be changed between an open state in which a ball can easily enter and a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter (cannot be entered). In addition, since it is the same as that of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above about a detailed content, it abbreviate|omits.

By arranging different ball entrances for each of the divided areas in this way, different special figure lotteries are executed according to game contents during the time saving state. Although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, a short time (5 to 60 seconds) variation time for the lottery of special figure 2 executed in the state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state configured to be set.

Therefore, since both the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed during the time saving state, the player can select any game and play the game. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured so that different lottery results are given to the player depending on whether the special figure 1 lottery is performed or the special figure 2 lottery is performed during the time saving state. there is

Specifically, it is easier to end the time-saving state by performing the special 1 lottery than by performing the special 2 lottery, and the benefits (number of prize balls) given when the jackpot is won are increased. is configured as In other words, during the time saving state, it is possible to execute a high-risk high-return game by performing a special figure 1 lottery rather than performing a special figure 2 lottery (a game with different game characteristics can be performed). . In this way, when the player is allowed to select a game method, the player can be motivated to select a game method by executing different game features according to the selected game state.

In addition, depending on the game method selected, the period during which the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, continues (average duration) is different. The player can select whether Therefore, it is possible for the player to play a game according to his own convenience.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when a game method is selected in which the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is completed in a short period of time (shorter than other game methods), a big win is made in that time saving state. When the game is won, the player is given a larger privilege than when the other game method is selected. Thus, even if a game method in which the time-saving state ends in a short period of time is selected, a privilege can be given fairly to the player, so that the player can be made to easily select a desired game method.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the executed right-handed game is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game. Specifically, a first passage sensor 905a is provided in a first right area 901a partitioned by the regulation wall 900, and a second passage sensor 905b is provided in a second right area 901b.

The first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b are detection means for detecting a ball flowing down the surface of the game board 13 (ball flow bottom surface), and can detect the flow (passage) of the ball in a non-contact state. It consists of a proximity sensor. In order for the first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b to reliably detect a ball passing through each region, the width of the passage in each region should be equal to or more than one ball and less than two balls (for example, 15 mm). It is installed in various parts. By limiting the flow width of the ball flowing down each area in this manner, the detection accuracy of the ball can be improved. Also, the number of detection means required to detect the sphere can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the above-described first passing sensor 905a and second passing sensor 905b are buried in the game board 13 so that their detection areas are on the surface of the game board 13 (lower surface of ball flow). Although a proximity sensor is provided that detects changes in capacitance caused by the ball flowing down the surface of the sphere (lower surface of ball flow), other types of proximity sensors may be provided, such as limit switches, etc. A detection means of a contact type detection method may be provided.

In the fifth embodiment, in order to prevent the proximity sensor corresponding to one area from detecting a ball flowing down the other area, a predetermined thickness ( For example, 5 mm), but without being limited to this, for example, various displacements (capacitance displacement, magnetic field displacement) detected by the proximity sensor are prevented from affecting across the regulation wall 900 You may constitute so that the control wall 900 may be comprised with the material.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, in order to determine which of the areas (first right area 901a, second right area 901b) the ball fired by the right-handed game has passed through, dedicated detection means is provided, but is not limited to this. can be determined based on Further, the adjustment amount of the operation handle 51 may be detected, and based on the adjustment amount, a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game may be determined.

In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the configuration and processing for determining whether the right-handed game currently being executed is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game is provided, so that the player , the current game method can be notified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159, the detailed configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 158, the upper part of the game board 13, that is, the structure of the part where the balls shot in the right-handed game are distributed to the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b will be described. 158 is a partially enlarged view showing the upper side of the game board 13. FIG. As shown in FIG. 158, the ball fired in the right-handed game is positioned at the position where it has passed the vertex portion of the game board 13 (the uppermost portion of the game area of the game board 13 which is circular in the front view of FIG. 157). , an opening 902b formed between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62, or an opening 902a formed below the opening 902b and between the tip nail K1a and the variable display unit 80 It is configured to be distributed to Furthermore, the opening 902b formed above the game board 13 has an entrance width (the distance between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62 when a straight line passing through the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a is extended to the rail 62). The width of the opening 902a (the distance between the outer wall of the variable display unit 80 and the tip nail K1a in the straight line passing through the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a) is 4 cm. Centimeters.

This is because, among right-handed games, when a strong right-handed game is performed, the shot ball moves stably along the rail 62, whereas in a weak right-handed game, the trajectory of the ball is stabilized. is difficult, the entrance width of the opening 902a into which the ball fired by the strong right-handed game enters is wider than the opening 902b into which the ball fired by the strong right-handed game enters, and the weak right-handed game This is to make it easier to perform

In other words, by widening the entrance width of the opening 902a, it is possible to widen the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 corresponding to the weak right-handed game, so that the player can perform the weak right-handed game. can be made easier.

A fish mark (first right area display) 910 is attached near the opening 902a in the first right area 901a, and a turtle mark (second display) is attached near the opening 902b in the second right area 901b. right area display) 911 is attached. In this way, by affixing each mark to the area through which the ball immediately after passing through each opening (the ball immediately after being sorted into the partitioned area) passes, the player can be informed which area the shot ball is. It is possible to easily grasp whether it has reached

In the present embodiment, marks (first right area indication, second right area indication) for indicating each area are attached in the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first right area is displayed in the area where the opening through which the sphere passing through the opening (902a, 902b) passes is determined among the areas through which the sphere passes before passing through each opening (902a, 902b). 910, the second right area display 911 may be attached. In this way, marks for indicating each area (first right area display, second right In the limited space of the game board 13, it is possible to easily attach the mark to a position where the player can easily see the mark.

Next, referring to FIG. 159, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be described in detail. FIG. 159(a) is an enlarged view of the right area with the variable winning device 9650a open, and FIG. 159(b) is an enlarged view of the right area with the variable winning device 9650a closed. be.

In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player selects a weak right-handed game aiming at the first right side area 901a and a strong right-handed game aimed at the second right side area 901b as the game method during the right handed game. The player is provided with games with different game characteristics according to the selected game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the player needs to select a desired game method from the weak right-hand hitting game and the hard right-hand hitting game, and adjust the operation handle 51 according to the game method. there were. As described above with reference to FIG. 158, in the fifth embodiment, the opening 902a for weak and right-handed games is designed to widen the adjustment range of the operating handle 51 for weak right-handed games, which are difficult for the player to adjust. It is constructed so as to be wider than the opening 902b of the hard right hitting game, and is constructed so that the player can easily select the game method.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), in the fifth embodiment, in the state in which the time saving state is set, in the case where any game (weak right hitting game, strong right hitting game) is performed A variable winning device 9650a that is opened in the jackpot game is provided so that the jackpot game can be executed while the game is continued.

As a result, even if a big win is won during the time saving state, the game method selected during the time saving state can be continued, so that the player is not bothered in the state where the time saving state and the big winning game state are repeatedly set. The game can be played without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, the variable winning device 9650a is arranged upstream of the second ball entrance 640 arranged in the first right side area 901a and the first ball entrance 964 arranged in the second right side area 901b. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the ball fired in the right-handed game does not enter each ball entrance before winning the variable prize winning device 9650, and the jackpot game can be performed smoothly.

159(b), the variable winning device 9650a functions as a part of the regulation wall 900, except during the jackpot game (when the opening operation is not performed). Since it is in a closed state so as to separate the two, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down each region from entering different regions during the time saving state.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, any region (first right region 901a, second right region 901a, second right region 901b), the variable winning device 9650 is arranged so that the ball flowing down can also win a prize. A variable winning device 9650 may be arranged in the area through which the player passes before being sorted to the right area 901b).

Also, it may be configured to provide a variable winning device corresponding to each area. Specifically, when the special figure 2 lottery special figure 2 lottery wins the jackpot in the first right side area 901a where the ball of the weak right-handed game in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed flows down A special figure 1 which is opened when a jackpot is won by a special figure 1 lottery in a second right side area 901b where a winning device is arranged and a ball of a strong right-handed game in which a special figure 1 lottery is executed flows down. It is configured to dispose a variable winning device for.

By configuring in this way, if a jackpot is won by performing one of the games (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) in the state where the time saving state is set, the player can be notified as it is. A jackpot game can be executed while continuing the game method. In addition, when a jackpot is won according to the game method to be executed, different variable prize winning devices are opened. It is possible to make it easy to understand that different games are executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, in a state in which the time saving state is set, when the number of fluctuations (lottery) of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied), or the special symbols When the number of winning small prizes by lottery reaches a predetermined number (when the conditions for ending the number of winnings are met), the time-saving state changes to a normal state (from an advantageous game state to a disadvantageous game state for the player). configured to migrate. This configuration differs from the above-described second embodiment only in the values set as the end conditions. Since the processing for shifting the game state executed when is established is the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the lottery of the first special pattern is executed by making it possible to win a small prize in the lottery of the first special pattern and not to win a small prize in the lottery of the second special pattern. The game (strong right-handed game) and the game (weak right-handed game) for executing the lottery of the second special symbol are made different in the easiness of ending the time saving state. Furthermore, in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern, the privilege amount (amount of prize balls) given to the player in one big win is greater than in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern. is increased, the player can be motivated to select a game method during the time-saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the contents of the jackpot effect executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 160(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the jackpot (jackpot game) is started, and FIG. 160(b) is a display screen during the jackpot (jackpot game). It is a schematic diagram which showed an example typically.

In this embodiment, as described above, the player selects a weak right-handed game and a strong right-handed game in a state where the time saving state is set (by operating the operation handle 51) so that it can be executed Further, during a jackpot game in which a right-handed game is performed in the same way as during a time-saving state, guidance is given by performance whether a game method corresponding to the time-saving game desired by the player is being performed. It is configured so that

That is, as shown in FIG. 157, in the fifth embodiment, as a game method (time saving game method) during the time saving state, it is configured to be able to execute a weak right hitting game and a strong right hitting game, and further , the jackpot game can be executed regardless of which game method is being executed. By constructing in this way, a game method corresponding to the game method during the time saving state desired by the player is executed in advance using the period during which the jackpot game is executed, which is the stage before the time saving state is set. be able to.

Therefore, when different time-saving game methods are executed based on the operation of the operating handle 51 as in the fifth embodiment, the time-saving game method desired by the player can be reliably executed. Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined whether the game content actually being executed during the jackpot game (same as the execution game storage area) matches the game state desired by the player during the time saving state. Then, an effect based on the determination result is executed. As a result, the player can easily understand the current game method (the game method during the jackpot game).

When the jackpot game is started (at the opening period of the jackpot), the comment "Right shot" is displayed in the guide display area Dm2. Then, in the main display area Dm, a selection screen is displayed for the player to select a desired game method in the time-saving state set after the end of the current jackpot game. Specifically, a relief mode display form 851 and a challenge mode display form 852 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and an arrow that periodically repeats each display form points to one of the display forms. A desired game method is selected by operating the frame button 22 with .

This safe mode display mode 851 is selected when a weak right hitting game in the time saving state, that is, a game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is desired, and the challenge mode display mode 852 is selected when a player wishes to play a hard right-handed game during the time saving state, that is, a game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The diagram shown in FIG. 160(a) shows a state in which an arrow 853 indicating a safe mode display mode 851 is displayed. By operating (pressing) the operation button 22 in this state, the player can The game method can be selected as a safe mode. On the other hand, in FIG. 160(a), the challenge mode can be selected by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the arrow 854 indicated by a dotted line is displayed by a solid line.

In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, characters such as "Please select the desired game" are displayed as a comment for prompting the player to select the desired mode, and the frame button 22 for guiding the selection operation is displayed. A simulated diagram is displayed. Based on the display contents displayed in the sub-display area Ds, the player grasps the contents to be selected at the start of the jackpot and selects a desired game method during the time saving state. The game method being executed during the jackpot game is determined with respect to the game method selected here.

During the jackpot game, the diagram shown in FIG. 160(b) is displayed. On the screen during the jackpot game, "Right shot" is continuously displayed in the guide display area Dm2, and the current round game number is displayed in the round number display area 858. - 特許庁In the example of FIG. 160(b), "ROUND5" indicating that the round game is the fifth round is displayed.

Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, the current game method is displayed in the current game display area 860, and the desired game method selected at the start of the jackpot game is displayed in the desired game display area 861. In the diagram shown in FIG. 160(b), the current game display area 860 displays a display mode indicating "safe mode", and the desired game display area 861 displays a display mode indicating "challenge mode". . That is, the display contents are displayed when the game method actually executed is different from the game method desired by the player. The comment "strike the right harder" is displayed.

By configuring the display mode in this way, the adjustment for matching the actual game method with the game method desired by the player (the game method to be executed during the time saving state) can be performed before the time saving state is set. It can be performed during the period when the jackpot game is being executed. Furthermore, when the game method being executed during the jackpot game is different from the desired game method, a guide display for changing the game method can be displayed during the jackpot game, so that the jackpot game is not executed. It is possible to facilitate the execution of a desired game method during the period in which the player is present.

Returning to FIG. 160(b), the description continues. The display screen during the jackpot game further includes an active jackpot history 855 showing the game method when the jackpot is won during execution, a safe mode jackpot history 856 showing the number of times the jackpot was won during the safe mode, and a challenge. A challenge mode jackpot history 857 indicating the number of jackpot wins during the mode is displayed. The diagram shown in FIG. 160(b) shows that, in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. A character "V" indicating that a jackpot has been won is displayed as a running jackpot history 855. - 特許庁

In addition, when the jackpot that is currently being executed is a jackpot won by lottery of the second special symbol that is executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the state where the time saving state is set. During execution, the character "V with a fish mark" is displayed in the winning history 855, and a jackpot is won by a lottery of the first special symbol executed when the ball enters the right first ball entrance 964. , the character "V with a turtle mark" is displayed in the winning history 855 during execution. As a result, even when the big win is won in any game state, the chance of winning the big win can be easily grasped.

In addition, by providing a safe mode jackpot history 856 and a challenge mode jackpot history 857, when playing a game with the pachinko machine 10, especially when playing a game during the time saving state, it is possible to determine what kind of game is played in the past. You can refer to the game history of. As a result, it is possible to predict a game method that is advantageous to the player, and to motivate the player to play the game.

In the fifth embodiment, as the past game history, the configuration is used in which the game methods set in the case of winning the jackpot are cumulatively displayed. It may be configured to display the cumulative value of the game methods selected in the past.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, game contents during the time saving state in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing time-saving game contents in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 161, in the fifth embodiment, different games are executed according to the game method executed during the time saving state. Specifically, in a state in which the time saving state is set, when a weak right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the first right side region 901a is executed, most of the shot balls are second ball entrance 640 , and one prize ball is paid out.

Furthermore, in the lottery for the second special symbol that is executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it is set so as not to win a small win, and if a big win is won, is set so that 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed. In addition, in the game state in which the time saving state is set, the variation pattern set according to the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation pattern set according to the lottery of the second special symbol have the same degree of variation. Time is set.

On the other hand, in the state in which the time saving state is set, when a strong right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the second right side area 901b is executed, the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 964a is executed. opens. When a ball enters the right first ball entrance 964 while the electric accessory 964a is in the opening operation, three prize balls are paid out. Here, about ⅓ of the balls shot to the second right side area 901 b are configured to enter the right first ball entrance 964 while the time saving state is set. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the right-handed game is performed during the time saving state, even when the weak right-handed game is performed and when the strong right-handed game is performed, it is possible to maintain the holding ball. A prize ball can be obtained (prize ball = medium).

Furthermore, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed by the hard right hitting game, unlike the lottery of the second special symbol described above, it is configured to be able to win a small hit (winning probability is 1/60 ). Here, in the fifth embodiment, as the time-saving end condition, which is a condition for ending the time-saving state, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). In addition, it is configured so that the time-saving end condition is established even when a small hit is won. In other words, when the time saving state is set, the strong right hitting game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed rather than the weak right hitting game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is the time saving state. It is configured so that a game that is easy to end can be played.

Then, when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, a jackpot of 12 rounds with a larger privilege amount (number of prize balls) given to the player than in the case of a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern. A game is configured to be executed.

By configuring in this way, the time saving state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times during the time saving state, but the lottery of the second special symbol with less privilege when winning the jackpot is weakly executed. A time-saving state is set until a right-handed game (safety mode) is performed, a special pattern variation is executed 100 times, or a small hit is won, that is, more time-saving end conditions than a weak right-handed game are set. Although the time-saving state is likely to end, there are many benefits when winning the jackpot (12 rounds jackpot) Different game characteristics are provided depending on whether a strong right-handed game (challenge mode) for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. Since the game can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured so that a small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the time saving end condition is established when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. However, other than that, the time-saving end condition described in each of the above-described embodiments may be set. For example, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are designed to win the small winning, and the small winning classification set for the winning small winning is a specific small winning classification (for example, small winning A). It is configured so that the time-saving end condition is satisfied only when , and the above-mentioned specific small hit type (small hit A) is set only when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. You can As a result, it is not possible to judge whether or not the time-saving state ends only by winning a small prize, so that the player can be provided with a thrilling feeling.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when a small win is won, that is, when a small win is won once, the time saving end condition is established. It may be configured to set a value of 1 or more as the number of winning times. Further, when winning a small prize, a plurality of small prize types may be set, and different time-saving end conditions may be set for each small prize type.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to vary (lottery) at the same time, and the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 is The values set in each table are different from those of the above-described fourth embodiment, but the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same locations and locations where the values are simply changed are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 162(a), among the configurations of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern 5 table different from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the above-described fourth embodiment 202dd will be explained. FIG. 162(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202dd. This variation pattern 5 table 202dd is different from the variation pattern 4 table 202cd described above in that the defined contents of the variation pattern table referred to during the time saving state are different.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), in the above-described fourth embodiment, according to the time saving state to be set (according to the jackpot type won), different variation pattern tables are configured to be referred to, While the time saving state in which the 1 special symbol is likely to change and the time saving state in which the second special symbol is likely to change can be set, in the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern referred to during the time saving state The difference is that a simultaneous variation pattern table 202dd2 for time reduction is defined as a table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 162(b), the contents defined in the simultaneous variation pattern table for time reduction 202dd2 will be described. FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the simultaneous variation pattern table for time reduction 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 162(b), this time saving simultaneous variation pattern table 202dd2 is the first special symbol (special figure 1) compared to the variation pattern table referred to during the time saving state of the fourth embodiment described above. There is no big difference in the variation time set to any of the variation pattern defined corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the variation pattern defined corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2).

That is, in the above-described fourth embodiment, in the right-handed game executed when the time saving state is set, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are also drawn. The lottery is mainly executed by configuring the game board 13 so as to be executed and varying the length of the variable time set for each special symbol according to the type of the time saving state set as the game state. It was configured so as to vary the type of special pattern that is used.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the variation pattern table referred to when the time saving state is set, the variation time set for each special symbol is the same length, and the player can The difference is that the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is executed is mainly varied by varying the game area where the is launched.

Therefore, in the time-saving simultaneous variation pattern table 202dd2 used in the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. The variation pattern (jackpot variation 1 to 3) with a variation time of 10 to 60 seconds is specified for the jackpot, and the variation time is 10 seconds for the lottery result (whether judgment result) is lost. A fluctuation pattern (outlier fluctuations 1 to 3) of ~30 seconds is defined. It should be noted that, although it is configured so that only the lottery of the first special symbol can be determined as a small hit as a result of the judgment result, for this small hit, 10 seconds to A variation pattern of 30 seconds (small per variation 1 to 3) is defined. As a result, the same variation time can be set for the variation for winning a small win and the variation for winning a loss.

Therefore, it is possible to apply the effect suggesting that the reduction in working hours is over by winning a small prize as it is even when the result of the lottery (result of winning/failure determination) is a failure. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, a production that suggests that the time saving is finished (a production that suggests that a small win has been won) is executed in the case where the result of the win/fail judgment is out and in the case of a small win. However, in addition to this, for example, the variation time specified for the case where the lottery result (result of judgment) is a small hit, the variation time specified for the case of a big win, may be made the same, and an effect indicating that the player has won either a big win or a small win may be executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the situation in which the player wins a big win and acquires a privilege or the situation in which a small win wins and the time-saving state advantageous to the player ends is given to the player. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, unlike the above-described second embodiment, a first passage counter 223da, a second passage counter 223db, a selected game storage area 223dc, an executed game storage area 223dd, and a jackpot information storage area 223de. and are different in that they are added.

The first passing counter 223da is a counter for counting the number of balls detected by the first passing sensor 905a (see FIG. 157) during the jackpot game, that is, the number of balls passing through the first right side region 901a during the jackpot game. be. This first pass counter 223da is set when the first pass sensor 905a is turned on during the big win in the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) of the sound ramp control device 113. If it is determined that there is, the value is incremented by 1 (see S3803). Also, the value added when determining the game method being executed is referred to (see S3806 to S3809). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot has ended (when the time saving state is set), the value is cleared (reset) to 0 (see S3811).

The second passage counter 223db is a counter similar to the above-described first passage counter 223da, and is the number of balls detected by the second passage sensor 905b (see FIG. 157) during the jackpot game. A counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the right area 901b. The processing using the second passage counter 223db is different only in that the target of the first passage counter 223da is changed from the first passage sensor 905a to the second passage sensor 905b. omitted.

The selected game storage area 223dc is an area for temporarily storing the game method desired by the player during the time saving state. In the selected game storage area 223dc, the game method selected during the game selection period set in a predetermined period (10 seconds) after the start of the jackpot game (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set). When it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is during the game selection period (S3852: Yes) in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (see S2157 in FIG. 167), The corresponding game method is stored (S3853).

Based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc, the game method desired by the player during the time saving state is determined, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 160(b)). It is configured to set the display mode of the current game method. The information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc is configured to be retained until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. ), the selection display mode may be formed such that the arrow points first to the information stored in the selection game storage area 223dc.

Furthermore, during the period (during the game selection period) during which the selection screen (see FIG. 160(a)) displayed at the start of the jackpot game is displayed frame button 22 is not pressed), the game method based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc (information stored during the past game selection period) is automatically selected. Good to configure.

In this case, at the start and end of the game selection period in which the selection screen is displayed, the game is selected so that the arrow indicates the display mode indicating the game method corresponding to the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. It is preferable to set the presentation mode during the period. With this configuration, even if the player does not select a game method, one of the game methods is automatically selected without changing the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. It is possible to execute a production that makes you think that it has been done.

The executed game storage area 223dd is an area for temporarily storing the actually executed game method. This execution game storage area 223dd stores information indicating the current game method determined based on the area where the balls shot during the big win (during the big win game) flow down, and the sound lamp control device. In the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) that is periodically (every 1 millisecond) executed in the main process 5 of 113 (see FIG. 164), during the jackpot (during the jackpot game), the first right region 901a, Information indicating a game method based on the number of balls flowing down the second right area 901b is stored (S3809, S3810 in FIG. 166). By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the area where the shot ball actually flows down, and determine the current game method based on the determination result, so that determination accuracy can be improved.

The information stored in this execution game storage area 223dd is used to determine the game method currently being executed, and is displayed in the desired game display area 861 of the display screen during the jackpot game (FIG. 160(b)). It is referred to when setting the mode (S3554 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot information storage area 223de is an area for storing information related to jackpots. This jackpot information storage area 223de stores information about the jackpot that was won. The special pattern type to be the target of the winning lottery) is stored in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 165). If so (S2211 in FIG. 165: Yes), the information included in the received command is stored (S2291 in FIG. 165).

<Regarding control processing in the main controller 110 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 of the fifth embodiment will be explained. The fifth embodiment executes control processing similar to the control processing of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment described above, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independent (in parallel). It is configured so that it can be changed. Then, when a win is won in the lottery of any one of the special symbols (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win), the other special symbol variation being executed is displayed to indicate a loss. It is configured to forcibly stop display in a manner.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the special symbol lottery. While the V switch 650e3 detects the ball), the fifth embodiment has a control process so that a big win (two types of wins) can be obtained. is different in that it does not have control processing for

In addition, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). , While it is configured to be able to set two game states, in the fifth embodiment, in addition to the two game states described above, a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols ) and latent state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) are different in that they are configured to be settable.

<Regarding control processing in the sound ramp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 164 to 168, control processing of the audio ramp control device 1113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the player can select the game method when the time saving state is set, and the player operates the operation handle 51 to play a weak right-handed game, or Any of the hard right hitting games is executed.

A weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game executed during the time saving state shoots the ball to the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right side in FIG. 157 front view) by greatly operating the operation handle 51. The game method of the right-handed game is classified in detail, and a predetermined adjustment accuracy is required in order to execute each game method. Therefore, in order for a player to execute a desired game method, a certain amount of adjustment period and adjustment shooting (shooting a ball while adjusting the amount of operation) are required.

In particular, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. Since it is configured so that the operation amount corresponds to the strong right hitting game, the player can easily execute the strong right hitting game, but for the weak right hitting game, the operation handle While operating 51 to the extent that it is a right-handed game (to the extent that the fired ball reaches the right side area of the variable display unit 80), it is not a strong right-handed game (the fired ball is the second right side (to the extent that it does not flow down the area 901b), requiring an adjustment period and an adjustment firing.

Therefore, as in the effect display (see FIG. 82 (a)) executed in the second embodiment described above, at the timing when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, that is, at the timing just before the time saving state is set If the effect display for allowing the player to select the game method is executed, the time saving state is set at the stage where the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 is adjusted toward the game method desired by the player. As a result, there is a problem that the game during the time saving state is likely to be executed in a game method unintended by the player.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the opening screen of the jackpot game is displayed, that is, at the timing when the jackpot game is started, the player is instructed to set a short time to be set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to execute an effect display for selecting a game method in the state. As a result, since the game method can be adjusted using the period during which the big win game is executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game during the time saving state in a game method unintended by the player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, even if the player executes any of a plurality of game methods that can be selected by the player as the game method during the time saving state, the player can obtain the same privilege during the jackpot game. Therefore, the period during which the jackpot game is executed can be used as the period for adjusting the operation amount of the operating handle 51 toward the game method during the time saving state without giving the player any disadvantageous situation.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the player can select the desired game method during the time saving state, and the game method selected by the player and the game method actually executed during the jackpot game. are compared, and based on the result of the comparison, a display is provided to guide the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 to the player. As a result, the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 can be easily adjusted toward the game method desired by the player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, depending on the game (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) executed during the time saving state, the amount of benefits (amount of prize balls) given when winning a jackpot is different. It consists of Then, the time-saving state (including the variable probability state) and the jackpot game are repeated and continued, that is, the jackpot in the continuous period in which the normal state (excluding the jackpot) is not set as the game state (continuous chance period, valid period) The number of winning times (number of consecutive wins) is classified and displayed for each game executed when winning a big win.

As a result, it is possible to visually confirm the relationship between the game method selected by the player and the winning status of the jackpot (the number of winning times). can be selected based on Therefore, it is possible to provide a strategy element to the game, and to improve interest.

164 to 168, in the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment, the main processing ( 55), main processing 5 (see FIG. 164), command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 99), command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 165), effect update processing 2 (see FIG. 105(b)). 168) is used instead.

The fifth embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in that the control processing contents of the main controller 110 are replaced with the control processing of the main controller 110 of the above-described fourth embodiment. ing. Therefore, the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 based on the change of the control processing of the main controller 110 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, and the other control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 is the second embodiment. , and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 164, the contents of main processing 5 executed by the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. 164 is a flow chart showing the contents of main processing 5. FIG. As shown in FIG. 164, in main processing 5, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2197) is performed instead of frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) in main processing 2 (see FIG. 55). , command determination processing 2 (S2163) is replaced with command determination processing 5 (S2193), and signal input processing (S2151) is added.

Here, the contents of command determination processing 5 (S2193) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 5 (S2193). This command determination process 5 (S2193) is different from the above-described command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) in that when a win-related command is received, the information indicated by the received command is stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de. The difference is that they are stored in

When the command determination process 5 (S2193 of FIG. 165) is executed, first, the same processes of S2201 to S2209 as the above-described command determination process 2 (see S2163 of FIG. 99) are executed. In the process of S2209, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the same winning information related process 2 (S2251) as in the above-described second embodiment is executed, and then the process of S2217 is executed. and terminate this process.

In the above-described second embodiment, in the above-described winning information related process 2 (S2251), it is determined whether the game method during the time saving state is a right-handed game or a left-handed game, and the determination Although it is configured to set the effect content (effect for guidance notification, effect for error notification) based on the result, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured not to execute such processing. Although they differ in points, detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, in the processing of S2209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2209 in FIG. 165: No), then it is determined whether or not a win-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165). , If it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165: Yes), the information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de is updated according to the received content (content indicated by the hit-related command) (S2291), after that, the same processing of S2212 and S2217 as the above-described command determination processing 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) is executed, and this processing ends.

The information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de updated in the process of S2291 described above includes, for example, the number of times the jackpot has been won, the chance of the jackpot winning lottery (the chance of the jackpot winning lottery being held) There is information for indicating the game method that resulted). In this way, by updating the contents of the big win information storage area 223de immediately after winning the big win, there is an effect that it is possible to study the past big wins during the big win game.

Returning to FIG. 165, the description continues. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S2211: No), the same S2213 to S2217 processes as in the above-described command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) are executed, End this process.

Next, the contents of the signal input processing (S2151) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing the contents of the signal input process (S2151). In this signal input processing (S2151), when the first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b provided on the game board 13 detect passage of the ball, processing based on the detection result is executed. Specifically, the number of balls passing (flowing down) through each area (first right area 901a, second right area 901b) provided on the game board 13 is counted, and the difference value is a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls). ), the game method corresponding to the region in which a large number of balls have been detected, that is, the region in which a large number of balls have flowed down is determined as the actual game method.

As shown in FIG. 166, when the signal input process (S2151) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S3801), and when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S3801: Yes), Next, it is determined whether or not the first passing sensor 905a detects a ball (S3802). In the process of S3802, if it is determined that the first passing sensor 905a has detected a ball (S3802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first passing counter 223da (S3803), and then the process of S3804 is performed. Move to On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3802 that the first passing sensor 905a has not detected the ball (S3802: No), the process of S3803 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3804.

In the process of S3804, it is determined whether or not the second passing sensor 905b has detected a ball (S3804). If it is determined that the second passing sensor 905b has detected a ball (S3804: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second passing counter 223db (S3805), and then the process of S3806 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S3804, if it is determined that the second passage sensor 905b has not detected the ball (S3804: No), the process of S3805 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3806.

Then, in the process of S3806, the difference between the value of the first passing counter 223da and the value of the second passing counter 223db is calculated. That is, the difference between the number of balls passing through the first right area 901a (the value of the first passing counter 223da) and the number of balls passing through the second right side area 901b (the value of the second passing counter 223db) during the jackpot game. Calculate

After the processing of S3806 is finished, it is next determined whether the difference between the value of the first passing counter 223da and the value of the second passing counter 223db is 5 or more (S3807), and it is determined that the difference is 5 or more. If so (S3807: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the first passing counter 223da is greater than the value of the first passing counter 223da and the value of the second passing counter 223db (S3808).

In the process of S3808, when it is determined that the value of the first passing counter 223da is larger (S3808: Yes), a weak right-handed game is set in the execution game storage area 223dd (S3809), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S3808 that the value of the first passing counter 223da is not greater than the value of the second passing counter 223db (the value of the second passing counter 223db is greater) (S3808: No), A hard-right hitting game is set in the execution game storage area 223dd (S3810), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, the number of balls that have flowed down the first right side area 901a and the number of balls that have flowed down the second right side area 901b among the right side areas of the balls shot during the jackpot game are counted, Based on the measurement result, it is possible to determine whether the current game method is a weak right-handed game in which the ball flows down to the first right side area 901a or a strong right-handed game in which the ball flows down to the second right side area 901b. Configure.

The information (game method) set in the execution game storage area 223dd by the processing of S3809 and the processing of S3810 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 160(b). By displaying the current game display area 860 on the screen, the player can easily grasp the current status.

In the fifth embodiment, when the difference value between the value of the first pass counter 223da and the value of the second pass counter 223db is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount (five balls), the current game method is set. It consists of That is, immediately after the jackpot game is executed (the period during which five or more balls are not shot by the right-handed game during the jackpot game), the current game method is executed regardless of which area the balls are shot. Since it is not set in the game storage area 223dd, the game method is configured not to be displayed in the current game display area 860 .

By configuring in this way, the current game method on the display screen is displayed immediately after the jackpot game is started and the game method in the right-handed game of the player is not fixed (unstable state). Display can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the current game method is not specified until the difference value between the value of the first passing counter 223da and the value of the second passing counter 223db reaches a predetermined amount (five balls). It consists of By configuring in this way, the display mode for indicating the current game method displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the display mode displayed in the current game display area 860) is frequently switched. can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 166, the description continues. In the process of S3811, it is determined whether the present time is the end timing of the jackpot (S3811). In the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that a command for indicating that the time saving state has been set (a command including the content indicating that the current game state is a time saving state) is output, or during a jackpot game When it is determined that the command indicating that it is no longer output, it is determined that the jackpot has ended.

In the processing of S3811, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (S3811: Yes), the value of the first pass counter 223da added during the jackpot game and the value of the second pass counter 223db are cleared to 0. (S3812), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current timing is not the end of the jackpot (S3811: No), that is, if the game state is neither the jackpot nor the jackpot end timing, other signal input processing is executed (S3813). , the process ends.

In addition, as the processing of S3813 described above, for example, when the game state is a normal state (when a game state where a left-handed hitting game aiming at the left side area is an appropriate game is set), the first passage sensor 905a Alternatively, when the second passing sensor 905b detects a ball, that is, when it is determined that a right-handed game is being played, to execute guidance display for guiding the game method to the player. or in a gaming state (for example, time-saving state) in which different games are executed according to the game method executed by the player, the first passing sensor 905a or the second passing sensor 905b detects the ball. Based on this, the game method being executed is discriminated and a process for displaying it in the current game display area 860 is executed.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the jackpot game is started (during the opening period of the jackpot game), the player selects the gaming method in the time saving state desired by the player, and uses the period in which the jackpot game is executed. However, it is sufficient that the period during which the jackpot game is executed can be used as a period for changing the game method. may be configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 160(a)) for selecting a game method in the middle of execution of .

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the content of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157) executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157), in addition to the processing performed in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, a game selection period (FIG. 160(a)) during which the player selects a desired game method is performed. ) is different in that operation processing of the frame button 22 in the middle is added.

When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157 in FIG. 167) is executed, first, it is determined whether pressing of frame button 22 is detected (S3851), and pressing of frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that there is no (S3851: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3851 that the depression of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3851: Yes), then it is determined whether the game selection period is now (S3852).

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth embodiment, in the command determination process 5 (see S2193 in FIG. 165), when a hit-related command is received (S2211: Yes) hit-related In the processing (S2212), 10 seconds after the start of the big win (after the start timing of the big win is determined) is set as the game selection period. During this game selection period, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set as the value of a period counter (not shown), and the value of the counter is updated in various counter updating processes (see S2111 in FIG. 164) executed every millisecond. By doing so, it is configured to measure 10 seconds.

In the processing of S3852, if it is determined that the current game selection period is in effect (the value of the period counter is not 0) (S3852: Yes), the game method corresponding to the pressing of the frame button 22 is selected and the game storage area 223dc is selected. (S3853), the game method set in S3853, ie, the display press command indicating the game method corresponding to the button press is set (S3855), and the process is terminated.

The display pressing command set here is output toward the display control device 114 by the command output processing (see S2102 in FIG. 164) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the game is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is controlled so that the game method selected by the player (the game method to be executed during the time saving state) is displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the game method desired by the player himself/herself during the jackpot game (see FIG. 160(b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 160(b), in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot game, both the game method desired by the player and the game method being executed during the jackpot game are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not it is necessary to adjust the game method based on the display contents displayed on the display screen.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when the game method desired by the player during the jackpot game and the game method executed during the jackpot game do not match, the game method actually executed However, it is configured to guide (instruct) the operation method of the operation handle 51 in the game guide area 859 of the sub-display area Ds so that the player can play the desired game method. As a result, the player can be guided to a specific adjustment method, so that the player can easily execute a desired game method.

Returning to FIG. 167, the description continues. In the processing of S3852, if it is determined that the game selection period is not currently in progress (S3852: No), then it is determined whether it is during another operation period (S3854), and it is determined that it is during another operation period. If so (S3854: Yes), the display press command corresponding to the button press corresponding to the operation period is set (S3855), and this process ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, other operation periods include, for example, a part of the special symbol variation period for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, a period during which the game is not executed (variation of the special symbol is executed is not done, so-called demo period), and in the special symbol fluctuation period, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected), the lottery result of the special symbol during fluctuation is It is configured such that an effect for suggesting a big win is executed.

Further, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected) during a so-called demo period in which the game is not being executed, a screen explaining the game contents of the pachinko machine 10 or , and today's game history is selectively displayed. In this way, by varying the privilege (executed effect) for the operation according to the game state and the game situation when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player. , can enhance the performance effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the content of effect update processing 5 executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update processing 5. FIG. This effect update process 5 is different from the effect update process of each embodiment described above in that a process of updating the display contents of the display screen displayed during the jackpot game is executed.

When the effect update process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S3551). (S3552), and then read the information stored in the execution game storage area 223dd.

Then, a display game method command corresponding to the game method being selected and the game method being executed is set (S3554). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (see S2102 in FIG. 164) of the sound lamp control device 113, and each content is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display mode indicating a game method corresponding to is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 168, the description continues. In the process of S3555, it is determined whether or not the contents of the information (selected game method) read out in the process of S3552 and the information (executed game method) read out in the process of S3553 match (S3555). If it is determined that they match (S3555: Yes), it means that the desired game method and the current game method match, so a display instruction command for maintaining the current game method is issued. is set, and this processing ends.

In addition, in the processing of S3556, when the display instruction command for maintaining the current game method is set, for example, "keep as it is" is displayed in the game guide area 859 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Comments are displayed. As a result, the player can enter an advantageous state advantageous to the player by maintaining the current game technique supplement.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3555 that the selected game and the executed game do not match (S3555: No), a display instruction command for indicating a comment for changing the current game method is set (S3557). reference). Here, for example, when the selected game is the challenge mode (strong right-handed game) and the execution game is the relief mode (weak right-handed game), "strike the right harder" to change the game method. Characters are displayed in the game guide area 859 . As a result, when the game method currently being executed is changed to the desired game method, it is possible to easily comprehend the details of adjustment that must be specifically executed.

Then, in the process of S3551, when it is determined that the present is not in the jackpot (S3551: No), furthermore, when the process of S3556 or the process of S3557 is finished, another effect update process is executed (S3558), and this End the process. In addition, in the processing of S3558, the corresponding processing is executed among the various effect update processing that can be executed in each of the above-described embodiments.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the first advantageous game (strong right It is configured so that the player can select either a hitting game) or a second advantage (weak right hitting game) in which a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Both the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game described above are configured so that the lottery for the special symbol can be executed more easily than when the normal state is set as the game state.

By constructing in this way, the player can select one advantageous game from a plurality of advantageous games as a game in which the lottery of special symbols can be more easily executed than in a normal state during an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, regardless of which game the player selects, the lottery for the special symbols can be executed more easily than in the normal state, so that the player can be provided with the pleasure of selecting a game method. .

In the fifth embodiment, the player can select a game method during an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and different conditions for ending the advantageous state are provided for a plurality of game methods that can be selected by the player. It consists of Specifically, the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is an advantageous state, and as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the number of fluctuations that is established when the special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number (100 times) In addition to the end condition, a win count end condition is established when the number of times a small win is won (a small win game is executed) in the lottery of special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times (once), and the first special The pattern lottery is configured to have a higher probability of winning a small prize than the second special pattern lottery.

By configuring in this way, the probability that the advantageous state ends in the first advantageous game in which the lottery for the first special symbol is executed and the second advantageous game in which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, that is, It is possible to change the probability (continuation rate) of winning a jackpot during an advantageous state.

Furthermore, if the player wins a jackpot in a first advantageous game in which the advantageous state is difficult to continue, among a plurality of advantageous games that can be selected by the player, a second advantageous game in which the advantageous state is more likely to continue than in the first advantageous game The content of the jackpot game is set so that the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game is larger than when the jackpot is won in the first game. In the case (if you win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery), 12 rounds worth of jackpot games are executed, and if you win the jackpot during the second advantageous game (the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot) When winning), 10 rounds worth of jackpot games are executed.

As a result, the player can play the first advantageous game in which the advantageous state is easy to end but has a large privilege at the time of winning the big win, and the second advantageous game in which the advantageous state is more difficult to end than the first advantageous game but has a small privilege at the time of winning the big win. It is possible to select either an advantageous game or a game. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select a desired game method according to the time that the player can spend on the game and the convenience of the player himself such as the current state of the game, thereby suppressing early boredom with the game. can be done.

In the fifth embodiment, the time-saving state is used as the advantageous state, but it is not limited to this, and the variable probability state may be the advantageous state. That is, as the probability variable end condition for ending the probability variable state, the variable number end condition and the winning number end condition can be set, and the probability variable end condition is set by the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. may be configured to differ in the easiness of establishment. Even when constituted in this way, there can exist an effect similar to the case where the time saving state mentioned above is made into an advantageous state.

In the case of using the variable probability state as an advantageous state, when the variable probability end condition is satisfied, the first variable probability end condition where the normal state is set and the second variable probability end condition where the time saving state is set are set in advance. It is preferable to configure such that the transition destination of the game state is changed according to the end condition that is established in advance. In this case, for example, when the first variable probability end condition is satisfied, a game state that is more disadvantageous than the variable probability state is set, and when the second variable probability end condition is satisfied, a game that is more advantageous than the variable probability state It is preferable to configure the game performance in each game state so that the state is set.

Specifically, when the variable number of times end condition is satisfied, the first probability variable end condition is satisfied, and when the winning number of times end condition is satisfied, the second probability variable end condition is satisfied. , Toku-zu 1 fluctuation count end condition established when the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches 50 times, and Toku-zu 2 fluctuation count end condition established when the fluctuation of the second special symbol reaches 80 times It is preferable to set a condition for ending the total number of fluctuations, which is established when the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 100 times.

By configuring in this way, the game specifications can be further differentiated between the first advantageous game for executing the lottery for the first special symbol and the second advantageous game for executing the lottery for the second special symbol. The implication of making the player select the game method can be strengthened. In addition, since the conditions for ending the total number of fluctuations are set, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of games in an advantageous state by alternately executing a plurality of advantageous games by the player.

Furthermore, with respect to the winning number end condition, the special figure 1 winning number ending condition that is established when the first advantageous game is executed, and the special figure 2 winning number ending condition that is established when the second advantageous game is executed , the game specifications can be further differentiated.

In the fifth embodiment, the condition for ending the advantageous state (time saving state) is changed according to the type of special symbol, and the game method during the advantageous state for the player (the special symbol for executing the lottery during the advantageous state) type) is configured to provide various games to the player, but not limited to this, for example, even according to the jackpot type when winning the jackpot, the end condition of the time-saving state It is preferable to configure so as to be variable. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of games in an advantageous state, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment described above, regardless of which game method is selected during the advantageous state, the expected value of the privilege amount to be given to the player during the period in which the advantageous state is set (that is, , the value obtained by dividing the privilege amount (number of prize balls) in the case of winning one jackpot by the average number of special symbol fluctuations in which the advantageous state is set continuously when the advantageous state is set once) is equivalent. However, as described above, in addition to the type of special symbol, when using a configuration that changes the end condition of the advantageous state based on the jackpot type, according to the jackpot type that was elected, the second It is preferable that the expected value of the privilege amount given to the player is larger when the first advantageous game is selected than when the second advantageous game is selected. As a result, it is possible to greatly vary the subsequent game results depending on the game method selected by the player.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 177. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, as the game state, normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), variable state ( Special pattern high probability state, normal pattern high probability state), latent state (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern low probability state) can be set, and the degree of advantage for the player is different. A plurality of variable probability states and a plurality of time-saving states with different degrees of advantage can be set.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol makes it easier to give more benefits to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. there is Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, more prize balls can be obtained than when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win. , The ratio of shifting to the probability variation state of the special symbol is increased (the jackpot type that can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 described later is easily selected).

Then, as the probability variation state, the probability variation state 1 in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed compared to the probability variation state 1 (that is, A relatively advantageous variable probability state 2 is provided. In addition, as a time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol is likely to be executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous) time saving state 1, and compared to the time saving state 1, the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed (that is, , relatively advantageous) time-saving state 2 is provided.

In this way, even if the same game state is set, the types of special symbols that are likely to be drawn can be switched, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the details of the set game state. A game can be played aiming at a more advantageous state by varying the amount and the rate of transition to the variable probability state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the probability variation state 1 is a state in which the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined, and the probability variation state 2 is the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol high It is a state combined with probability state 2 (time saving state 2).

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of operation (opening) patterns of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) during the time saving state are prepared, and the operation (opening) of the electric accessory 701 to be set It is configured to be able to change the special pattern that facilitates the execution of the lottery during the time saving state based on the pattern. The operation (opening) pattern of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) is configured to be variably set based on the winning jackpot type.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the special symbols that are likely to be drawn (varied) during the time-saving state based on the winning jackpot type, so that various game characteristics can be provided to the player. can. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time-saving states for ending the time-saving state are established based on a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, as the end condition of the number of fluctuations established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, special figure 1 fluctuation number end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol Toku-zu 2 fluctuation count end condition to be established, the total fluctuation count end condition to be established based on the number of times obtained by adding the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, is set, special figure The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times as the condition for ending the number of fluctuations of 1, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 100 times as the condition for ending the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2, and the number of fluctuations corresponding to the conditions for the end of the total number of fluctuations is 100 times. is set.

Furthermore, special figure 1 established based on special figure 1 small winning (small winning A) won by lottery of 1st special pattern as winning number end condition established when small winning is won in special symbol lottery. Winning times end condition, special figure 2 winning times end condition established based on special figure 2 small hit (small hit B) won by lottery of 2nd special pattern, special figure 1 winning times end condition is set. As the number of times of winning is set to 2 times, and the number of times of winning is set to 20 times as the condition for ending the number of times of winning special figure 2.

By configuring in this way, according to the type of special symbol in which the lottery (variation) is executed during the time saving state, the game in which the time saving state is likely to end (time saving in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is easily performed) A game) and a game in which the time saving state is difficult to end (time saving game in which the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is likely to be performed) can be set.

In addition, the time saving end condition set for each special symbol in the sixth embodiment may be different in the ease of ending the time saving state depending on the type of special symbol, each embodiment described above Any of the specific examples used (shown) may be adopted, and the probability of a small hit in the time saving state may be different depending on the type of special pattern, or multiple types of small hits that may be won in the lottery of special patterns In the configuration of setting the winning frequency end condition for each small winning type, the probability that any winning frequency ending condition is established may be different for each special symbol type.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of advantageous state end conditions (time-saving end conditions) for ending the advantageous state (time-saving state), which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, can be set. It is configured such that the ease with which the advantageous state termination condition is satisfied differs according to the type of state. Then, a plurality of advantageous states with different easiness of establishment of advantageous state end conditions are configured to be shifted based on the winning jackpot type.

As a result, the player can be made to play games with various advantageous conditions through a plurality of jackpot winnings. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, since there is a special advantageous state that can be shifted only when the jackpot is won multiple times from the state in which the normal state is set, the player can win a plurality of jackpots. It is possible to play the game enthusiastically so as to pass through and shift to a special advantageous state.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, a game state (for example, a normal state and an advantageous state) is set with different expectations for shifting to a special advantageous state that is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game state (advantageous state) with a high expectation of shifting to a special advantageous state is set, the game can be easily played continuously, and the operation of the game can be enhanced.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 are partially changed, the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 are the same as those of the first embodiment. This is a change from the pachinko machine 10 in . Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 169, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 169, in the sixth embodiment, the configuration of the lower side and the right side area of the variable display unit 80 is different from the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above. are doing. Specifically, as the entrance that triggers the special symbol lottery, there are two first entrances that trigger the lottery of the first special symbol (first entrance 64a1, right first The point that the entrance 64a0) and the second entrance 64b that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol are provided, that is, the point that three entrances that trigger the lottery of the special symbol are provided. are different.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the present embodiment, the first entrance 64a1 is on the lower side of the variable display unit 80 in front view, and the right second entrance is on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in front view. The opening 64b is provided with a right first ball opening 64a2 on the right side of the right second ball opening 64b in a front view.

When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a1 and the right first ball entrance 64a2, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. That is, the first ball entrance 64a1 and the right first ball entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second ball entrance 64b has a function different from that of the two types of ball entrances described above, because the lottery for the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball. is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the right first ball entrance 64a2 is provided with a first operating accessory 645a. This first operating accessory 645a has an open state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the ball into the right first ball entrance 64a2, and a state in which it is impossible to enter the ball into the right first ball entrance 64a2 ( It is formed of a pair of vane-shaped members so that it can be changed between a closed state and a difficult closed state. This first operating accessory 645a is switched to an open state when a ball enters a first operating port 704 provided inside the distribution winning device 700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the first operating accessory 645a, which has been switched to the open state, switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

Similarly, the right second entrance 64b is provided with a second operating accessory 645b. This second operating accessory 645b also has an open state in which it is possible (easy) for a ball to enter the second right ball entrance 64b, and a state in which it is impossible for a ball to enter the second right ball entrance 64b ( It is formed of a pair of vane-shaped members so that it can be changed between a closed state and a difficult closed state. This second operating accessory 645b switches to the open state when the ball enters the second operating opening 707 provided inside the distribution winning device 700 . On the other hand, the second operating accessory 645b switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters the right second ball entrance.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, a first operating member formed of a pair of vane-shaped members serves as a restricting member for restricting the entry of the ball into the right first ball entrance 64a2 and the right second ball entrance 64b. Although an object 645a and a second operating accessory 645b are provided, any one that changes the ease with which a ball can enter each ball entrance can be used. By doing so, the entry of the ball into the ball entrance is restricted, and by being positioned in the buried state where the ball is buried in the game board 13, the configuration may be changed so as to allow the entry of the ball into the ball entrance. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the working accessory is in a closed state, the ball cannot enter the corresponding entrance (accompanied by the working accessory). Instead of closing to the point where the ball cannot be entered, it should be changed so that the ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the working accessory 645 is configured to be able to be positioned in two states, the open state and the closed state, but it is configured to be variable to three or more states. Also good. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, a configuration is used in which a working accessory is attached to each of the right first entrance 64a2 and the right second entrance 64b, but other configurations may be used. For example, by changing one working accessory to the first state, it is easier for the ball to enter one ball entrance (easily enter the ball from the other ball entrance) and to enter the other ball. By making it difficult for the ball to enter the mouth (difficult to enter the ball from one of the entrances) and changing the state to a second state that is different from the first state, the first state described above is reversed. Make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball opening (difficult to enter the ball from the other ball opening) and make it easy for the ball to enter the other ball opening (easily enter the ball from the one ball opening). can be configured to As a result, it is possible to vary the degree of entry of a ball into a plurality of entry holes according to the operation contents of one working role.

A distribution winning device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. This distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (entering) a ball entered into either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707 . As described above, if the ball is distributed to the first operating port 704 (if the ball enters), the first operating accessory 645a associated with the right first ball entering port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first ball entering A ball can enter the opening 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operation opening 707 (if the ball enters), the second operation accessory 645b associated with the right second ball entrance is switched to the open state, and the ball is moved to the right second ball entrance 64b. And the ball becomes a state that can be entered.

Details of the distribution winning device 700 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the distribution winning device 700 provided in the right area of the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment. The top side of the distribution winning device 700 is configured so that balls can flow down. As shown in FIG. 81, the upper surface side of the distribution winning device 700 is inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, so the ball that reaches the upper surface of the distribution winning device 700 basically flows down in the lower left direction do. In addition, an electric accessory 701 is provided on the upper right side of the distribution winning device 700 . This electric accessory 701 has an open state (immersion state) in which a ball can enter (easy) the inside of the distribution winning device 700, and a closed state (projection state) in which a ball cannot enter (difficult). ) and can be switched between. This electric accessary 701 is set to an open state when winning by lottery of normal symbols.

The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 branches into two flow paths, a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706 . Since the first working port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow path 703 , the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 703 enters the first working port 704 . On the other hand, since the second working port 707 is provided downstream of the second flow path 706 , the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 enters the second working port 707 . In addition, at the position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 diverge, a switching valve ( Variable flow path) 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches between a first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the ball flows down to the second flow path 706 (slide displacement). )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slid to the left in the front view, thereby blocking the upstream side of the second flow path and leaving only the first flow path open. advances into the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slid to the right in the front view, thereby blocking the upstream side of the first flow path and opening only the first flow path. , the sphere progresses to the second channel.

The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds after the normal symbol hit state) ) has passed, the first switching state is switched to the second switching state. Further, when a specific period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after switching to the second switching state, the switching state is switched to the first switching state again.

If the ball can enter the sorting winning device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can flow down toward the second operating port 707 . When the ball enters the second actuation port 707, the second actuation accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, allowing the ball to enter the right second ball entry port 64b. That is, since it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high rate of giving the variable probability state of the special symbol when the jackpot is won, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the flow direction of the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 (whether it flows down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 707). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 170, a first actuation mechanism 705 is provided inside the first actuation port 704 . This first operating port 704 is composed of a known non-motorized accessory. can be done. In addition, when the first operating accessory 645a is in the open state, the first operating accessory 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entered into the right first ball entrance 64a2.

On the other hand, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707 . The second actuation mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first actuation mechanism 705 . That is, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball entering the second operating port 707. In addition, when the second operating accessory 645b is in the open state, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b.

In this way, by entering the ball into the distribution winning device 700, the ball is entered into the first operating opening 704 or the second operating opening 707, and the first operating accessory 645a or the second It is possible to switch the 2-operation accessory 645b to the open state. As described above, if the special pattern 2 lottery results in a big hit, it is more advantageous than the special pattern 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. can draw attention to. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 171, the correspondence relationship between the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 in the distribution winning device 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 171, two types (opening pattern A and opening pattern B) are provided for the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 . When the open pattern A is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second) immediately after the winning of the normal symbol is started, and then set to the closed state for 1.4 seconds. be done. After the open state is set for 0.1 second, the winning state ends. During the open period of 1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so the ball entered into the distribution winning device 700 during this period is distributed to the first operating port 704. . On the other hand, during the open period of 0.1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so the ball entering the sorting prize winning device 700 during this period is the second operating port 707 distributed to. However, since it is difficult to enter the ball during the open period of 0.1 seconds, in many cases, the ball entering the sorting device 700 while the open pattern A is set is It is distributed to the first operation port 704, and the right first ball entrance 64a1 is opened. Therefore, if the opening pattern A is set, it is relatively disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when the open pattern B is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a very short time (that is, 0.1 seconds) immediately after the winning of the normal symbols is started, and then closed for 1.4 seconds. state. Then, the hit state ends after the open state is set for a relatively long time (ie, one second). During the opening period of 0.1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so the ball entering the sorting prize winning device 700 during this time is directed to the first operating port 704. distributed. However, as described above, it is difficult to enter the ball during an extremely short opening period of 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, during the open period of one second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state. distributed. Therefore, in many cases, a ball entered into the sorting device 700 while the opening pattern B is set is sorted to the second operation opening 707, and the right second ball entrance 64b is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

In this manner, the degree of advantage for the player can be varied depending on the set release pattern, so that the player can be interested in the release pattern each time the normal symbol wins. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern to be set is determined according to the game state. That is, in the normal state (non-probability variable non-time-saving state), time-saving state 1, and probability-variable state 1, the open pattern A is set as the open pattern of the electric accessory 701 when the normal symbol hits. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the variable probability state 2, the open pattern B is set when the normal drawing hits. Therefore, in the time saving state 2 and the variable probability state 2, the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the variable probability state 2, it is difficult for the second special symbol lottery to be executed, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this way, the types of special symbols that are likely to be executed can be changed according to the game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 169, the description continues. A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged in the lower right portion of the game board 13, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery is performed as a result of entering (winning) a ball into the first ball entrance 64a1, the right first ball entrance 64a2, or the right second ball entrance 64b, After a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol of the big win is displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as the V winning device 650 (see FIGS. 4 to 6) in the first embodiment described above, and is as described above in the first embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the numeral "65" is attached to the numeral "650" in FIGS. 4 to 6 for explanation. Although the details are omitted, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry device 65 during the big hit is the variable probability switch 65e3 (switch used in place of the V switch 650e3 of the first embodiment described above). ), a variable probability state is imparted after the end of the big win, and in this respect, it is functionally different from the V winning device 650 of the first embodiment described above. Since other configurations and functions are the same, description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. First, FIG. 173 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 174(a) is included in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. It is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, FIG. 174 (b) shows the contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 included in the first per type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment It is a diagram. In addition, the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 is referred to determine the kind of jackpot when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, and the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 is a lottery for the second special symbol. It is referred to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is hit.

First, with reference to Drawing 174 (a), selection table 202b1 for special figures 1 contained in the 1st hit classification selection table 202b is explained. FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 174(a), the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 defines the jackpot type to be selected for each value of the first per type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9". This jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the probability variable switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. . In addition, the pattern that can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is, for example, the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of 4 rounds (providing the variable probability switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 closed flow path is opened). Since the player hits the ball continuously toward the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot, one or more balls can flow down to the variable probability switch 65e3 in 5 seconds. When the ball passes the probability variable switch 65e3 in the big hit, the probability variable state is given after the big hit.

That is, the variable probability state 1 (game state in which the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined) is given after the big hit. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot due to the player not hitting the ball during the jackpot, etc., after the jackpot ends, time saving state 1 (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol High probability state 1) is given. Although the jackpot A is likely to be in the variable probability state, the variable probability state to be granted is the variable probability state 1, and the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to execute during the variable probability state, so the jackpot type that is likely to be granted the variable probability state 2 ( It is disadvantageous compared to jackpot B and jackpot F).

The jackpot B is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 49". The number of rounds of this jackpot B is 4 rounds, and the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows passage of the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and after the jackpot, the time saving state 2 (normal pattern high probability state 2). Is a jackpot type that is given. When the ball passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 in the big hit, the special symbol probability variable state 2 (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state 2) is given after the big hit.

That is, the variable probability state 2 in which the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 are combined is given after the big hit. On the other hand, when the big win ends without the ball passing through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win because the player did not hit the ball during the big win, only the time saving state 2 is provided after the big win B ends. The big win B is one of the most advantageous big win types in terms of the game state after the big win because it is easy for the player to shift to the variable probability state 2 which is the most advantageous. On the other hand, since the number of prize balls is smaller than that in the case of a big hit by lottery of the second special symbols, the prize balls are disadvantageous.

The jackpot C is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 94". This jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass the probability variable switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. be. The pattern that cannot pass the variable probability switch 65e3 is, for example, the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 4 rounds (the variable probability switch in the variable winning device 65 65e3 is opened). Even if the ball is entered at the same time as the 4th round is started and the specific winning port 65a is opened, the ball cannot reach the flow path provided with the variable probability solenoid 65k for 0.5 seconds. The flow path is closed before the ball reaches the variable probability solenoid 65k. Therefore, in the jackpot C, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not provided after the jackpot. That is, the jackpot C is a jackpot type in which a variable probability state of special symbols is not given and a time-saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbols is difficult to execute is given, and the number of prize balls is also the number of the second special symbols. This is the most disadvantageous type of jackpot for the player, since it is less than when the jackpot is won in the lottery.

The jackpot D is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "95 to 94". This jackpot D is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. be. A variable probability state is not given and the number of prize balls is small compared to the case of a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern, but a time-saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special pattern is easily executed is given, so a big hit D is achieved. is advantageous compared to jackpot C.

Next, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 174(b). FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), also in the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, similarly to the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the jackpot type to be selected is defined for each value of the first per type counter C2. ing. Specifically, the jackpot E is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19". This jackpot E is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the probability variable switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. . Although the jackpot E is likely to be in a variable probability state, the variable probability state to be granted is the variable probability state 1, and since the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to execute during the variable probability state, the jackpot type that is likely to be granted the variable probability state 2 ( The state after the end of the big win is disadvantageous compared to the big win B and the big win F).

The jackpot F is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "20 to 79". This jackpot F is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the probability variable switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. . The big win F is one of the most advantageous big win types in terms of the game state after the big win because it is easy for the player to shift to the probability variable state 2 which is the most advantageous. Also, in terms of prize balls, a larger amount of prize balls can be obtained than in the case of a big hit by lottery for the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot F is the most advantageous jackpot for the player.

The jackpot G is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 84". This jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. be. Therefore, since the jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the probability variable state of the special pattern is not given and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special pattern is difficult to execute is given, the game state after the jackpot ends is the most disadvantageous. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, it is more advantageous than winning a jackpot by lottery for the first special symbol.

A jackpot H is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "85 to 94". This jackpot H is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. be. Although the variable probability state is not provided, the time-saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is provided, so that the big win H is more advantageous than the big win C and the big win G. In addition, it is more advantageous than getting a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in terms of prize balls.

Thus, in this embodiment, various jackpot types are provided. Since each jackpot type differs in the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot, the player can be made to pay attention to which jackpot type it will be when the jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is a big hit or the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, the number of prize balls that can be obtained and the ratio of the jackpot type that becomes an operation pattern that can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. different. That is, the player who wins the big prize in the lottery for the second special symbol can obtain more prize balls, which is advantageous for the player. In addition, when the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the ratio of the jackpot type (jackets E, F) that is an operation pattern that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is 80%, whereas the first In the lottery of the special symbols, the ratio of the big hit types (big hits A, B), which is an operation pattern that can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, is 50%. Therefore, it is easier to be in a definite variable state when the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. Therefore, the player can expect a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol, so whether the lottery to be executed is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. It is possible to play a game while paying attention to. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the type of the high-probability state of normal symbols is configured to be variable according to the jackpot type that is won. Specifically, a normal design high probability state 1 and a normal design high probability state 2 are configured to be settable. Then, in addition to the normal state as the game state, the probability variation state 1 in which the normal symbol high probability state 1 is set for the special symbol high probability state, the probability variation state 2 in which the normal symbol high probability state 2 is set, and the special It is possible to set five kinds of game states in total, including a time saving state 1 in which a normal pattern high probability state 1 is set for a pattern low probability state and a time saving state 2 in which a normal pattern high probability state 2 is set. Configure.

Here, with reference to FIG. 172, a game state transition method in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 172, in the sixth embodiment, five game states are provided, and as described above, each time a big win is made, a new game state is set after the big win is over. As shown in FIG. 172, when it becomes a jackpot A in the normal state (non-variable non-time-saving state), basically (unless the ball is stopped during the jackpot), it shifts to the variable state 1 and goes to the jackpot B. When it becomes, it shifts to probability change state 2. Further, when the jackpot C is reached, the state shifts to the time saving state 1, and when the jackpot D is reached, the state shifts to the time saving state 2.例文帳に追加

Also, as shown in FIG. 172, if the gaming state is the time saving state 1 (the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) and the variable probability state 1 (the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed). Performs the same state transition as the normal state (non-variable non-time-saving state). It should be noted that, although not shown, in the time saving state 1 or the variable probability state 1, when the lottery of special symbols for the number of time saving times is executed without becoming a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 172, if the game state is the time saving state 2 (the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed), when it becomes a big hit E, it shifts to the probability variable state 1, and when it becomes a big hit F , shifts to the most advantageous variable probability state 2, shifts to the time saving state 1 when the jackpot G is reached, shifts to the time saving state 2 when the jackpot H is reached (loops the time saving state 2). Further, as shown in FIG. 172, also in the probability variable state 2 (the probability variable state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed), the same state transition as the time saving state 2 is performed. It should be noted that, although not shown, in the time saving state 2 or the variable probability state 2, when the lottery of special symbols for the number of times of time saving is executed without becoming a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 173, the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203ab, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb, variable probability counter 203zg, variable probability setting flag 203zs, variable probability passage counter 203zt1, winning number counter 203zt2, operation counter 203zt3, counter buffer 203zh, remaining ball timer flag 203zt4, remaining ball timer 203zt5 , probability variable effective flag 203zt6, probability variable effective timer 203zt7, emission number counter 203zt8, time saving medium counter 203zu, time saving identification flag 203zx, jackpot flag 203zi, and other memory area 203z.

Of these, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are the same as those in the first embodiment described above. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 (through gate), the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to second holding area). 4 areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203zb is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4. be done. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za.

The variable probability counter 203zg is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols). indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability variable counter 203zg has an initial value set to zero, and in the main controller 110, in the final round of the jackpot, the timing ( That is, when the variable probability flag 203r described later is turned on at the end timing of the jackpot, that is, when the game ball enters the variable probability port 900a and the game ball is detected by the variable probability switch (not shown), 100 is set. be done.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the ball flows down a specific area (the area for the variable probability switch 65e3 to detect the ball) during the jackpot game, so that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed (variable probability A predetermined value is set in the counter 203zg), but without being limited to this, according to the type of the winning jackpot, the variable probability state is automatically set after the jackpot game ends. You can

When the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start processing or the special symbol 2 variation start processing, the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is referred to, and if the value is greater than 0, based on the first per random number table for high probability, special While the symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the variable probability counter 203zg is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table for low probability.

The counter buffer 203zh is a buffer area used for counting each counter value, as described above.

The jackpot flag 203zi is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203zi is turned on, a jackpot game is executed in which the distribution winning device 650 or the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state by the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 .

The variable probability setting flag 203zs is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (the variable probability switch 65e3 has detected the game ball during the jackpot game). or not). Here, when the game ball passes through this variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203zs is set to ON. On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the fact that the variable probability flag 203r is set to ON. The variable probability setting flag 203zs is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

The variable probability passage counter 203zt1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 in one round (13 rounds in the jackpot B in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning hole 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203zt1 and the discharge number counter 203zt8, which will be described later. This probability variation passage counter 203zt1 is updated by adding one each time the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed. Also, after executing the process of whether or not the number of winning game balls in the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged game balls, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. It should be noted that the probability variable passage counter 203zt1 is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203zt2 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 provided in the first variable winning device 65, the value is updated by adding 1 at a time. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the first variable prize winning device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203zt2) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203zt8 and the probability variable passage counter 203zt1) and are reset to the initial value of "0" after it is determined whether or not they match. Incidentally, the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203zt3 is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round for the jackpot B, and the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round for the jackpot C. set. In the operation counter 203zt3, for the big win B, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data of 13 rounds, and for the big win C, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. The operation counter 203zt3 is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203zt3 and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 to ON, the remaining ball timer 203zt5, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203zt5 is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. It is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203zt5 discharges the winning game balls to the first variable prize winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. is a counter for determining whether the required time has passed. In this embodiment, the time required for the first variable winning device 65 to discharge the winning game ball is 2 seconds. It is set as the upper limit. When the remaining ball timer 203zt5 reaches the upper limit value (three seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes to the first variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. be. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the first variable winning device 65. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable prize winning device 65, and an impact or the like is applied at the start timing of the 13th round to make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and the jackpot C is achieved. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a special flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203zs is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the probability variable gaming state is incorrectly given.

Probability variation effective flag 203zt6 is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203zt6 is set to ON, based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, the game balls that flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 required to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 It indicates that the time is less than or equal to the time. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3.

The variable probability valid timer 203zt7 is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203zt6 described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203zt7, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203zt7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge channel 65e2, the game ball is passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 by entering the special discharge channel 65e2, or the piano wire etc. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the game ball to pass through, or causing the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that it has passed by radio waves.

The discharge number counter 203zt8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 in one round. This ejection number counter 203zt8 is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejections are determined.

The counter 203zu during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. This time saving medium counter 203zu is set to 100 when the variable probability setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state is not set after the jackpot game, the state shifts to the time saving state of 100 times.

The time saving identification flag 203zx is a flag for identifying the type of time saving state. If 0 is set to this time saving identification flag 203zx, it means that it is time saving state 1 (probability variable state 1). It should be noted that the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 even in the normal state where the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed as in the time saving state 1 . On the other hand, when 1 is set to the time saving identification flag 203zx, it means that it is time saving state 2 (probability variable state 2). When the winning pattern is normal, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set by referring to the time saving identification flag 203zx. Specifically, when the time saving identification flag 203zx is 0 and the normal pattern hits, the opening pattern A is set, so the ball is distributed during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. Enter the winning device 700. By doing so, the ball enters the first operating port 704, and the ball enters a state in which the ball can enter the left first ball entering port 64a2.

On the other hand, when the time saving identification flag 203zx is 1 and the normal pattern hits, the opening pattern B is set, so that the ball is entered into the distribution winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. A ball enters the second operating opening 707, and the ball enters a state in which the ball can enter the second left ball entering opening 64b. The time saving identification flag 203zx is set to a value corresponding to the time saving state given after the big win at the end of the big win. In addition, 0 is set when the time period of the normal symbol ends (that is, when the time period counter 203zu becomes 0).

In addition, in the normal state (non-probability variable non-time-saving state), the time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 because the ball is launched toward the right side of the game board 13 in the non-time-saving state (so-called right-handed hitting). This is to constrain the method. That is, if the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 1 in the normal state, there is a possibility that the player always hits to the right in an attempt to execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery. In the normal state, the probability of winning the normal pattern is low, so it is difficult to enter the ball into the right second ball entrance 64b. Since it becomes a probability change state, the merit in the case of a big hit becomes large. Therefore, there is a possibility that an irregular game method is induced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 in the normal state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is low, and the opening pattern A is set even if it becomes a hit, so the game It can be a situation where there is no merit for a player to execute a right-handed stroke. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be made to hit left, thereby preventing (suppressing) an irregular game method.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. In the sixth embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to store the reserved ball, and after the big hit, the special symbol is increased. The difference is that the probability state can be set.

First, with reference to FIG. 175, the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175) executed in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175).

In the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (Z201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (number of times of holding fluctuation display in special symbol 1 N1) and the value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab (fluctuation in special symbol 2 The display hold count N2) is obtained (Z203).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball of variable display in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is greater than 0 (Z204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0. If it is determined (Z204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (Z209), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (N1 ) is 0 (Z209: No), it is determined that there is no reserved ball for variable display in the special symbol, and this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is greater than 0 (Z204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (Z205 ), and sets a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation (Z206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 51), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. do.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (Z207). In the process of Z207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203aa are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed. In addition, the detailed description of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process is omitted.

Also, when the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is determined to be 0 (Z204: No) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is determined to be greater than 0 (Z209: Yes), for the special symbol 1 reserved ball, the same processing as the above-described special symbol 2 reserved ball is performed. In addition, about special design 1 fluctuation|variation start processing, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (Z214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Z215), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (Z214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z216). The stop design is set in advance by the special design 2 fluctuation start process (Z208) or the special design 1 fluctuation start process (Z213). When this special symbol 2 variation start process or special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 or the special symbol 1 is set.

After the process of Z216 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (this lottery result) is a special symbol. It is determined whether or not the symbol is a jackpot (Z217). Then, if the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (Z217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203zi is set to ON (Z218), the jackpot start command is set (Z220), the time reduction medium counter 203zu, and the probability variation counter 203zg is reset (Z271), and the process proceeds to Z222.

By the jackpot flag 203zi set to ON in the process of Z218, the jackpot game process is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 51). Since the specific description is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, the description is omitted.

In addition, the jackpot start command set in the process of Z220 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . When receiving the jackpot start command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114 . As a result, a display suggesting the start of the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can be made to recognize that the special game state has been entered.

On the other hand, in the process of Z217, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (Z217: No), the same time saving number update process (see S219 in FIG. 38) as the first embodiment described above is executed, Information is updated with respect to the end condition of the number of fluctuations that is established based on the number of fluctuations in the pattern. When the process of S219 is finished, it is next determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223: Yes), the probability variation The value of the counter 203zg is decremented by 1 (Z224), the same processes of S220 and S221 as in the first embodiment are executed, and the process proceeds to Z222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203zg is 0 (Z223: No), the process of Z224 is skipped and the process proceeds to S220.

In the processing of Z222, a stop command is set in order to synchronize the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first design display device 37 corresponding to the stop design set in the processing of Z216, and the fluctuation stop of the third design display device 81. (Z222). After completing the processing of Z222, this processing ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the special symbol variation process 6 of the sixth embodiment as well, it is determined whether or not a small hit is won in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, and if a small hit is won, The small winning time saving update process (see FIG. 41) corresponding to the winning small winning is executed. By configuring in this way, similarly to the above-described embodiments, as a condition for ending the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), the time saving end established when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number In addition to the conditions (fluctuation frequency end condition), it is possible to set a time reduction end condition (winning frequency end condition) that is established when the number of times of winning small prizes in the lottery of special symbols reaches a predetermined number.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, as the game state set after the end of the jackpot, the high probability state of the special symbol can be set in addition to the high probability state of the normal symbol. And, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to be set to the upper limit of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the value set to the probability variation counter zg). Thus, as a game state that is advantageous to the player, in the case of setting a game state (probable variable state) other than the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), the game state (probable variable state) ends It may be configured to set conditions.

In this case, as a condition for ending the probability variable state, it may be configured to set a probability variable end condition different from the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state described above. It is good to set the winning number of times as the probability variable end condition.

In addition, it is good to configure so that the requirements that cause the establishment of the variable probability end condition and the requirements that cause the establishment of the time saving end condition are different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which end condition is satisfied first, out of the variable probability end condition and the time saving end condition. Therefore, for example, when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when moving from a state where it is easy to execute the lottery of special symbols to a state where it is difficult to do), whether the probability variable end condition was already satisfied (special (whether or not the pattern has shifted from a state in which it is easy to win the jackpot to a state in which it is difficult to win).

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, as a game state that is advantageous to the player as a game state, time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) and variable state (high probability state of special symbols) and can be set, and as the end condition for each game state, the end condition for the end of the number of fluctuations that is established when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches a predetermined number ), it is configured to set the winning number end condition (time-saving state winning number ending condition, probability variable state winning number ending condition) that is established when the number of times that a predetermined small win is won reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, unlike the gameplay that only determines whether or not the game state moves from a game state that is advantageous to the player to a game state that is disadvantageous, the end of the time saving state (satisfaction of time saving end conditions) and the end of the variable state (variable end conditions establishment), and it is possible to transition to various game states.

Therefore, for the player, one end condition (eg, time saving end condition) is established before the other end condition (eg, variable probability end condition), and the other end condition is established after one end condition is established The period until the conditions are satisfied (for example, the latency period) may be configured to be the most advantageous game period for the player. As a result, it is possible to provide a new playability in which the player is expected to fulfill a termination condition for ending a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state, which is one of the game states, and to play the game. .

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, according to the set time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), the time saving state (variable probability state) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, A time-saving state (probability variable state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed can be set. The lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Then, from the normal state, it is easy to shift to a time-saving state (probability variable state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and from the time-saving state (variable probability state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed, It is constructed so as to facilitate transition to a time-saving state (probability variable state) in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed.

By configuring in this way, a game state that is more advantageous to the player can be set by making a plurality of transitions to the game state via a big win or the like, so that the game that is most advantageous to the player can be set. Expectations can be given to playing a game in this state. Furthermore, in this case, in the state in which the variable probability state (variable probability state 2) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is set, only when the time saving end condition is satisfied before the variable probability end condition, It is preferable to configure so as to shift to the most advantageous game state for the player.

As a result, a game state advantageous to the player is set based on the fact that the player has won a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols, and the game state is set in a state in which the game state is advantageous to the player. When a specific end condition for ending the game is satisfied, the game state shifts to a more advantageous game state, and when a condition other than the specific end condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to a disadvantageous game state. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player always play a game with a sense of tension.

It should be noted that specific end conditions for ending a game state that is advantageous to the player and end conditions other than the specific end conditions used in the sixth embodiment are described in each of the above-described embodiments. Various termination conditions described above may be applied, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 6 (Z1105). This jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203zi is on (Z1301). In the process of Z1301, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is off (Z1301: No), since there is no need to control the jackpot, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1301, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is ON (Z1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is time to start the jackpot (Z1371). When it is determined in the process of Z1371 that it is time to start the jackpot (Z1371: Yes), an opening command is set (Z1372), and this process ends.

In the process of Z1371, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (Z1371: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (Z1374). When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of Z1374 (Z1374: Yes), the setting of the opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 64a, and the setting of the switching operation of the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1375), and ends this process.

Here, when the jackpot operation setting process 6 (Z1375) is executed, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario, and based on the read opening scenario (data) to set the switching operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k. Then, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set.

In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of Z1374 (Z1374: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the switching operation of the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376 ).

In the process of Z1376, if it is determined that it is time to switch the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: Yes), switch the state of the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1377), End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1376, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the switching operation of the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ending effect (Z1378 ).

In the processing of Z1378, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (Z1378: Yes), ending processing 6 is executed (Z1379), and this processing ends. The details of this ending process 6 (Z1379) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z1378, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (Z1378: No), the winning process 6 is executed (Z1380), the abnormality process 6 is executed (Z1381), and this process ends.

When the prize winning process 6 (Z1380) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the round valid period is reached. The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the opening/closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period, it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a has passed, the winning number counter 203zt2 is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is 10 or more.

If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is 10 or more, it means that the conditions for ending the current round game are satisfied. Sphere timer flag 203zt4 is set to ON. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

Thus, in the winning process 6, a process of determining whether or not the round game end condition is established during one round game in the jackpot game is executed. Further, a process of determining whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 appropriately during the jackpot game is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is greater than 0, and if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is greater than 0, the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is decremented by 1 and updated. Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3.

When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, the value of the variable probability passage counter 203zt1 is updated by adding 1 to it. The variable probability setting flag 203zs is set to ON. After that, it is determined whether the operation counter 203zt3 is 0 or not. When it is determined that the operation counter 203zt3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF, the variable probability effective flag 203zt6 is set to ON, and this process ends. Here, when the probability variable effective flag 203zt6 is set to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the gaming ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 65e2 passes through the probability variable switch 65e3, the probability variable You can control how the game is set.

As a result, if the probability variable effective timer 203zt7 is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability variable switch 65e3, so the probability variable gaming state can be set in consideration of the ball blowing time. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

Next, as the abnormal process 6 (S1381), a process of monitoring whether or not the game ball is illegally passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, details of the ending process 6 (Z1379 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ending process 6 (Z1379). In the ending process 6 (Z1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set to the sound lamp controller 113 (Z4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203zi is set to OFF (Z4102), and it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203zs is ON (Z4103). When it is determined in the process of Z4103 that the variable probability setting flag 203zs is ON (Z4103: Yes), the variable probability counter 203zg is set to 100 (Z4104). Although illustration is omitted, based on the variable probability counter 203zg being set to 100, the variable probability setting flag 203zs is configured to be set to OFF. After that, it shifts to the processing of this Z4105.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4103, when it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203zs is not ON (Z4103: No), the process of Z4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z4105.

In the process of Z4105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed was a jackpot game based on one of jackpots A, C, E, and G (Z4105). If it is determined that the jackpot A, C, E, or G in the process of Z4105 (Z4105: Yes), 0 is set to the time reduction identification flag 203zx (Z4106), and the process proceeds to Z4108.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4105, if it is determined that none of the big hits A, C, E, G (Z4105: No), set the time reduction identification flag 203zx to 1 (Z4107), and move to the process of Z4108 do.

By processing Z4106 or Z4107, the time reduction identification flag 203zx is set to 0 or 1, so that the open pattern of the electric accessary product set in the normal symbol variation processing is switched. After completing the processing of Z4106 or Z4107, the value of the time saving counter 203zu is set to 100 (Z4108), and this processing ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the time saving state (probability variable state) is given, the type of time saving state set according to the jackpot type is set to be different. Thereby, in the time-saving state executed after the jackpot game, when the game ball enters the sorting prize winning device 700, it enters the first operation opening 704 or the second operation opening 707. Either the game ball is entered into the right first ball inlet 64a2 or the right second ball inlet 64b is switched depending on the type of jackpot and can be set.

Therefore, in the time saving state, it is possible to switch whether the lottery is executed with the first special symbol or the lottery is executed with the second special symbol. By setting different advantages to be given to the player in the lottery of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the size of the privilege to be given to the player can be changed according to the kind of big win. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is changed between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, but the probability variation ratio, the probability of jackpot determination, the number of times of time reduction, the fluctuation time, etc. are the first special pattern. You may set so that a privilege may differ by changing and setting with a 2nd special design. In addition, by configuring as in the present embodiment, even in the probability variable gaming state with the same jackpot probability, depending on the type of time saving state to be granted, the type of special symbols that fluctuate during time saving (during probability change) is switched. It is possible to change the benefits that the player can receive in the variable probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to set a variable probability gaming state in which a plurality of benefits to be provided are different. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the types of jackpot guided by the probability variation switch 65e3 are set more for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol, it is possible to set a plurality of probability variation ratios. Therefore, it is possible to change the probability variation rate according to the time saving state, and to provide the player with a fresh game.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the condition for ending the time saving state (variable probability state) ease). Therefore, it is possible to vary the advantage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, in the second embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above, the player is configured to be able to select a game for executing the lottery for the first special symbol and a game for executing the lottery for the second special symbol. It is configured so that a game corresponding to the game method selected by the player can be played. That is, when a predetermined game state (time saving state) is set, any game (game for executing the lottery for the first special symbol, game for executing the lottery for the second special symbol) is configured to be executable. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined game state (for example, time saving state), one game (for example, a game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol) can be executed ( Time saving state 1) is set, and in the state where the time saving state 1 is set, the other game (for example, a game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol) can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (Time saving state 2) is configured to be settable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set and provide different game states in stages to the player, so that a game with a higher attack element than the second embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above can be provided. machine can be provided.

By configuring in this way, for example, in the first special symbol lottery executed when the time saving state 1 is set, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is established more than the second special symbol lottery. Configure to make it easier. Specifically, when the number of variations (lottery) of the first special symbol is 30 times, the variation number end condition is established, and when the first special symbol lottery wins twice in the small hit, the winning number of times end condition is constructed so that

Then, during the period in which the time saving state 1 is continuously set, in some cases when the special symbol jackpot is won, after the jackpot ends (after the jackpot game ends), the time saving state 2 (second special symbol It is configured so that a time saving state in which a lottery is executed) is set. As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving end condition is configured to be more difficult to be established than the lottery of the first special symbol, specifically, the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol is 100. When it reaches the time, the condition for ending the number of times of winning is established, and the condition for ending the number of times of winning is established when a small win is won 20 times by lottery of the second special symbol.

By configuring in this way, once the time saving state 2 is reached, the time saving state is easier to continue than in the case of the time saving state 1 . Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with time-saving states with different game degrees. In the above-described example, the time saving state was shown as an example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, but it is not limited to this, it may be used for the probability variable state, and the end conditions for each of the probability variable state and the time saving state may be managed independently, and, for example, a game state (latency state), which is a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol low probability state, may be set.

In addition, as the end condition of the game state that can be set in the sixth embodiment, either the end condition set in each of the above-described embodiments or the assumed end condition may be adopted. Also good.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the degree of advantage is differentiated between when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. It is constructed so that a player who wins a jackpot in a lottery of 2 special patterns is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of time saving states, namely, time saving state 1 and working time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving state provided after the end of the jackpot. Time-saving state 1 is a time-saving state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is easily executed (the ball is easily entered into the right first ball entrance 64a2), and time-saving state 2 is the lottery for the second special symbol. is easier to execute (the ball is easier to enter into the second right ball inlet 64b). More specifically, in the time-saving state 1, it is easy to enter the first operation opening 704 inside the distribution winning device 700 (the first operation accessory 645a is easy to be opened) when it is hit. The role item 701 is released. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the time saving state 1, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64a1, so that the lottery for the first special symbol can be easily executed. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2, the electric role object 701 is easily entered into the second operation opening 707 inside the distribution prize winning device 700 (the second operation role object 645b is easily opened) when winning. is released. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the time saving state 2, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the right second ball entrance 64b, so that the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable probability switch 65e3 is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and by varying the internal flow path, the ball can (easily) pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big hit. The probability variable switch 65e3 is provided with a jackpot type in which the ball cannot pass (difficult). Then, depending on whether the lottery of the first special pattern is a big hit or the lottery of the second special pattern is a big hit, the ratio of the jackpot types that can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is changed to change the probability variable state of the special pattern. It is configured to vary the transition ratio. In other words, it is configured such that a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol makes it easier to shift to the variable probability state compared to a case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player want to execute the lottery for the second special symbol. More attention can be drawn to whether the ball enters the working port 704 or the second working port 707). Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of states with different degrees of advantage are provided in the variable probability state as well as in the time saving state. That is, a variable probability state 1 in which the lottery for the first special symbol is likely to be executed and a variable probability state 2 in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed are provided. A plurality of probability variable states with different degrees of advantage in the probability variable state to be given, in addition to the fact that the ratio of shifting to the probability variable state differs depending on whether it is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. is provided, the game can be played aiming at a better state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that only one of them fluctuates (lottery) according to a predetermined regularity, but as described above. As in the fourth embodiment, it may be used in a gaming machine having a configuration in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed independently.

In the sixth embodiment, according to the type of the time saving state (time saving state 1, time saving state 2) to be set, the type of special symbol in which the lottery (variation) is executed during the time saving state is completely divided. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to vary the lottery (variation) frequency of each special symbol according to the type of the time saving state to be set. For example, when the time saving state A is set, the ratio of the second special symbol lottery (variation) to the first special symbol lottery (fluctuation) once, and the time saving state B If it is set, the ratio of the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special pattern to the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special pattern is performed three times, and the time saving state C is set. , only the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is executed, and only the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed when the time saving state D is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with various game properties according to the time saving state that is set.

Instead of the pachinko machine 10 used in the sixth embodiment described above, the following pachinko machine 10 may be used. executed. As a result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64a1, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened is executed. In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot by a special lottery after the jackpot game ends according to the type of jackpot won is high, and the probability variable gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a probability variable state) in which it is easier to receive a special lottery Although the probability of hitting a jackpot does not change, a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) that makes it easier to receive special lottery is given.

And, although the detailed description will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 has a probability variable state 1 in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed during the probability variable state, and a probability variable state in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed 2 are provided. In addition, the jackpot based on the lottery of the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery of the special figure 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one big winning game is large, or the number of balls that can be obtained by one big winning game is large, or the number of balls that can be obtained by one big winning game is large. It is set so that it is easy to shift to a game state where it is easy to win a big win with a large number of balls that can be obtained by one big win game).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 provides a variable probability state 1 as a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and a variable probability state 2 that is more advantageous than the variable probability state 1.例文帳に追加As a result, for example, the ratio of shifting from the normal game to the variable probability state is increased (easily entered into the variable probability state 1), making it easier for the player to experience the game state (variable probability state) that makes it easier to win a big hit than the normal game. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the performance during the jackpot game and the performance executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the variable probability state, to make it possible to enjoy the game, and to reduce the ratio of shifting to the variable probability state 2. In addition, it is possible to provide the player who has shifted to the variable probability state 2 with a sense of superiority, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved for the player.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 in the time saving state as well as the variable probability state described above. A gaming state that makes it easy to receive a special lottery (a ball can easily enter the entrance where the special lottery is executed, and a shorter fluctuation time than the normal game state is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special lottery) Easy game state) is set. Furthermore, in the time saving state 1, the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed, and in the time saving state 2, the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. is set as a game state more advantageous to the player.

When using such a pachinko machine 10, the configuration of the game board 13 should be as follows. In other words, referring to FIG. 169, when the game state shifts to the probability variable state or the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the right side area of the game board 13 (the right side area of the variable display unit 80) A target game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed. When a right-handed game is executed, the ball shot to the right side area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69 and hits the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 or near the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67. It passes between the planted nails and flows down toward the distribution winning device 700. - 特許庁The distribution winning device 700 is provided with an electric accessory 710, and is configured so that a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 when the electric accessory 710 is in an open state. This electric accessory 710 is in an open state when the result of a normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 is a win. It should be noted that the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and it is preferable that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution prize winning device 700 is different.

Although detailed description is omitted, the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 700 will be described. When an electric accessory 710 provided in the distribution winning device 700 is opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700, and the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 falls on a switching valve 702.例文帳に追加(It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). This switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on winning a winning (normal drawing) as a result of the normal drawing lottery, and depending on the operating position of the switching valve 702, the first Either the channel 703 or the second channel 706 is configured to communicate as a channel through which the ball can flow down. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 82, the second flow path 706 communicates during the period from 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after winning a normal figure. The switching valve 702 operates as shown in FIG.

In this way, the mechanism that changes the accessory between the open state and the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electric structure is a known technology called non-electric accessory. In this embodiment, a detailed description of the configuration of this non-electric accessory has been omitted, but any technique that has already been disclosed may be adopted as appropriate.

On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the distribution winning device 700 and entered the second operation port 707 is operated by the second operation mechanism 708 in the same manner as in the configuration of the non-electric accessory described above. 2 Open the working accessory 645b. By entering the ball into the right second ball entrance 64b, which becomes possible by opening the second operating accessory 645b, the lottery of the special figure 2, which is set more advantageously than the special figure 1, is performed. executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-motorized role comprising the second actuation port 707, the second actuation mechanism 708 and the second actuation role 645b, the above-described first actuation port 704, the first actuation mechanism 705 and the first Since it is the same as the configuration of the non-motorized accessory composed of the operating accessory 645a, detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, the switching valve 702 described above is for a predetermined period, that is, the second flow path 706 is opened only during the period from 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the winning per normal pattern. The reason why the first channel 703 is operated to communicate during the other period (including the period when it is not won per normal figure) is that the second channel 706 is opened by flowing down. Since the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second operating accessory 645b, the special figure 2 lottery is prevented from being executed by an illegal game. It's for.

In addition, as for the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, when a ball entering the sorting prize winning device 700 enters a state in which the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b, the ball is sorted. It is preferable that a ball that does not enter the prize winning device 700 and flows down the right side area of the game board 13 is guided by a plurality of nails and entered into any of the ball entrances that are in a ball entry possible state.

Further, the distribution winning device 700 is provided with a switching valve 702 for distributing the entered ball to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. , to the position where the second flow path is open for 3 seconds after lapse of 1.5 seconds. The operation control of the switching valve 702 is configured such that a constant operation is executed regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710 .

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as the operation control of the switching valve 702, the ball entering with the opening pattern B is reliably guided to the first flow path 703 so that the ball entering with the opening pattern A is reliably guided to the first flow path 703. In order to guide the user to the second channel 706 , the operation is performed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) from the operation of the electric accessory 701 . As a result, it becomes possible to guide the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to a desired flow path, and the ball is released from the distribution winning device 700 during the operation performed by the switching valve 702 to change the state. You can prevent it from falling.

As described above, according to another example, the opening pattern of the electric role (electric role) can be set based on the jackpot type, and based on the set electric role (electric role) opening pattern. A game state in which FIG. 1 substantially fluctuates and a game state in which special figure 2 substantially fluctuates can be set. In addition, there are benefits that are more advantageous to the player when winning the jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery than when winning the jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery It is set so that the rate of shifting to the game state in which the lottery in FIG. 2 is executed is high) is given.

As a result, the time-saving state and the variable probability state are further added to the game state (time-saving state 2, variable probability state 2) that is advantageous to the player, and although it is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state, it is more advantageous to the player than the state of the normal game. It is possible to provide a game state (time saving state 1, probability variable state 1) which is a game state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states in the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Specifically, by setting a high transition rate for shifting from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability variable state 1, the player can easily see the effect executed in the time saving state or the probability variable state. Or, by setting the transition ratio to shift to the variable probability state 2, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, to give a sense of superiority to the player who has shifted to the variable probability state 2. By doing so, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved for the player.

It should be noted that although two types of opening pattern A and opening pattern B can be set as opening patterns for electric roles (electric accessories), three or more types of opening patterns can be set without being limited to this. You may This makes it possible to set a wider variety of game states.

In addition, as the opening pattern of the electric part (electric accessory), there are an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the ball to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern (opening pattern B) that guides the ball to the second flow path 706. However, for example, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 may be provided. As a result, the player can enjoy which channel (the first channel 703 or the second channel 706) the ball that hits the electric accessory 701 is guided to, further improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Furthermore, it is configured such that a ball that enters the distribution winning device 700 enters one of the operating ports (first operating port 704 or second operating port 707). A flow path is provided to discharge the ball to the game board 13 again, or a flow that enters the out port that communicates with the discharge port (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 without entering each operation port. A road may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the flow of the balls in the distribution winning device 700, and it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the switching valve 702 is configured so that a predetermined constant operation is performed after a winning game is executed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when the number of balls entered into the sorting prize winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the communicating flow path is switched.

The operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (motor not shown). It may be configured such that the communicating flow path is switched when it is filled.

Further, the ball guided to any flow path by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow path and enter any working port. A distribution member may be provided to distribute the balls guided to the paths to a plurality of flow paths, and the balls distributed to the specific flow paths by the distribution member may enter the corresponding operation openings.

In addition, it is configured so that the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 in a certain time (0.4 seconds in this embodiment), for example, the distribution winning device 700 As a means for varying (extending) the time for a ball entering the switching valve 702 to reach the switching valve 702, a plurality of paths with different periods until the ball entering the sorting prize winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 are provided. A sorting means may be provided for allocating a ball that has landed in the sorting prize winning device 700 to one of the paths. As a result, the player can play the game while predicting at what timing the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 will reach the switching valve 702, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. It has the effect of being able to

Next, the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of another example mentioned above is demonstrated. The pachinko machine 10 has a normal game state, a probability variable state 1 (unfavorable probability variable), a probability variable state 2 (advantageous probability variable), a time saving state 1 (unfavorable time saving) and a time saving state 2 (advantageous time saving) based on the jackpot type that is won. configured to migrate.

First, in the normal game state, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed, and when the jackpot is won, 50% shifts to the probability change state 1, 30% shifts to the probability change state 2, and 15% is the time saving state 1. , and 5% shift to time saving state 2.

Next, since the release pattern A is set as the electric role release pattern in the probability variation state 1, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (special figure 1 substantial variation). In the variable probability state 1, when a jackpot is won, the variable probability state 1 is looped at 50%, 30% shifts to the variable probability state 2, 15% shifts to the time reduction state 1, and 5% shifts to the time reduction state 2.例文帳に追加Thus, since the probability variable state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 is substantially changed like the normal game state, it is different in that the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal game state, but the game after the jackpot is won. The state transition destinations and their distribution are the same.

Since the release pattern B is set as the electric role release pattern in the variable probability state 2, a game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (special figure 2 substantial variation). In the probability variable state 2, when a jackpot is won, the probability variable state 2 is looped at 80%, 15% shifts to the time saving state 2, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 1. - 特許庁In this way, the variable probability state 2 is a game state in which the special figure 2 is substantially changed, and a game state in which the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal game state, so the game state is most advantageous to the player. becomes.

Next, in the time saving state 1, since the release pattern A is set as the electric role release pattern, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (special figure 1 substantial variation). In the time saving state 1, when a jackpot is won, 50% shifts to the variable probability state 1, 30% shifts to the variable probability state 2, 15% loops the time saving state 1, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 2. - 特許庁Thus, since the time saving state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates as in the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure and the normal figure is shortened, and the electric accessory 701 at the time of the normal figure hits. Although the release pattern is different from that in the normal game state, the transition destination of the game state after winning the jackpot and its distribution are the same.

Since the release pattern B is set as the electric role release pattern in the time saving state 2, a game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (special figure 2 substantial variation). In the time saving state 2, when a jackpot is won, 80% shift to the variable probability state 2, 15% loop the time saving state 2, and 5% shift to the time saving state 1. - 特許庁In this way, the time saving state 2 is a game state in which the special figure 2 substantially changes, and the probability of shifting to the probability change state 2, which is most advantageous to the player when winning the jackpot, is normal game state It is a game state set to 2.5 times or more (so-called withdrawal zone). By providing such a game state, it is possible to increase the possibility of shifting to the most advantageous game state (probability variable state 2) from the normal game state for the player, and to motivate the player to play the game. There is an effect that it is possible to

It should be noted that the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate after the jackpot in each game state are not limited to these and may be appropriately set. For example, the time saving state to be shifted from the normal game state may be only the time saving state 2. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play of a player who has not been able to shift to the variable probability state even though he has won a jackpot in the normal game state.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution rate are unified according to the type of special figure, but not limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate according to the game state may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable probability state continues until the next big hit, and the time saving state is given 10 times regardless of the game state as a time saving state. The specification continues until the number of times (eg 100 times) is executed, or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state every time the special figure changes is executed, and by winning the lottery, the probability change state to the normal game state It may be configured to migrate. In this case, as the probability variable state advantageous to the player and the probability variable state disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probability variable state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probability variable state to the normal game state is different. You may make it so.

In each embodiment described above, set a plurality of time-saving end conditions, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the time-saving end condition is established when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is a specific number of fluctuations, that is, fluctuation When the number of times end condition is satisfied and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small win is won by lottery of special symbols, that is, when the winning number of times end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is changed to the normal state at different timings. It is configured so that it can be moved to

Using this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation frequency end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the winning frequency end condition is satisfied. In that case, it is preferable to provide a game machine that is controlled to shift the game state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol, the range obtained by adding up the special symbol variation time and the time during which the small winning game is executed according to the established time saving end condition. You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving end condition that has been established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during a small winning game that gives a small amount of benefits to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small winning types are provided in which the period during which the small winning game is executed is different, and even if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small winning type for which the winning number ending condition is satisfied. It is preferable to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the type of time saving end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed content of the time saving end condition.

Also, in this case, even if the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied, there are cases where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is started, and when the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is ended. should be configured so that This makes it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small hit It uses a configuration that separately executes the processing to determine, but is not limited to this, centrally manages the time saving information updated according to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern, and the established time saving end condition You may use the structure which sets the timing which terminates a time saving state based on.

In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the normal game state. However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether the player is operated by tilting left or right or front and back, or a lever-shaped operation means that can be operated by the player touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means that can distinguish between them, or a wireless operating means that can distinguish that an operation has been made by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is the audio lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types. may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are determined in advance, and a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed independently of each other are explained. However, each of the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Time saving ends with small winning)
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination when a determination condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. target display execution means; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; When the identification information indicating a second determination result different from the determination result is stopped and displayed, a small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game, and the privilege game execution means. A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the privilege game is finished, and the game state setting means is set. and end condition setting means for setting a condition for ending the second game state, wherein the end condition setting means is established when the dynamic display is executed a predetermined number of times by the dynamic display execution means. a second termination condition that can be satisfied based on the determination result of the determination means being the first determination result; and the determination result of the determination means being the second determination result. and a third end condition that can be established based on the gaming machine A1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) determined according to the type of the privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is difficult to play the game while paying attention to whether the time-saving game will continue or not, and the game tends to become monotonous. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to set a plurality of end conditions for ending the second game state that is advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to predict, and it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine A1, when the number of times the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result reaches a predetermined number during the period in which the second game state is continuously set, the third end A gaming machine A2 characterized by satisfying a condition.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can be terminated depending on the number of times the small privilege game is executed during the second game state, the player can be made to pay attention to the determination result of the determination means during the second game state. can be done.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the small privilege game from being excessively executed during the second game state.

In the gaming machine A2, the determination means also determines a third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result, and the small privilege game execution means determines whether the determination result of the determination means is The game machine A3 is characterized in that the small privilege game is executed even when the third determination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to execute a small privilege game in which the third end condition cannot be satisfied, the second game state cannot be achieved only by grasping the number of small privilege games executed during the second game state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the period to be continuously set, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the determining means, as the second determination result, causes the small privilege game execution means to execute the first small privilege game, and the small privilege game execution means to cause the second determination result to It discriminates at least a special second discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result for executing a second small privilege game different from 1 small privilege game, and the number of times that the specific second discrimination result is discriminated is determined. The third termination condition is satisfied when the first predetermined number of times is reached, or when the number of times the special second determination result is determined reaches a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to set different end conditions for different times according to the type of the small privilege game, the second game state continues only by grasping the number of times the small privilege game is executed during the second game state. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the period set by Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine A4, when the small privilege game is executed, a variable ball entry means capable of changing from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter to a second state in which it is easy to enter, and the variable ball entry means a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the ball can pass; The ease with which the game ball passes through the specific area is made different between when the first small privilege game is executed by the game execution means and when the second small privilege game is executed. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, according to the type of the small privilege game to be executed in the gaming machine A, the possibility of ending the second game state and the possibility of executing the privilege game can be made different. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Feature B group> (Different time-saving end conditions for special 1 game and special 2 game)
A first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the first ball-entering means. A predetermined first determination is executed when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, a game ball enters the second ball entering means, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means; and dynamic display execution for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. means, bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means. A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the privilege game is finished; an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions for the second game state, wherein the end condition setting means sets the end condition to the second determination rather than the first determination being executed as the plurality of the end conditions. and a second termination condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the first determination is performed than when the second determination is performed. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Furthermore, the gaming machine described above executes a special symbol lottery as a game lottery, and is capable of executing various game lotteries by providing two types of special symbols. However, the above-described gaming machine ends the time saving state when the number of times of lottery of special symbols executed during the time saving game reaches a predetermined number of times. The time saving state will end under the same conditions regardless of the type. Therefore, there is a problem that the game in the time-saving state tends to become monotonous. In addition, although the contents of the lottery executed during the time saving state are made different according to the type of the special pattern to be drawn, the game result of whether or not the time saving state ends is determined by the special pattern to be drawn. Since it is the same regardless of the type, it is impossible to associate the period during which the time saving state continues with the type of special symbol in which the lottery is executed during the time saving state, and the game tends to become monotonous. There was a problem. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine B1, it is possible to make the end conditions for ending the second game state different between when the first determination is performed and when the second determination is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which determination is executed during the second game state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine B1 has a small privilege game executing means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, and the end condition setting means comprises at least the A determination result end condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and a dynamic display end condition that can be satisfied based on the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means. and the determining means is characterized in that it is easier to determine the result of the second determination when the second determination is performed than when the first determination is performed. Game machine B2 to play.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one of the end conditions for ending the second game state is more likely to be established when the second determination is performed than when the first determination is performed. A determination is made, and the player cares what the result of the determination was. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine B2, the termination condition setting means is characterized in that the determination result termination condition is set as the first termination condition, and the dynamic display termination condition is set as the second termination condition. Game machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination result end condition is more likely to be established when the first determination is performed than when the second determination is performed. In other words, although the second determination is more likely to result in the second determination result, the determination result end condition is less likely to be satisfied. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether the result of the second determination is the first determination or the second determination, it is possible to provide a game that is not boring.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the determination result of the determining means is the second determination result, one second determination result type is determined from a plurality of second determination result types as the type of the second determination result. a second discrimination result type determining means, wherein the termination condition setting means sets, as the discrimination result termination condition, a different termination condition for each second discrimination result type determined by the second discrimination result type determining means; A gaming machine B4 characterized by:

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since different end conditions can be set based on the second determination result type, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the enjoyment of predicting the future game can be enhanced, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the second determination result type determining means determines whether the determination result of the first determination is the second determination result or when the determination result of the second determination is the second determination result. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is possible to determine a different second determination result type depending on the case.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, different second discrimination result types can be determined between the first discrimination and the second discrimination. There is an effect that the ease with which the result end condition is established can be easily varied.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B5, the end condition setting means sets a first dynamic display end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display based on the first determination is executed as the dynamic display end condition. and a second dynamic display end condition that can be established when the dynamic display based on the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to vary the end conditions for ending the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which determination is executed during the second game state, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine B6, the dynamic display end condition is satisfied when the number of dynamic display times in which the dynamic display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, and the end condition setting means includes the A gaming machine B7 characterized in that the number of dynamic display times for establishing the first dynamic display end condition and the number of dynamic display times for establishing the second dynamic display end condition are set differently. .

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the number of dynamic display times that satisfies the first dynamic display end condition and the number of dynamic display times that satisfies the second dynamic display end condition can be made different, the second game state is set. To provide a variety of games because the easiness of ending the second game state can be made different between the game in which the first determination is performed and the game in which the second determination is performed in the case where the second determination is performed. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine B7, the end condition setting means sums the first dynamic display count executed based on the first determination and the second dynamic display count executed based on the second determination. A game machine B8 characterized in that it sets an upper limit dynamic display ending condition that is established when the total number of times of dynamic display made reaches the upper limit number of times.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even when the sum of the number of dynamic display times and the number of dynamic display times of the second dynamic display reaches the upper limit, the second game state is terminated. Excessive execution of the first determination and the second determination can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine B8 has advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the determination result of the determination means is likely to be the first determination result for a specific period when a predetermined transition condition is established, and the predetermined transition condition is , a game machine B9 characterized in that it can be established when said second game state is set by said game state setting means.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the advantageous state can be set in accordance with the timing when the second game state is set, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine B9 has special state setting means for setting a special state advantageous to the player when the first game state is set during the specific period in which the advantageous state is set. A gaming machine B10 characterized by:

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second game state ends during the period in which the advantageous state is set, the special state is set. This makes it possible to set different game states according to the timing at which the second game state ends. In addition, since the special state is set by ending the second game state within a predetermined period of time, which is the specific period, the novelty of positively ending the second game state that is advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make a game more playable, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

As the specific period, a period from the timing when the second game state is set until a predetermined end condition is satisfied may be set. It is also possible to set a period from when the conditions for establishment of (1) are satisfied until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic group C> (Remaining time short-term production)
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination when a determination condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information indicating the first determination result displayed on the display means. a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the player is executed, a first game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished, and the first game state. a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the game state setting means; and an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions for the second game state set by the game state setting means; An end condition determination means for determining an end condition that is likely to be satisfied among the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means, and a suggestion for suggesting a period in which the second game state is continuously set. suggestive effect execution means for executing an effect, and suggestive effect mode setting means for setting a mode of the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, wherein the suggestive effect mode setting means sets the end condition. A gaming machine C1, characterized in that an effect mode of the suggestive effect is set based on the end condition determined by the determining means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) determined according to the type of the privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is difficult to play the game while paying attention to whether the time-saving game will continue or not, and the game tends to become monotonous. Therefore, the present applicant has developed a gaming machine that makes it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the time-saving game is set to continue by setting a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving game. In this gaming machine, since there are a plurality of termination conditions for ending the time-saving game, it is difficult to inform the player of the remaining period of the time-saving game, and the game is provided to the player incomprehensible. there were. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the gaming machine C1, even if a plurality of end conditions for ending the second game state are set, the suggestive effect can be set based on the end condition that is likely to be satisfied among them. , the player can easily grasp the period during which the second game state is continuously set.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the end condition determination means determines the end condition that is likely to be satisfied based on the execution contents of the determination means during the second game state.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the termination condition that is likely to be satisfied is determined based on the actual execution contents of the determination means, there is an effect that the determination accuracy can be improved.

In the game machine C2, updating means for updating predetermined game information based on the execution contents of the determining means executed during the period in which the second game state is continuously set, and the end condition setting means is, as the plurality of end conditions, a first end condition that can be satisfied when the first game information is updated by the update means, and second game information different from the first game information is updated by the update means; A gaming machine C3 characterized by setting at least a second end condition that can be satisfied when the game is played.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since end conditions are set for a plurality of pieces of game information that can be established by the execution of the determining means, whether or not the second game state will end is determined based on the execution contents of the determining means. can be made difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the suggestive effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C3, the first termination condition is satisfied when the number of updates of the first game information reaches the first number, and the second termination condition is the number of updates of the second game information. becomes the second number of times, and based on the game information updated by the updating means, the first remaining number of updates until the first termination condition is satisfied, and the second termination a second remaining number of updates until a condition is satisfied; A game machine C4 characterized in that it discriminates.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the end conditions that are likely to be satisfied are determined based on the remaining number of times until each end condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the precision of the effect mode of the suggestive effect can be enhanced.

The game machine C4 has pre-end condition determination for determining whether the first remaining update number or the second remaining update number determined by the remaining update number determination means satisfies a predetermined pre-end condition. The game machine C5, wherein the suggestive effect mode setting means sets the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the determination result of the pre-end condition determining means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the suggestive effect can be set according to whether or not the pre-end condition is satisfied by the pre-end condition determining means, until the end condition is established for the player by the effect mode of the suggestive effect. There is an effect that the remaining number of times can be predicted.

In the gaming machine C5, the suggestive effect mode setting means sets a specific suggestive effect mode when it is determined by the pre-end condition determining means that a plurality of the pre-end conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to set a specific suggestive effect mode when the pre-end condition is established, it is possible for the player to predict the remaining period of the time-saving state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of prediction.

Any one of the game machines C1 to C6 has a first period setting means for setting a first period after the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and the suggestive effect mode setting means includes: A gaming machine C7 characterized in that, when the end condition is satisfied in a state in which the first period is set by the first period setting means, a special suggestion performance mode is set.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the end condition is met within a predetermined period after the second game state advantageous to the player is set, the special suggestion performance mode is set, so the performance mode corresponding to the timing when the end condition is met is set. can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced by making the player aware of the timing at which the end condition is satisfied.

In the game machine C7, the first period setting means sets the first period until the number of times of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means after the second game state is set reaches a predetermined number. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first period is set until the number of determinations executed by the determination means reaches a predetermined number, the player can easily grasp the state in which the first period is set. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy whether or not the end condition is satisfied while the first period is set, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C7 or C8, the first period setting means sets the first period until the elapsed time from setting the second game state reaches a predetermined time. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7 or C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first period is set when the elapsed time after the setting of the second game state is within the predetermined period of time, the player is encouraged to play the game in order to satisfy the end condition within the first period. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic D group> (1 type and 2 types are usually shortened)
a first discriminating means for discriminating when a first discrimination condition is satisfied; a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the first discriminating means; and the identification indicating the first discrimination result on the display means When the information is displayed, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished, the condition is different from the first determination condition. A specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which the second determination condition is likely to be established, a second determination means for performing determination when the second determination condition is satisfied, and a result of determination by the second determination means. variable ball entry means capable of changing from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter to a second state in which it is easy to enter a game ball when identification information indicating a second determination result is displayed on the display means; and a specific area through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. , The specific game state setting means selects a first specific game state in which the second determination condition is likely to be established, and a second specific game state in which the second determination condition is more difficult to be established than in the first specific game state. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being at least configurable.

Here, when the game ball enters the starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is selected by lottery. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area during a predetermined game that can be executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Furthermore, there is a game machine that allows setting of a game state in which the above-described privilege game is likely to be executed as the game state of the game machine. The above-described gaming machine sets two game states, a game state advantageous to the player and another game state. , there is a problem that the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing monotony of a game and improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to set game states in which the easiness of establishment of the second determination condition is varied during the specific game state, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. There is

In the gaming machine D1, display means capable of displaying first identification information for indicating the result of determination by the first determination means and second identification information for indicating the result of determination by the second determination means; first dynamic display means for causing the means to dynamically display the first identification information for a predetermined first period; and second dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for a predetermined second period. a first dynamic display period setting means for setting a first dynamic display period of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display means; and the and a second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. , the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information, and the display means displays the first identification information in a first display mode for indicating the first determination result; The specific game state is set in response to being stopped and displayed, and the variable ball entry means is set in response to the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the second display mode for indicating the second determination result. is changed to the second state, and the specific game state setting means sets the first dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means, or the second dynamic display period The game machine D2 is characterized in that the first specific game state and the second specific game state are set by differentiating the second dynamic display period set by setting means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by making the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period during the specific game state different, it is possible to set the first specific game state and the second specific game state, so during the specific game state Another effect is that it is possible to easily set game states in which the ease with which the second determination condition is established is varied.

In the gaming machine D2, the second dynamic display period setting means provides a second dynamic display that is shorter when the first specific game state is set than when the second specific game state is set. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it facilitates the setting of the period.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by shortening the dynamic display period, it is possible to facilitate the execution of determination by the second determination means, so there is an effect that the game state can be easily set.

In the game machine D2 or D3, the second determination means is configured to be able to determine the first determination result, and the second dynamic display period setting means is configured to detect the second determination means during the second specific game state. is the first determination result, a second dynamic display period is set shorter than when the determination result is a determination result other than the first determination result. .

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2 or D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination result of the second determination means is the first determination result, a dynamic display period shorter than other determination results is set, so there is an effect that the privilege game can be easily executed. .

In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the first dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the second specific game state is set than when the first specific game state is set. The game machine D5 is characterized in that it facilitates setting of the first dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is easier to set the short first dynamic display period when the second specific game state is set than when the first specific game state is set, the game state can be easily set. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D5, the first dynamic display period setting means, when the determination result of the first determination means during the first specific state is the first determination result, sets other than the first determination result. The gaming machine D6 is characterized by setting a first dynamic display period shorter than that in the determination result.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the case of the first determination result in the first specific state, a shorter first dynamic display period is set than in the case of the determination result other than the first determination result. As a result, the player can be immediately notified that the determination result is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

In any one of gaming machines D2 to D6, when a predetermined first acquisition condition is satisfied, a first acquisition means for acquiring first ball entry information, and the first ball entry information acquired by the first acquisition means a first storage means capable of storing a plurality of information up to a first predetermined number until the first determination condition is satisfied; and acquiring second ball entry information when a predetermined second acquisition condition is satisfied. and second storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the second ball entry information acquired by the second acquisition means up to a second predetermined number until the second determination condition is satisfied. And, when the determination result of the first second determination means executed in the state where the first specific game state is set is the second determination result, the first specific game state is set A game machine D7 characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period for indicating the first determination result of the first determination means executed in a state of being set is set. .

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination result of the second determination means executed first in the state in which the first specific game state is set is the second determination result, the first in the state in which the first specific game state is set A dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period is set for indicating the determination result of the first determination means which is executed at the beginning of the period. As a result, even if the first specific game state is set in a state in which both the first storage means and the second storage means store the ball entry information, the second determination means of the second determination means is advantageous to the player. The determination result can be immediately notified to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

<Feature E group> (Electric sapo control when winning a small hit during time saving)
Determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the privilege game is finished; end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions for the second game state, wherein the game state setting means sets the first game state in accordance with the end condition satisfied among the plurality of end conditions. The game machine E1 is characterized in that the timings to play are made different.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, since the timing to end the time-saving game is the same, the player can immediately grasp whether the time-saving game has ended, so the game becomes monotonous and the interest in the game is lost. I had a problem with it going down. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing for setting the first game state can be varied based on the type of the end condition that has been established. can have. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

The game machine E1 has a small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, The termination condition setting means includes at least a first termination condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display is executed and a second termination condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result. When it is determined that the first end condition is met, the game state setting means ends the corresponding dynamic display and stops displaying the identification information. When it is determined that the second end condition is satisfied, the first game state is set based on the execution of the corresponding small privilege game. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it is set.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game state is set according to the content of the satisfied end condition, there is an effect that a game without a sense of incongruity can be provided.

The gaming machine E2 has end condition determination means for determining whether one of the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied, and the end condition determination means The game machine E3 is characterized in that the first termination condition is prioritized over the termination condition.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a plurality of termination conditions are satisfied by one determination performed by the determination means, the first termination condition is preferentially determined. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the situation in which the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second end condition to occur, and it is possible to provide the player with a special feeling.

When the configuration of the gaming machine E3 is used, when the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second end condition, the first game state is set based on the establishment of the first end condition. It is preferable that the configuration is more advantageous to the player than the case of setting the state. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the end condition is met but also to the end condition to be met, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E3, the end condition determination means determines whether the first end condition is satisfied when the determination means executes the determination of 1, and determines that the first end condition is not satisfied. The game machine E4 is characterized in that it determines whether or not the second end condition is satisfied in the case of the second end condition.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the timing for determining whether or not each end condition is met is different, it is possible to determine whether or not the first end condition is met with higher priority than whether or not the second end condition is met. effective.

Any one of the gaming machines E2 to E4 has game type determination means for determining a type of the small bonus game to be executed when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and the game type determination The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the means determines one type among a plurality of types in which the small privilege game is executed during different periods.

According to the gaming machine E5, it is possible to execute small privilege games with different execution periods. Therefore, the timing at which the second game state ends can be made significantly different across the game period during the small privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In a game machine E5, a variable ball entry means capable of being changed between a first state in which a game ball is easily entered and a second state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball, and the state of the variable ball entry means is variable. and a variable control means for controlling, wherein the small privilege game execution means executes variable control by the variable control means so that the variable ball entry means is in the first state as the small privilege game. A gaming machine E6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the degree of advantage to the player is greatly different between when the first end condition is satisfied and the first game state is set and when the second end condition is satisfied and the first game state is set. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the type of the end condition established and the type of the small privilege game to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E6, the type of the small privilege game is characterized in that the length of the period during which the variable ball-entering means is in the second state during the small privilege game is different.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, according to the type of the set small privilege game, the amount of privilege given to the player as the small privilege game also varies, so it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of the small privilege game to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E7, the type of the small privilege game has a plurality of types in which the length of the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the first state during the small privilege game is the same. Gaming machine E8.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E7, the execution period of the small privilege game is different for a plurality of small privilege games in which the privilege amount that can be given to the player as the small privilege game is set to be the same. There is an effect that the length of the period in which the second game state is set can be made different.

<Feature F group> (Player selects multiple time-saving games)
A first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. executing the first determination based on the acquisition of the first acquired information that can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and acquires the second acquired information that can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entering means; discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the above, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the privilege game is completed; When a game state is set, a first advantageous game for executing the first determination and, unlike the first game, a second advantageous game for executing the second determination are played. A game machine F1 characterized by comprising a selection means that allows a player to select.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Such a gaming machine is configured to allow a player to play a game in which a game ball is shot toward a game area different from the usual one when executing the above-described time-saving game. The above-described gaming machine was able to provide a special feeling by executing a game method different from usual during the time-saving game, which is a game state advantageous to the player. , the game becomes monotonous and the interest in the game decreases. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing for setting the first game state can be varied based on the type of the end condition that has been established. can have. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the player can select a game method in an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of games. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the privilege game executed by the first advantageous game is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game executed by the second advantageous game. .

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the second advantageous game is easier to continue the advantageous game state than the first advantageous game.

Any one of the game machines F1 to F3 has a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and a shooting means capable of varying the shooting intensity and allowing the game ball to reach the game area, It has a first game area where a game ball can flow down and a second game area different from the first game area where a game ball shot at a predetermined firing intensity different from the one shooting intensity can flow down, The first ball-entering means is provided in one game area, the second ball-entering means is provided in the second game area, and the selection means varies the firing intensity of the launching means. Game machine F4.

The gaming machine F4 has variable ball entry means that allows the game ball fired by the shooting means to enter when the privilege game is executed, and the variable ball entry means moves the first game area. The game machine F5 is characterized in that both the game ball flowing down and the game ball flowing down the second game area are configured to be able to enter.

The gaming machine F4 or F5 has a third ball entering means that makes it easier to enter a ball than the first ball entering means when the advantageous state is set, and a game ball enters the third ball entering means. The first determination is executed even when the ball is played and the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first advantageous game is a game in which the game ball is entered into the third ball entering means. A gaming machine F6 characterized by:

In the gaming machine F6, the first ball-entering means is provided in a third game area different from the first game area and the second game area among the game areas. Machine F7.

In any one of the game machines F5 to F7, first detection means for detecting game balls flowing down the first game area and second detection means for detecting game balls flowing down the second game area and execution game determination means for determining the type of currently selected advantageous game based on the detection result of the first detection means and the detection result of the second detection means; and notification means for informing a player of information for indicating the determination result.

A game machine F9 characterized in that, in the game machine F8, the notification means performs notification while the privilege game is being executed.

<Feature G group> (Different time-saving fall conditions for Yoshikaze type)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball can be entered and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state, and the variable ball entry means are used to establish the open condition. a variable control means for varying the state from the closed state to the open state; a distribution means capable of distributing a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path; Distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which distribution is easy to the flow path and a second distribution state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path, and a game ball enters the first flow path. and a second ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second flow path. , first determination means for executing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; a first game state in which the variable control means makes it easy to change the variable ball entry means to the open state; and a game state setting means capable of setting two game states, wherein the game state setting means executes the first determination by the first determination means or the second determination by the second determination means , and when the first game state is set, it is better to execute the first determination than to execute the second determination. The game machine G1 is characterized in that the game state can be easily set.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets, with a predetermined probability, a probability variable gaming state in which the lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). By the way, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the variable probability gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to become monotonous. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine G1, executing the first determination can make it more difficult to set the second game state than executing the second determination. There is an effect that the game can be played while expecting that the 1 discrimination will be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the first privilege game is executed when the first determination means has a specific first determination result, and the first privilege game is executed when the second determination means has a specific second determination result. It has privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the privilege game, and according to the game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. The game machine G2 is characterized by comprising a ratio variable means for varying a setting ratio set between the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the distribution state setting means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the first allocation state and the second allocation state are determined according to the game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. Since the ratio set to either the state or the state is variable, there is an effect that the game can be diversified not only by the determination result but also by the game state.

In the gaming machine G2, a plurality of game states are set as the game state, and one of the plurality of game states is selected based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. A game machine G3 characterized by having a selection setting means for selecting and setting the game state.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, one game state is selected and set by the selection setting means based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that not only the determination result but also the game state to be set can be made interesting and the amusement can be improved.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G3, a second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. a specific area into which a game ball entered into the second variable ball entry means can enter; A gaming machine G4 characterized by having:

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G3, there is an effect that a game can be played in which players can expect whether or not the ball will enter a specific area, thereby diversifying the game.

In the gaming machine G4, the privilege granted by the privilege granting means is set such that the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result is set high until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result can be changed, so there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved. .

In either gaming machine G1 or G3, when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, until the end condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific first A game machine G6 characterized by having a special state setting means for setting a probability of being discriminated as the discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result higher than usual.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G3, it is possible to make the player worry about whether or not the termination condition is satisfied, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination when a discrimination condition is established, and a display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means. a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is displayed on the display means; and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the game state is completed; and the second game state set by the game state setting means. end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions for a game state; end condition determination means for determining an end condition that is likely to be met among the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means; Suggestive performance execution means for executing a suggestive performance for suggesting a period in which a game state is set to continue; and suggestive performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the suggested performance to be executed by the suggestive performance executing means. ,
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, determination means for executing a predetermined determination when a determination condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means, and display means for the display means. when the identification information indicating the first determination result is displayed, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished , game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state; and termination of the second game state set by the game state setting means. end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of conditions; end condition determination means for determining an end condition that is likely to be met among the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means; and the second game state continues. a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect for suggesting a period set as a set as a suggestive effect; is.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (1)

a determination means for executing a predetermined determination when a determination condition is satisfied;
display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of discrimination by the discrimination means;
privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is displayed on the display means;
A game state setting capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is finished. In a gaming machine having means,
end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions for the second game state set by the game state setting means;
a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect for suggesting a period during which the second game state continues;
suggesting effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the suggesting effect executed by the suggesting effect executing means;
The suggestive effect mode setting means can set the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the end condition that is likely to be satisfied among the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means,
The determination means comprises: a first determination means capable of executing a first determination when a first determination condition is satisfied as the determination condition; and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the first determination,
The termination condition setting means includes, as the plurality of termination conditions, a first termination condition that is likely to be satisfied when the first determination is executed more often than the second determination, and the second determination more than the first determination. can be set at least a second end condition that is likely to be satisfied when is executed many times,
The game machine is
When the second game state in which at least the first end condition and the second end condition are set is set, the game corresponding to the second end condition without allowing the player to grasp the first end condition. It is configured to be able to start the suggestive effect in the effect mode,
During the period from the end of the privilege game in which the second game state is set until the first second determination is executed, the second end condition in the second game state is likely to be satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the demand.

Images